EVD - 4800-4900 Manual - v1-0 - EN PDF

Show/Hide Bookmarks Table of contents
Preface and general

information
Safety information
Technical data
EDS4900U-REG Installation
00408862
Commissioning
Manual
During operation
Configuration
Code table
Troubleshooting and
fault elimination
Maintenance
DC bus connection
Application of brake units
Automation
Accessories and motors
Selection aid
Application examples
Signal-flow charts
Glossary
Table of keywords
DC speed controller 4800/4900

Show/Hide Bookmarks
Manual 4800 / 4900

Part Content Notes
A Table of contents
Preface and general information -
Safety information
B Technical data
Installation -
C Commissioning
During operation -
D Configuration
Code table -
E Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Maintenance -
F DC bus connection
G Application of brake units
H Automation -
I Accessories and motors -
K Selection aid
Application examples -
L Signal-flow charts -
M Glossary
-
Table of keywords
Explanation: - in the Manual.
All documentation indicated have a material number and the type code in the left upper corner of the cover page.
In part M there is a list with these data.
The controller’s features and data indicated in this Manual are at the state-of-art at the time of print. (The print data is indicated on the inner
cover page of each of part.)
Lenze endeavours to regularly update all documentation to the current technical state. If you should find any deviations, please refer to the
Operating Instructions, which are part of the delivery package, or to your nearest Lenze representative.
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Contents
Part A
1 Preface and general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 About these Operating Instructions ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1.1 Terminology used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Scope of delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 48XX/49XX controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.1 Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.2 Application as directed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3.3 Legal regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 EC Directives/Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.1 What is the purpose of EC directives? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.2 What does the CE mark imply? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.3 EC Low-Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.4.4 EC Directive Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.4.5 EC Machinery Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Persons responsible for the safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 General safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.3 Residual hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4 Layout of the safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Part B
3 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 General data / application conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 Rated data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.1 Mains voltage 400V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.2 Mains voltage 500V (Variant V014) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.4 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.4.1 Controller 4902 to 4X09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.4.2 Controllers 4811 to 4813, 4911 to 4913 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1.1 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.1 Protection of persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2.2 Protection of the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.3 Screening of the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.4 Earthing of the control electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.5 Mains types and conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
48XX/49XXSHB00399
i
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Contents
4.3 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.3.1 Power connection of standard controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.3.2 Separate supply of the field-current bridge at
a high motor field voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.3 Separate supply for the control electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4.3.4 Control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.4.1 Connection of analog signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.3.4.2 Connection of digital signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4.3.5 Feedback systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4.3.6 Change of the direction of rotation in 2Q operation . . . . . . . 4-23
4.3.7 Digital frequency selection and encoder emulation . . . . . . . . 4-24
4.3.8 Serial interface RS232/485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4.3.9 Fieldbus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4.4 Installation of a CE-typical drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.1 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
4.4.2 Components of the CE-typical drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4.4.3 Measures required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Part C
5 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Initial switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Commissioning of speed-controlled drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2.1 Wiring recommendation for speed control with tacho . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Wiring recommendation for speed control with resolver . . . . 5-4
5.2.3 Speed control with armature voltage feedback . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Commissioning of torque-controlled drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.1 Wiring recommendation for torque control with speed limitation 5-7
5.4 Input of the motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
5.5 Controller enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.6 Selection of direction of rotation and quick stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.7 Changing the internal control structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.8 Changing the terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
6 During operation1)
ii 48XX/49XXSHB00399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Contents
Part D
7 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1 Speed-controlled operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1 Setpoint selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7.1.1.1 Main setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1.2 Additional setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1.3 JOG setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1.4 Master current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.1.5 External torque reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7.1.1.6 Acceleration and deceleration times Tir ,Tif . . . 7-6
7.1.1.7 Limiation of the speed setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.1.2 Actual value feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.1.2.1 Armature voltage feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.1.2.2 DC tacho feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.1.2.3 Resolver feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.1.2.4 Incremental encoder feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7.1.3 Freely assignable inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.1.3.1 Freely assignable digital inputs (FDI) . . . . . . . . . 7-14
7.1.3.2 Freely assignable digital outputs (FDO) . . . . . . . 7-16
7.1.3.3 Frei belegbare “analoge” Eingänge (FAE) . . . . . 7-21
7.1.3.4 Freely assignable monitor outputs . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7.2 Torque control with speed limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7.3 Digital frequencycoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
7.3.1 Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7.3.2 Slave for digital frequency bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
7.3.3 Slave for digital frequency cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
7.3.4 Digital frequency output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7.3.5 Speed synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7.3.5.1 Speed-synchrnous running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7.3.5.2 Speed ratio synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7.3.6 Phase synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
7.3.6.1 Phase controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7.3.6.2 Phase trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7.3.6.3 Following error limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7.4 Additional control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.4.1 Redundant actual value feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
7.4.2 Changeable parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7.4.3 4Q / 2Q changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
7.4.4 Standstill excitation (field heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7.4.5 Control of a holding brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7.4.5.1 Engage brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
7.4.5.2 Open brake (release) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
7.5 Additional function blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
7.5.1 Process controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
7.5.2 Arithmetic blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7.5.3 Motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
7.5.3.1 Control of the motor potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7.5.3.2 Memory function of the
motor potentiometer (S&H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.5.4 Fixed set-value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
48XX/49XXSHB00399
iii
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Contents
7.5.5 Absolute value generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71

7.5.6 Limitation elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
7.5.7 PT1 element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7.5.8 Addition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
7.5.9 Square-wave generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
7.5.10 Dead-band element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
7.5.11 DT1 element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
7.5.12 Freely assignable comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
7.6 Additional control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
7.6.1 Additional torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
7.6.2 Speed dependent armature current limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83
7.6.3 n controller adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
7.6.4 S-shaped ramp function generator characteristic . . . . . . . . . 7-87
7.6.5 Actual speed filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
7.6.6 Excitation characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
7.7 Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
7.7.1 Change of the monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
7.7.2 Overload monitoring for the controller (IVt monitoring) . . . . . 7-94
7.7.3 Overload monitoring for the motor (I2Vtmonitoring) . . . . . . . . 7-95
7.7.4 Blocking protection for the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
7.7.5 Mains monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
7.7.6 Monitoring of the serial interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-101
7.8 Parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
7.8.1 Ways of parameter setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
7.8.2 Functions of the operation unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103
7.8.3 Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
7.8.4 Display functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
7.9 Code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-107
7.10 Table of attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-133
iv 48XX/49XXSHB00399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Contents
Part E
8 Troubleshooting and fault elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.1 Display on the operating unit of the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1.2 Display via LECOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.1 Structure of the history buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 Fault messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4 Reset of fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.5 Checking the drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.5.1 Checking the motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.5.2 Checking the controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
9 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.2 Service addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Part F
10 DC-bus operation1)
Part G
11 Application of brake units1)
48XX/49XXSHB00399
v
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Contents
Part H
12 Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.1 LECOM1 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.2 LECOM2 interface (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.3 LECOM code number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
12.4 Enable LECOM interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.4.1 Process data and parameter channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.4.2 High precision set and actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Part I
13 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
13.1 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.1.1 Mains fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.1.2 Armature fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.1.3 Internal fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.1.4 Fuse holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.2 Mains chokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.2.1 Mains chokes for powr connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7
13.2.2 Mains choke for separate supply of the field bridge . . . . . . . 13-8
13.3 Pre-assembled Lenze system cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.3.1 Resolver connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.3.2 Incremental encoder connection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.3.3 System cable for digital frequency coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.4 RFI filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.4.1 RFI filter for power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.4.2 RFI filter for fan supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
13.5 Networking accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.5.1 Connection elements for optical fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
13.5.2 Level converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
vi 48XX/49XXSHB00399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Contents
Part K
14 Selection aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1 Assignment of controller and motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1.1 Selection criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
14.1.2 Armature choke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
15 Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

15.1 Speed control with armature-voltage feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.2 Speed control with resolver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
15.3 Torque control with speed limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6
15.4 Current-ratio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
15.5 Dancer-position control at an unwinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-10
15.6 Hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-13
15.7 Speed-ratio synchronism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-15
15.8 Modular box 2215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
15.8.1 Winding drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-18
15.8.2 Positioning drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-20
15.9 Mains isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
15.9.1 Tipping with mains isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-23
15.9.2 Mains switch-off logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-25
Part L
16 Signal-flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
Part M
17 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
18 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
1) This chapter is part of the Lenze documentation structure.

It remains free for the 48XX/49XX DC speed controller.
48XX/49XXSHB00399
vii
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Contents
viii 48XX/49XXSHB00399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--A
00408849
Manual
Part A
Contents
Preface and general information
Safety information
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
The features, data and versions indicated in this Manual met the state of the art at
the time of printing.
(Printing date: inner cover pages of the parts).
In the event of deviations, please see the Operating Instructions or contact Lenze.
revised
Edition of: 01/03/1999
Show/Hide Bookmarks
1 Preface and general information
1.1 About these Operating Instructions ...

- These Operating Instructions are intended for safety-relevant operations on
and with the 48XX/49XX DC controllers. They contain safety information
which must be observed.
- All persons who work on and with 48XX/49XX DC controllers must have the
Operating Instructions available and observe all relevant notes and
instructions.
- The Operating Instructions must always be in a complete and perfectly
readable state.
1.1.1 Terminology used
Controller
In the following, the term ”controller” is used for ” 48XX/49XX DC controllers”.
Drive system
In the following text, the term ”drive system” is used for drive systems with
48XX/49XX DC controllers and other Lenze drive components.
1.2 Scope of delivery

- The scope of delivery includes:
- 1 48XX/49XX DC controller
- 1 Operating Instructions
- 1 Accessory kit with plug-in terminals
- After receipt of the delivery, check immediately whether the scope of
delivery matches the accompanying papers. Lenze does not accept any
liability for deficiencies claimed subsequently. Make a claim for
- visible transport damage immediately to the forwarder.
- visible deficiencies/incompleteness immediately to your Lenze
representative.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
1-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
1.3 48XX/49XX controller
1.3.1 Labelling
- Lenze 48XX/49XX controllers are unambiguously designated by the
contents of the nameplate.
- CE mark:
- Conformity with the Low-Voltage Directive
- Conformity with the EMC Directive
- Manufacturer
- Lenze GmbH & Co KG
Postfach 101352
D-31763 Hameln
1.3.2 Application as directed

48XX/49XX controllers
- must only be operated under the conditions prescribed in these
Instructions.
- are components
- for open-loop and closed-loop control of variable speed drives with
separately excited DC motors.
- to be installed into a machine.
- used for assemblies together with other components to form a machine.
- should not be driven together with other DC motors, such as shunt motors
or separately excited motors with a stabilizing series winding, before you
have contacted Lenze.
- are electric units for the installation into control cabinets or similar enclosed
operating housings.
- are not to be used as domestic appliances, but only for industrial purposes.
Drive systems with 48XX/49XX controllers
- comply with the EMC Directive, if they are installed according to the
guidelines for CE-typical drive systems.
- can be used
- on public and non-public mains.
- in industrial premises.
The user is responsible for the compliance of his application with the EC directives.
Any other use shall be deemed inappropriate!
1-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
1.3.3 Legal regulations
Liability
- The information, data and notes in these Operating Instructions met the
state-of-the-art at the time of printing. Claims referring to drive systems
which have already been supplied cannot be derived from the information,
illustrations, and descriptions.
- The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in these Operating
Instructions are for guidance only and must be adapted to your own specific
application. Lenze does not take responsibility for the suitability of the
process and circuit proposals.
- The indications given in these Operating Instructions describe the features
of the product without warranting them.
- Lenze does not accept any liability for damage and operating interference
caused by:
- disregarding these Operating Instructions
- unauthorized modifications to the controller
- operating errors
- improper working on and with the controller
Warranty
- Terms of warranty: see terms of sale and delivery of Lenze GmbH & Co KG.
- Warranty claims must be made immediately after detecting defects or faults.

- The warranty is void in all cases where liability claims cannot be made.
Disposal
The controller consists of different materials.
The following table lists which materials can be recycled and which must be
disposed of.
Material recycle dispose
Metal - -
Plastic - -
Printed-board assemblies - -
48XX/49XXSHB0399
1-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
1.4 EC Directives/Declaration of Conformity
1.4.1 What is the purpose of EC directives?

EC directives are issued by the European Council and are intended for the
determination of common technical requirements (harmonization)and certification
procedures within the European Community. At the moment, there are 21 EC
directives for product ranges. The directives are or will be converted to national
laws of the member states. A certification issued by one member state is
automatically valid without any further approval in all other member states.
The texts of the directive are restricted to the essential requirements. Technical
details are or will be determined by European harmonized standards.
1.4.2 What does the CE mark imply?

After a verification, the conformity according to the EC directives is certified by
affixing a CE mark. Within the EC there are no commercial barriers for a product
with the CE mark.
Controllers on their own with the CE mark correspond exclusively to the Low
Voltage Directive. For the compliance with the EMC Directive, only general
recommendations have been issued so far. The CE conformity of the installed
machine remains the responsibility of the user. For the installation of CE-typical
drive systems with the basic version of 48XX/49XX controllers and the variants
V011, V013 and V014, Lenze has already proved the conformity with the EMC
Directive (see chapter 4.4).
1.4.3 EC Low-Voltage Directive

(73/23/EEC)
amended by: CE Mark Directive (93/68/EEC)
General
- The Low-Voltage Directive is effective for all electrical equipment for use
with a rated voltage between 50 V and 1000 V AC and between 75 V and
1500 V DC, and under normal ambient conditions. The use, for instance, of
electrical equipment in explosive atmospheres and electrical parts in
passenger and goods lifts are excepted.
- The objective of the Low-Voltage Directive is to ensure that only electrical
equipment which does not endanger the safety of persons or animals is
placed on the market. It should also be designed to conserve material
assets.
1-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EC Declaration of Conformity ’99
for the purpose of the EC Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

amended by: CE Mark Directive (93/68/EEC)
48XX/49XX controllers were developed, designed, and manufactured in

compliance with the EC Directive under the sole responsibility of
Lenze GmbH & Co KG, Postfach 10 13 52, D-31763 Hameln
Considered standards:
Standard
DIN EN 50178 Electronic equipment for use in electrical power
Classification VDE 0160 / 04.98 installations
DIN VDE 0100 Standards for the erection of power installations
EN 60529 IP degrees of protection
IEC 249 / 1 10/86, IEC 249 / 2-15 / 12/89 Base material for printed circuits
IEC 326 / 1 10/90, EN 60097 / 9.93 Printed circuits, printed boards
DIN VDE 0110 /1-2 /1/89 /20/ 8/90 Creepage distances and clearances
Hameln, 01/03/1999
(i. V. Schäfer) (i. A. Tolksdorf)

Product Manager Commissioned for CE
48XX/49XXSHB0399
1-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
1.4.4 EC Directive Electromagnetic Compatibility

(89/336/EEC)
amended by: First Amendment Directive (92/31/EEC)
CE Mark Directive (93/68/EEC)
General
- The EC Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is effective for ”devices”
which may cause electromagnetic interference, or the operation of which
may be impaired by such interference.
- The aim is to limit the generation of electromagnetic interference so that an
operation is possible without interference to radio and telecommunication
systems and other equipment. The devices must also show an appropriate
resistance to electromagnetic interference, to ensure the application as
directed.
- Controllers cannot be evaluated on their own in terms of EMC. Only after
the integration of the controllers into a drive system, can this system be
tested concerning the objectives of the EC EMC Directive and the
compliance with the ”Law about the Electromagnetic Compatibility of
Devices”.
- Lenze has verified the conformity of 48XX/49XX controllers integrated into
certain defined drive systems . In the following, these systems are called
”CE-typical drive systems” (see chapter 4.4).
- The following configurations can now be selected by the user:
- The user himself can determine the system components and their
integration into the drive system, and is then held responsible for the
conformity of the drive.
- The user can select the CE-typical drive systems for which the
manufacturer has already proved the conformity.
1-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EC Declaration of Conformity ’97 for the purpose of the EC Directive
on Electromagnetic compatibility (89/336/EEC)

48XX/49XXcontrollers cannot be driven in stand-alone operation for the purposes

of the Regulation on Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMVG of 09 November, 1992
and the first Amendment of 08 August, 1995). The EMC can only be verified when
the controller is integrated into a drive system.

declares that the described ”CE-typical drive systems” with the basic version of
48XX/49XX controller and the variants V011, V013 and V014 comply with the
above EC Directive.
The conformity evaluation is based on the product standard for drive systems EN
61800-3.
EN 61800-3 EMC product standard including special test methods for electric drives
Generic standards considered:

Generic standard
EN 50081-2 /93 Generic standard for noise emission; part 2: Industrial premises
The noise emission in industrial premises is not limited in EN 61800-3. These generic
standards are used in addition to the requirements of the standard DIN IEC 22G.
EN 50082-2 3/94 Generic standard for noise immunity
part 2: Industrial premises
(The requirements of noise immunity for residential areas were not considered, since
these are less strict.)
Generic standards considered for the test of noise emission:

Generic standard Test Limit value
EN 55011 7/92 Radio interferences, housing and mains Class A
Frequency range 0.15 - 1000MHz The noise for use in
emission in industrial premises is not limited in industrial premises
EN61800-3. These generic standards are
used in addition to the requirements of
EN61800-3.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
1-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Generic standards considered for the test of noise emission:

Basic standard Test Limit value
EN 61000-4-2 3/95 Electrostatic discharge on housing and heatsink Severity 3
6kV for contact,
8kV clearance
IEC 1000-4-3 2/95 Electromagnetic fields Severity 3
Frequency range 26-1000MHz 10V/m
ENV 50140 8/93 High-frequency field Severity 3
Frequency range 80-1000MHz, 10V/m
80% amplitude modulated
Fixed frequency 10V/m
900MHz with 200Hz, 100 % modulated
EN 61000-4-4 3/95 Fast transients, Severity 3
burst on power terminals 2kV/5kHz
Burst on bus and control cables Severity 4
2kV/5kHz
EN 61000-4-5 10/94 Surge test Installation class 3
Mains cable
Hameln, 01/03/1999
(i. V. Schäfer) (i. A. Tolksdorf)

Product Manager Commissioned for CE
1-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
1.4.5 EC Machinery Directive

(89/392/EEC)
Second Amendment Directive (93/44/EEC)
For the purpose of the Machinery Directive, ”machinery” means an assembly of

linked parts or components, at least one of which can move, with the appropriate
actuators, control and power circuits, etc., joined together for a specific
application, in particular for the processing, treatment, moving or packaging of a
material.
EC Manufacturer’s Declaration
for the purpose of the EC Machinery Directive (89/392/EEC)

Second Amendment Directive (93/44/EEC)
48XX/49XX controllers were developed, designed, and manufactured under the

sole responsibility of
Commissioning of the controllers is prohibited until it is proven that the machine

in which they are to be installed corresponds to the EC Machinery Directive.
Hameln, 01/03/1999
(i. V. Schäfer)
Product Manager
48XX/49XXSHB0399
1-9
Show/Hide Bookmarks
1-10 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Safety information
2 Safety information
Safety and application notes for controllers

(to: Low-Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC)
1. General 4. Erection
During operation, drive controllers may have, according to their The devices must be erected and cooled according to the
type of protection, live, bare, in some cases also movable or regulations of the corresponding documentation.
rotating parts as well as hot surfaces.
The drive controllers must be protected from inappropriate
Non-authorized removal of the required cover, inappropriate loads. Particularly during transport and handling, components
use, incorrect installation or operation, creates the risk of must not be bent and/or isolating distances must not be
severe injury to persons or damage to material assets. changed. Touching of electronic components and contacts
must be avoided.
Further information can be obtained from the documentation.
Drive controllers contain electrostatically sensitive
All operations concerning transport, installation, and
components which can easily be damaged by inappropriate
commissioning as well as maintenance must be carried out by
handling. Electrical components must not be damaged or
qualified, skilled personnel (IEC 364 and CENELEC HD 384 or
destroyed mechanically (health risks are possible!).
DIN VDE 0100 and IEC report 664 or DIN VDE 0110 and
national regulations for the prevention of accidents must be 5. Electrical connection
observed).
When working on live drive controllers, the valid national
According to this basic safety information qualified skilled regulations for the prevention of accidents (e.g. VBG 4) must
personnel are persons who are familiar with the erection, be observed.
assembly, commissioning, and operation of the product and
The electrical installation must be carried out according to the
who have the qualifications necessary for their occupation.
appropriate regulations (e.g. cable cross-sections, fuses, PE
2. Application as directed connection). More detailed information is included in the
documentation.
Drive controllers are components which are designed for
installation in electrical systems or machinery. Notes concerning the installation in compliance with EMC -
such as screening, grounding, arrangement of filters and laying
When installing in machines, commissioning of the drive
of cables - are included in the documentation of the drive
controllers (i.e. the starting of operation as directed) is
controllers. These notes must also be observed in all cases for
prohibited until it is proven that the machine corresponds to the
drive controllers with the CE mark.The compliance with the
regulations of the EC Directive 89/392/EEC (Machinery
required limit values demanded by the EMC legislation is the
Directive); EN 60204 must be observed.
responsibility of the manufacturer of the system or machine.
Commissioning (i.e. starting of operation as directed) is only
6. Operation
allowed when there is compliance with the EMC Directive
(89/336/EEC). Systems where drive controllers are installed must be
equipped, if necessary, with additional monitoring and
The drive controllers meet the requirements of the Low Voltage
protective devices according to the valid safety regulations,
Directive 73/23/EEC. The harmonized standards of the prEN
e.g. law on technical tools, regulations for the prevention of
50178/ DIN VDE 0160 series together with EN 60439-1/DIN
accidents, etc. Modifications of the drive controllers by the
VDE 0660 part 500 and EN 60146/DIN VDE 0558 are
operating software are allowed.
applicable to drive controllers.
After disconnecting the drive controllers from the supply
The technical data and information on the connection
voltage, live parts of the controller and power connections
conditions must be obtained from the nameplate and the
must not be touched immediately, because of possibly
documentation and must be observed in all cases.
charged capacitors. For this, observe the corresponding labels
3. Transport, storage on the drive controllers.
Notes on transport, storage and appropriate handling must be During operation, all covers and doors must be closed.
observed.
7. Maintenance and servicing
Climatic conditions must be observed according to prEN
The manufacturer’s documentation must be observed.
50178.
The safety information must be preserved!
The product-specific safety and application notes in these Operating Instructions must also be observed!
48XX/49XXSHB0399
2-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Safety information
2.1 Persons responsible for the safety
Operator
( An operator is any natural or legal person who uses the drive system or on
behalf of whom the drive system is used.
( The operator or his safety officer are obliged to ensure that
- all relevant regulations, notes and laws are observed
- only qualified personnel work on and with the drive system.
- the personnel have the Operating Instructions available for all
corresponding operations and
- unqualified personnel are prohibited from working with and on the
controller.
Qualified personnel
Qualified personnel are persons who - because of their education, experience,
instruction, and knowledge about corresponding standards and regulations, rules
for the prevention of accidents, and operating conditions - are authorized by the
person responsible for the safety of the plant to perform the required actions and
who are able to recognize and avoid potential hazards.
(see IEC 364, definition of qualified personnel)
2-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Safety information
2.2 General safety information

( These safety notes do not claim to be complete. In case of questions and
problems please contact your Lenze representative.
( At the time of supply the drive system is state-of-the-art and ensures
basically safe operation.
( The indications given in these Operating Instructions refer to the stated
hardware and software versions of the controller.
( The controller is hazardous to persons, the controller itself and other
property of the operator, if
- unqualified personnel work on and with the drive system.
- the controller is used inappropriately.
( The specifications, processes, and circuitry described in these Operating
Instructions are for guidance only and must be adapted to your own specific
application.
( Controllers must be designed so that they comply with their function and do
not cause any hazards to persons, when correctly installed and in fault-free
operation as directed. This also applies to the whole system.
( Take additional measures to limit consequences of malfunctions which may
cause hazards to personnel or damage to properties:
- further independent equipment which can take over the function of the
controller
- electrical or non-electrical protection (latching or mechanical blocking)
- measures covering the complete system
( The drive system must only be operated in perfect condition.
( Retrofittings, modifications, or changes are generally prohibited. For some
applications, Lenze authorizes the operation of retrofitted, modified or
changed controllers. Please contact Lenze.
2.3 Residual hazards
Excessive speed
Drive systems may reach dangerously high speeds (e.g. caused by active loads
like hoists):
( 48XX/49XX controllers do not offer any protection against these operating
conditions. Use additional components for this.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
2-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Safety information
2.4 Layout of the safety information

( All safety information given in these Operating Instructions has the same
layout:
Signal word
Note
- The icon characterizes the type of danger.

- The signal word characterizes the severity of danger.
- The note describes the danger and suggests how to avoid the danger.
Warning of danger for persons
Icons used Signal words

Warning of Danger! Warns of impending dangeU.
hazardo s electrical
hazardous Conseq ences if disregarded:
Consequences
voltage Death or very severe injuries.
Warning! Warns of potential, very hazardous situations.
q
Possible consequences g
if disregarded:
Warning of a Death or very severe injuries.
general danger
Caution! Warns of potential, hazardous situations.
Possible conseq
consequences
ences if disregarded:
Light or minor injuries.
Warning of damage to material

Stop! Warns of potential damage to material .
Possible consequences if disregarded:
Damage to the controller/drive system or its environment .
Other notes
Note! Designates a general, useful tip.
If you observe it, handling of the controller/drive system is made
easier.
2-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--B
00408850
Manual
Part B
Technical Data
Installation
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
revised
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data
3 Technical data
3.1 Features
Controller and system features

( Control electronics and system software are the same for 48XX/49XX
( Digital speed feedback with resolver or incremental encoder
( Torque control with superimposed speed monitoring for winding drives
( Phase control for drift-free positioning
( Digital frequency coupling as setpoint bar or setpoint cascade for
- phase synchronisation
- speed-synchronous operation
- synchronous speed ratio
( Increase of the max. armature voltage to 115 % ôVmains by changing from 4Q
to 2Q operation (with 49XX)
( Speed accuracy better than 0.5‰ at 100% changing load with resolver
feedback or incremental encoder
( Speed setting range 1:1000 at constant load with resolver feedback or
incremental encoder
( Current setting range 1:300 by means of pulse current adaptation and
bridge modulation
( Speed-dependent armature current limitation
( Adjustable max. armature current from 112,5 % to 180 % rated current
(depending on the size)
( Freely connectable process controller, e.g. for dancer position control or
tension control
( Integrated field current control for large speed setting range
( 4 customer-specific parameter sets can be saved and changed via digital
input terminals
Operation
( On-line changes of control parameters
( Parameter setting and diagnosis via
- keypad with two-line LCD in German, Englisch and French
- serial interface and PC
- fieldbus module (as option): PROFIBUS, InterBus
( Fault messages plain text
48XX/49XXSHB0399
3-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data
Speed feedback systems

( Resolver feedback with encoder emulation for superimposed systems
(synchronizing systems, positioning controls, etc.)
( Incremental encoder feedback
( DC tacho feedback
( Armature voltage feedback
Inputs
( Digital
- 8 isolated inputs (24 V level), 5 of them freely assignable
- 1 serial interface RS 485 or RS 232 (1200 ... 9600 baud)
( Analog
- 4 freely assignable inputs (13 bit resolution)
e.g. for main setpoint, additional setpoint, torque limitation, etc.
Outputs
( Digital
- 8 isolated outputs (24 V level), 5 of them freely assignable
- Another 7 free outputs can be evaluated via the LECOM interface
- 1 relay output (50V; 0,5A), freely assignable
( Analog
- 2 reference voltages ( 10V, 7mA)
- 1 monitor output, with Iact
- 2 monitor outputs, freely assignable (37 different signals with 11 bit
resolution selectable)
- 1 frequency output, freely assignable
Monitoring
( Monitoring functions of the system and controller components
( Controller protection (Iôt function)
( Motor overload protection (I2ôt function)
( Monitoring of frequency and mains voltage
( Self-synchronisation for mains frequencies from 50 to 60Hz
( Safe operation with CW or CCW direction of rotating field input
( Monitoring of the act.-value encoder feedback
( Display of the sources of controller inhibit via a code
( Classifiable monitoring (TRIP, message or warning)
( Monitoring of the cooling air stream with 4X08 to 4X13
( Monitoring of the semiconductor fuses with 4X11 to 4X13
3-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data
3.2 General data / application conditions

Field Values
Type of protection IP20 to DIN 40050, steel sheet housing
Permissible humidity Relative humidity 90%, no condensation
Temperature ranges
Storage -25 C...+ 55 C
Transport -25 C...+ 70 C
Influence of the installation height h $ 1000m : 100% rated armature current
h $ 2000m : 95% rated armature current
Degree of pollution VDE 0110, part 2, degree of pollution 2
Controllers must not be exposed to a corrosive or explosive
atmo-sphere.
Noise emission Requirements to EN 50081-2, IEC 22G
Limit-value class A (EN 55011; industrial premises) with RFI filter
Noise immunity Limit values maintained with RFI filter.
Requirements to EN 50082-2, IEC 22G
Requirements Standard Severity
ESD EN 61000-4-2 3, i.e. 8kV air discharge
6 kV contact discharge
RF interference IEC 1000-4-3 3, i.e. 10 V/m
(enclosure)
Burst EN 61000-4-4 3/4, i.e. 2kV / 5kHz
Surge EN 61000-4-5 3, i.e. 1.2 / 50ms
1kV phase - phase
2kV phase - PE
48XX/49XXSHB0399
3-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data
3.3 Rated data
3.3.1 Mains voltage 400V

( Controllers 4902 to 4907 (4Q controllers)
Type 4902 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907
Order No. EVD 4902-E EVD 4903-E EVD 4904-E EVD 4905-E EVD 4906-E EVD 4907-E
Output power 1) Pel [kW] 6.7 10.5 23.1 46.2 84 105
Mains voltage Vmains 3 ¼ 340...460 V~ á0%, 50...60Hz
Armature voltage VA 420V if Vmains = 400V (1.05 ¼Vmains)
Rated armature current IArated [A] 16 25 55 110 200 250
(continuous operation)
Maximum current IAmax [A] 29 45 90 150 240 300
(short-time operation)
Field voltage 2) VF VFmax = 0.875 ¼VL1-L3
Max. field current, IF [A] 3.5
10
controlled
Power loss 3) Ploss [W] 60 108 185 288 577 650
Ambient temperature in Tamb [C] 0...+ 45 0...+ 35 4)
operation
Weight approx. [kg] 9,2 13,1 13,8 18 22 23

Type 4908 4909 4911 4912 4913
Order No. EVD 4908-E EVD 4909-E EVD 4911-E EVD 4912-E EVD 4913
Output power 1) Pel [kW] 139 210 294 420 504
Mains voltage Vmains 3 ô 340 ... 460 V~ á0%, 50...60Hz
Armature voltage VA 420 V if Vmains = 400V (1.05ôVmains)
Rated armature current IArated [A] 330 500 700 1000 1200
Maximum current (short-time IAmax [A] 400 600 840 1200 1350
operation)
Field voltage 2) VF VFmax = 0,875 ¼VL1-L3
Max.field current, controlled IF [A] 15 30
Power loss 3) Ploss [W] 840 1220 2100 2850 3400
Ambient temperature in Tamb [C] 0...+ 35 4)
operation
Weight approx. [kg] 28 28 60 60 60
3-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data

Type 4808 4809 4811 4812 4813
Order No. EVD 4808-E EVD 4809-E EVD 4811-E EVD 4812-E EVD 4813
Mains voltage Vmains 3 ô 340...460 V~ á0%, 50...60Hz
Armature voltage VA 460 V if Vmains = 400 V (1.15 ¼ Vmains)
Maximum current IAmax [A] 400 600 840 1200 1350
(short-time operation)
Field voltage 2) VF VFmax = 0.875 ¼ VL1-L3
Max. field current, IF [A] 15 30
controlled
operation
1) referred to a mains voltage of 3 ¼ 400V~

2) The field is controlled as a current source, i.e. the field voltage depends on the field resistance.
3) at rated armature current
$ $
4) Tamb 35°C: no power derating, 35°C Tamb 45°C: power derating 1%/K
48XX/49XXSHB0399
3-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data
3.3.2 Mains voltage 500V (Variant V014)

Type 4903 4904 4905 4906 4907
Order No. EVD EVD EVD EVD EVD
4903-E-V014 4904-E-V014 4905-E-V014 4906-E-V014 4907-E-V014
Output power 1) Pel [kW] 13.1 28.8 57.7 105 131
Mains voltage Vmains 3ô410...550 V~ 0%, 50...60 Hz
Armature voltage VA 525 V if Vmains = 500V (1.05 ¼ Vmains)
operation)
Max. field current, controlled IF [A] 3.5 10
Power loss 3) Ploss 108 185 288 577 650
Ambient temperature in Tamb [C] 0...+ 45 0...+ 35 4)
operation
Weight approx. [kg] 13.1 13,8 18 22 23

Type 4908 4909 4911 4912 4913
4908-E-V014 4909-E-V014 4911-E-V014 4912-E-V014 4913-E-V014
Mains voltage Vmains 3ô 410...550 V~ á0%, 50...60Hz
operation)
Max. field current, controlled IF [A] 15 30
operation
3-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data

Type 4808 4809 4811 4812 4813
4808-E-V014 4809-E-V014 4811-E-V014 4812-E-V014 4813-E-V014
Mains voltage Vmains 3ô 410...550 V~ á0%, 50...60Hz
operation)
Max. field current, controlled IF [A] 15 30
operation
1) referred to a mains voltage of 3 ¼ 500V~

2) The field is controlled as a current source, i.e. the field voltage depends on the field resistance.
3) at rated armature current
$ $
4) Tamb 35°C: no power derating, 35°C Tamb 45°C: power derating 1%/K
48XX/49XXSHB0399
3-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data
3.4 Dimensions
3.4.1 Controller 4902 to 4X09

a
c
g
h
i
4900
b d f
k ”A” g
”A”
X10 X11 V1 V2
X1 X2 X8 X9
e X3 X4 X5 X6 X7
4900Str001
FIG 4-1 Dimensions of the controllers 4902 to 4907, 4X08 and 4X09
all dimensions in mm
Type a b c d e f g h i k l
4902 / 4903 / 4904 269 415 242 395 222 360 6.5 8 30 26 175
4905 / 4906 / 4907 269 525 242 505 222 466 6.5 8 30 26 175
4808 / 4809 / 4908 / 4909 322 550 288 525 335 497 6.5 8 30 34 295
3-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data
3.4.2 Controllers 4811 to 4813, 4911 to 4913
4900
d b
n
h
m
c
a
4900Str002
FIG 4-2 Dimensions of the controllers 4X11 to 4X13
all dimensions in mm
Type a b c d e g h m n
4811 - 4813 / 4911 - 4913 322 800 292 740 390 9 30 15 9
48XX/49XXSHB0399
3-9
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Technical Data
3-10 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4 Installation
4.1 Mechanical installation
4.1.1 Important notes

( Ensure free installation space above and below the controller:
- 100 mm for 4902...4907
- 150 mm for 4X08...4X13
( Ensure unimpeded ventilation of cooling air and outlet of exhaust air.
( If the cooling air contains pollutants (dust, fluff, grease, aggressive gases),
which may impair the function of the controller:
- Take suitable preventive measures , e.g. separate air duct, installation of
filters, regular cleaning, etc.
( Do not exeed the ambient temperature permissible during operation:
- 4902...4906: to 45 °C: without power derating
- 4907, 4X08...4X13: to 35 °C: without power derating
35 °C to max. 45 °C: power derating 1% / K
Possible mounting positions

( Only vertical controller installation:
- 4902 ... 4907, 4X08 and 4X09 with mains connections on top
- 4X11 ... 4X13 with mains connections at bottom
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.2 Electrical installation
For information on the installation according to EMC, see chapter 4.4
4.2.1 Protection of persons

( Protection of persons and animals according to DIN VDE 0100 with
current-operated protective devices:
The inverters are equipped with a mains rectifier. After a short-circuit to
frame, a DC fault current may prevent the tripping of the current-operated
protective device. Additional measures, such as protective multiple earthing
or universal current sensitive current-operated e.l.c.b., should therefore be
taken.
( When dimensioning the tripping current of the current-operated e.l.c.b. it
must be observed that false tripping may occur under the following
conditions:
- In the event of capacitive leakage currents between the cable screens
(especially with long screened motor cables).
- If several controllers are connected to the mains at the same time.
- If you use RFI filters.
( Comment on the application of universal-current sensitive current-operated
e.l.c.b.:
The preliminary standard prEN50178 (previously VDE0160) on the
application of universal-current sensitive current-operated e.l.c.b. has
passed the German Committee K226.
The final decision about this standard will be made by CENELEC/CS
(European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization) in Brussels. For
further information on the application of universal-current sensitive
current-operated e.l.c.b., can be obtained from the supplier.
( Replace defective fuses with the prescribed type only when no voltage is
applied. The fuses protect the controller from impermissible operating
conditions. After tripping, the controller or the system should be checked for
possible faults or errors before replacing the fuse.
( The controller can be safely disconnected from the mains via a contactor on
the input side.
Electrical isolation
There is an electrical isolation (insulating distance) between power and control
terminals:
( The reference potential GND of the control electronics is connected to PE
via a bridge (bridge to X4; term. 90 term. FE)
( The control electronics has a basic isolation (single insulating distance).
( The protection against contact, if the insulating distance is defective, can
only be ensured by additional measures.
4-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.2.2 Protection of the controller
Stop!
The controllers contain electrostatically sensitive components:
Prior to assembly and service operations, the personnel must be free of
electrostatic charge, e.g. by touching the PE fixing screw or other grounded metal
surfaces in the control cabinet.
( In the event of condensation, connect the controller to the mains voltage

only after the visible humidity has evaporated.
( The controllers are designed for operation with a neutral earth mains
voltage.
( For separate supply of the field controller:
- Ensure correct phase connection of the terminals L1.1 and L3.1. The PEN
conductor must never be connected!
( The power outputs of the controller for the armature circuit (A, B) and the
field circuit (I, K) must only be disconnected when no voltage is applied.
( Use the prescribed semiconductor fuses to protect the thyristors in the
power stage (see chapter 13.1).
( For speed control with incremental encoder:
- Only use incremental encoders with pulse tracks shifted by 90.
( For speed control with tacho:
- Only use DC tacho generators.
4.2.3 Screening of the control cables

Wire the screening and the GND and PE connections very carefully to avoid
interference. Interference in the control cables can interrupt operation, because it
disturbs the controller program (fault message ’CCr’).
( Screening of control cables.
- Connect the screen of the control cables to the screen connections of the
controller or via the isolated earthing bus in the control cabinet (e.g. PE
terminals).
( Prevent breaks in the screening:
- In the event of interruption, screening must be connected to protective
buses (terminal strips, relays, fuses).
- Low-resistance connection between buses (at least 10 mm2) and PE of
the supply.
( Control cables must not be installed parallel to motor cables carrying
interference.
- If it is not possible to ensure an installation distance between control and
motor cables, the motor cables should be screened.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.2.4 Earthing of the control electronics
Single drives
( With factory setting, the reference potential GND of the control electronics is
joined to PE. Additional earthing measures are not required.
Group drives
( Ensure that earthing the control electronics does not cause any damage to
external controllers.
( Ensure to avoid ground loops when the ground is connected (GND):
- Remove the bridge to X4 from terminal 90 to terminal FE.
- All ground cables must be connected to externally isolated buses which
are as close to the controllers as possible.
- Make a low-resistance connection between the buses (at least 10 mm2)
and PE of the supply.
4.2.5 Mains types and conditions

Please observe the restrictions for each mains type!
Mains Operation of the controller Notes
With grounded neutral No restrictions Observe controller ratings
With grounded phase Operation is impossible.
With isolated neutral (IT mains) Operation with the recommended RFI filter Contact Lenze. The RFI filter will be
is only possible if an isolating transformer destroyed when directly connected
is preconnected. The neutral of the to the IT mains and fault “earth
secondary circuit must be earthed fault”.
secondarily.
Interaction with compensation equipment

For reactive-power compensation of mains with an inverter controller load, the
compensation unit should be equipped with a choke, since the controller
generates harmonic currents. These harmonic currents could excite oscillating
circuits which consist of mains impedance and capacitor reactance. Capacitors,
transformers, switching units, etc. could be destroyed by these reactance effects.
In this case, please contact the supplier of your compensation equipment.
4-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3 Connection
Connection between controller and motor

Lenze controller Motor (to DIN 42017/VDE 0530 part 8)
Function Terminal Terminal Others Motor type
Armature voltage + A 1B1 A1 DC motor
- B 2B2 B2, A2 uncompensated with
Excitation voltage + I F1 F5, (for higher connection voltages) commutating winding
- K F2 F2
Armature voltage + A 1C1 A1 DC motor
- B 2C2 C2 compensated with
Excitation voltage + I F1 F5, (for higher connection voltages) commutating winding
- K F2 F2
Armature voltage + A A1 Permanent-magnet
- B A2 motor
DC tacho + 3 2A1
- 4 2A2
Temp. switch S1, S2
Thermal contact T1, T2
Screw-tightening torques
Type 4902 4903 - 4904 4905 - 4907 4X08 - 4X09 4X11 - 4X13
L1, L2, L3, A, B 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm 2.0 ... 2.4 Nm 37 Nm 1) 64 Nm 1)
A, B 37 Nm 1) 15 ... 20 Nm
L1.1, L3.1, I, K 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm 1.2 ... 1.5 Nm
L1.2, L2.2, L3.2 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
L1.3, L2.3, L3.3, 86 - 89 - 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm
Terminal strip X1 - X4 0.5 ... 0.6 Nm

1) Rated tightening torque for the connection of terminal ends to busbars
(VDE 0220 part 1/11.71)
When continued with busbar see DIN 43673 part 1/02.82
The following circuit diagrams show the electrical wiring of the power connections.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.1 Power connection of standard controller
4902/3/5LP 4902VP
F1 F2
FF16A
500V M0,5A 500V
BR1 BR5 F4
BR3 F3
BR2 BR4
PE L1 L2 L3 A B L1.1 L3.1 I K L1.2L2.2 L3.2
LK C R
F’4
L1 L2 L3
Z1
A B I K S1 S2
L’1 L’2 L’3
M1 M J
F’1...F’3
K1
PE
F’’1...F’’3
Vmains = 340 ... 460 V~ 0% 50 ... 60 Hz

PE L1 L2 L3
4900Str003
FIG 4-3 Power connection of controllers 4902 to 4907
K1 Mains contactor
F’1...F’4 Semiconductor fuses for controller protection
F’’1...F’’3 Line protection fuses
LK Commutating choke (mains choke)
Z1 RFI filter
BR1 - BR5 0W wire bridge
¥ Field controller
¦ Power stage
§ Auxiliary starting circuit
With field voltages > 300V and field currents < 200mA an auxiliary starting circuit should be used.
Recommended dimensioning: R = 330 W/ 20 W; C = 0.22 mF/400V AC.
4-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4 9 0 8 L P 4 9 0 2 V P
F F 1 6 A 5 0 0 V M 0 ,5 A 5 0 0 V
F 5 B R 5 F 4
F 6 B R 3 F 3
F 7 B R 4
F 1 F 2
F F 3 2 A
M
~ 6 0 0 V
P E L 1 L 2 L 3 A B L 1 .3 L 2 .3 L 1 .1 L 3 .1 I K L 1 .2 L 2 .2 L 3 .2
L 1 N
L K 2 L K 2 Z 2
9 5 L 1 N
0 ,6 A
F ''4 F ''5
9 6
V = 2 0 0 ...2 4 0 V ~ 5 0 ...6 0 H z
L K
F '4
L 1 L 2 L 3
A B I K S 1 S 2
Z 1
L '1 L '2 L '3 M 1 M J
F '1 . . . F '3
P E
K 1
F ''1 . . . F ''3
P E L 1 L 2 L 3 V = 3 4 0 ... 4 6 0 V ~ ± 0 % 5 0 ... 6 0 H z
m a in s
4900Str128
FIG 4-4 Power connection of controllers 4X08 to 4X09
K1 Mains contactor
F’1...F’4 Semiconductor fuses for the protection of controllers
Z1 RFI filter
Z2 RFI filter for separate fan supply
¥ Field controller
¦ Power stage
§ Fan
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
F 1 .1 F 2 .1 F 3 .1
4 9 1 1 L P 4 9 0 2 V P
F F 1 6 A 5 0 0 V M 0 ,5 A 5 0 0 V
F 5 B R 5 F 4
F 6 B R 3 F 3
F 7 B R 4
F 1 .2 F 2 .2 F 3 .2
F 1 F 2
F F 3 2 A
M
~ 6 0 0 V
P E L 1 L 2 L 3 A B L 1 .3 L 2 .3 L 1 .1 L 3 .1 I K L 1 .2 L 2 .2 L 3 .2
L 1 N
L K 2 L K 2 Z 2
L 1 N
9 5
F ''4 F ''5 0 ,3 A
9 6
V = 2 0 0 ...2 4 0 V ~ 5 0 ...6 0 H z
L K
A B I K S 1 S 2
L 1 L 2 L 3
Z 1 M 1 M J
L '1 L '2 L '3
K 1
P E
F ''1 . . . F ''3
P E L 1 L 2 L 3 V m a in s = 3 4 0 ... 4 6 0 V ~ ± 0 % 5 0 ... 6 0 H z
4900Str129
FIG 4-5 Power connection of controllers 4X11 to 4X13
K1 Mains contactor
F1.1 ... F3.2 Semiconductor fuses for controller protection
Z1 RFI filter
Z2 RFI filter for separate fan supply
¥ Power stage
¦ Field controller
§ Fan
It is not necessary to protect mains and armature cables by semiconductor fuses, because the thyristors are already protected by
internal cell fuses.
4-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.2 Separate supply of the field-current bridge at a high motor

field voltage
Stop!
Ensure correct phase connection of the separate field supply.
Incorrect connection leads to blown fuses.
The phase shift of the voltages from the power stage to the control electronics must
be smaller than 2 °(electrically).
To reduce the mains feedback, separate mains chokes are required for the field
supply (chapter 13.2.2).
The fuses F’’4 and F’’5 are cable protection fuses. They must be matched to the
cross section of the cables used and dimensioned for at least IFrated.
In weak mains supplier, field-current fluctuations may occur and thus the torque
can be reduced. For rated field voltages VFrated > 210V, we recommend a separate
supply for the field bridge.
The armature current control circuit and the field current control circuit are
electrically decoupled by an external supply for the field controller with voltage
pick-off before the mains choke.
Remove the wire bridges BR1 and BR2 of the controllers 4902 to 4907 (4902LP,
4903LP or 4905LP) when no voltage is applied. The bridges can be easily
accessed:
1. Open the controller cover (4 mounting screws)
2. Unbolt the 2 mounting screws for the cover of the control electronics
3. Open the cover.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-9
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4902/3/5LP 4902VP
F1 F2
FF16A
500V M0,5A 500V
BR1 BR5 F4
BR3 F3
BR2 BR4
PE L1 L2 L3 A B L1.1 L3.1 I K L1.2 L2.2 L3.2
LK L K2 L K2 F’4
F’’4 F’’5
A B I K S1 S2
L1 L2 L3 M1 M J
Z1
L’1 L’2 L’3
F’1...F’3 PE
K1
F’’1...F’’3
Vmains = 340 ... 460 V~ 0% 50 ... 60 Hz

PE L1 L2 L3
4900Str006
FIG 4-6 Power connection for controllers 4902 to 4907
K1 Mains contactor
Z1 RFI filter
¥ Power stage
¦ Field controller
4-10 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.3 Separate supply for the control electronics
Stop!
Ensure correct phase connection of the separate mains supply.
Incorrect connection leads to blown fuses.
( The phase shift of the voltages from the power stage to the control
electronics must be smaller than 2°(electrically).
( The controller must be inhibited via the function ”Controller enable” (Ctrl.
enable) before the contactor can be opened or closed. If the switching
sequence is not observed, the fuses will blow or fault messages ACI or FCI
will be indicated.
( The electronics remains supplied after K1 has been opened. The mains is
completely separated via the main switch.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-11
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4 9 0 2 /3 /5 /8 /1 1 L P 4 9 0 2 V P
M 0 ,5 A 5 0 0 V
B R 5 F 4
B R 3 F 3
B R 4
P E L 1 L 2 L 3 A B L 1 .2 L 2 .2 L 3 .2
L K
K 1 F ''6 . . . F ''8
L 1 L 2 L 3
Z 1
L '1 L '2 L '3
F '1 . . . F '3 P E
Q 1
F ''1 . . . F ''3
P E L 1 L 2 L 3 V m a in s = 3 4 0 ... 4 6 0 V ~ ± 0 % 5 0 ... 6 0 H z
4900Str130
FIG 4-7 Power connection for controllers 4902 to 4907 and 4X08 to 4X13
K1 Mains contactor
F’’6...F’’8 Cable protection fuses 4A
LK Commutating choke
Z1 RFI filter
Q1 Main switch
¥ Power stage
¦ Field controller
4-12 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.4 Control connections

1 8 8 1
9 15 15 9
X10 X11 V1 V2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 20 21 22 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 5 1 1 5
X1 X2 9 6 6 9
X8 X9
1 5 5 1 5 1
40 41 44 45K11K14A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 59 60 61 62 63 80VE990 FE
6 9 9 6 9 6
X5 X6 X7
X3 X4
4900Str008
FIG 4-8 Control connections for the controller
X1 - X4 Control terminals
X5 Digital frequency/incremental encoder input (Dig_In_1)
X6 LECOM1 interface (RS 232 / 485)
X7 Resolver connection
X8 Digital frequency output
X9 Digital frequency/incremental encoder input (Dig_In_2)
X10, X11 Fieldbus connnections (as option e.g. 2110 for InterBus)
V1, V2 Displays for fieldbus options (option)
Switch on the control module

Some function of inputs and outputs can be changed via the switches on the
control module 4902MP. For settings ensure
- that no voltage is applied
- the cover is removed (4 mounting screws)
X1
X4
4902MP.xx.xx
S4
on
on
S3
S1 S2
on on
X2A X2B
4900Str009
FIG 4-9 Positions of switches S1 to S4 on the control module
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-13
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.4.1 Connection of analog signals
168 k
S4/5
S3/2 S3/1
250 R
168 k
168 k
168 k
168 k
168 k
I U I U
+ 10 V / 7 mA
-10 V / 7 mA
47 k
S2 S1
GND GND
GND
8x 3,3nF
X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 X4 60 61 62 63
+ - + +
4
- + - -
1 2 3 7 8 9
5
R > 1,5 k
6
R> 3 k
4900Str010
FIG 4-10 Analog inputs and outputs
External torque limitation Setpoint 2

Actual value signal with tacho feedback
Additional setpoint Setpoint 3 Analogg
Main setpoint as digital master voltage/current Setpoint 1 input
Main setpoint as unipolar setpoint
Main setpoint as bipolar setpoint
Armature current Iact
Monitor
Current setpoint C063 output
Actual speed value C051
The analog signals are contacted via the terminal blocks X1 and X4. FIG 4-10 shows the function assignment according to factory
setting.
4-14 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
Analog inputs
Terminal Switch position Use Level Resolution
1, 2 Setpoint 2 -10V...+ 10V 12 bit + sign
2 ON
S3 OFF
with ground reference (factory
setting)
ON Setpoint 2 -10V...+ 10V 12 bit + sign
S3 2 OFF differential input
3, 4 ON Actual value -10V...+ 10V 12 bit + sign
S4 1 2 3 4 OFF
1 ON Actual value -30V...+ 30V 12 bit + sign
S4 2 3 4 OFF

S4 1 3 4 OFF
1 2 ON Actual value (factory setting) -73V...+ 73V 12 bit + sign

S4 3 4 OFF

S4 1 2 4 OFF
1 3 ON Actual value -99V...+ 99V 12 bit + sign

S4 2 4 OFF
1 2 3 ON Actual value -120V...+120V 12 bit + sign

S4 4 OFF
2 4 ON Actual value -180V...+180V 12 bit + sign

S4 1 3 OFF
5 ON Actual value 12 bit + sign

S4 OFF with ground reference
ON Actual value 12 bit + sign
S4 5 OFF differential input 1)
6 Setpoint 3 with ground reference -10V...+ 10V 12 bit + sign
7 Internal ground, GND
8 ON Setpoint 1, -10V...+ 10V 12 bit + sign
S3 1 OFF Master voltage (factory setting)
Setpoint 1, -20mA...+ 20mA
ON
S3 1 OFF
Master current -20 mA...-4 mA
+ 4 mA...+ 20 mA
9 Voltage supply for +10V/7mA
10 Setpoint selection via potentiometer -10V/7mA
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-15
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
Analog outputs (monitor outputs)

Terminal Switch position Use Level Resolution
61 Actual current value -5 V...+ 5 V
correspond to the
rated current of the
controller
62 Monitor 1 -10V...10V 11 bit
S2 A Output voltage(factory setting)
1 Monitor 1 -20mA...+ 20mA 11 bit
S2 Output current
63 Monitor 2 -10V...+ 10V 11 bit
S1 A Output voltage(factory setting)
1 Monitor 2 -20mA...+ 20mA 11 bit
S1
Output current
1) Forchanging the factory setting of switch S4, jumper 5 to ON (actual value with
ground reference), observe the following:
- Bridge terminals 4 and 5 externally.
- Set DIP switch S4, jumper 1-4 (preselected actual value) to double tacho
voltage.
The max. possible tacho voltage is 90 V!
4-16 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.4.2 Connection of digital signals

( All digital inputs and outputs are PLC compatible and separated from the
rest of the control module when operated with an external voltage supply
(24 V).
( The diagrams show the function assignments according to the factory
setting.
( For switching the signal cables, only relays with contacts for low-level
switching should be used.
We recommend using relays with gold contacts.
( Voltage supply
- external 24 V to terminals X2/39 and X4/59 or
- internal 15 V to terminal X2/20
Stop!
( Maximum permissible load of the internal 15 V supply : 100 mA.

( For operation with internal voltage: Bridge terminals X2/39 and X3/40
externally.
( Digital inputs unused should be connected!
Inputs:
Input voltage 0...+30 V
LOW level: 0...+5 V
HIGH level: +13...+30 V
Input current: 24 V: 8 mA per input
15 V: 5 mA per input
Outputs:
Output current: Max. 50 mA per output
(external resistance min. 480W at 24V,
e. g. relay, order designation EK0005)
The input and output signals are in average read, processed and updated every
4 msec on average.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-17
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
GND ext.
+ 15 V / 100 mA
10 k
22 k 10 R
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
GND
X2 X3 X4
20 21 22 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 40 41 44 45 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 59
CCW
-
CW
+
QSP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4900Str011
FIG 4-11 Digital inputs and outputs with external voltage supply (24 V)
GND ext.
+ 15 V / 100 mA
22 k 10 R 10 k
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
50 mA
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
3k
GND
X2 X3 X4
20 21 22 28 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 39 40 41 44 45 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 59
CCW
CW
QSP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 4900Str012
FIG 4-12 Digital inputs and outputs with internal voltage supply (15 V)
4-18 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
Digital inputs
Name Terminal Use Level for activation Programming
(factory setting) see chapter
20 Voltage supply 15V, 100mA
CW 21 Removal of quick stop, CW rotation HIGH
CCW 22 Remove quick stop, CCW rotation HIGH
1 28 Controller enable - Ctrl. enable HIGH
2 E1 Freely assignable input HIGH
(TRIP set)
(TRIP reset)
(Inhibit additional setpoint)
5 E4, E5 Freely assignable input HIGH
(Enable JOG values, three JOG values)
Digital outputs
Name Terminal Use Message Programming
(factory setting) see chapter
1) 2)
39 Ground of the digital inputs and outputs, external GND
6 41 TRIP HIGH LOW
7 44 Ready for operation - RDY HIGH HIGH
8 45 Pulse inhibit - IMP HIGH LOW
9 A1 Freely assignable output HIGH LOW
(nact < nx)
10 A2 Freely assignable output LOW HIGH
(n-controller = Mmax)
11 A3 Freely assignable output HIGH HIGH
(Setpoint reached, RFGoutput = RFGinput)
12 A4 Freely assignable output HIGH LOW
(nact = 0)
13 A5 Freely assignable output HIGH HIGH
(nact = nset)
59 Supply input of the digital outputs:
24 V external or 15 V internal
1) Message in stationary controller operation

2) Message, if the function is active
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-19
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
Relay output
Terminal Use
(factory setting)
K11, K14 Floating relay output, contact load capacitiy: 50V / 0.5A (TRIP)
4900Str063
Additional digital inputs and outputs with 4X08...4X13

The controllers 4X08...4X13 are equipped with additional control terminals to
monitor the fuses. The following current flow charts show the factory setting of the
internal wiring and give suggestions on how to include an external fuse monitoring.
4908LP 4902MP ¥
86 20 External fuse monitoring
1 + Vcc15
87
2
88 ¦
89 28 Without external fuse monitoring, terminal
Ctrl. enable 20 can be directly connected with the
4900Str013
switch Ctrl. enable.
FIG 4-13 4808...4809 and 4908...4909
4911LP 4902MP ¥
86 20 Internal fuse monitoring
+ Vcc15
87
88
1
89 28
Ctrl. enable
4900Str_014
FIG 4-14 4811...4813 and 4911...4913
For monitoring, the terminals 86 and 89 should be connected in series with the
controller enable contact Ctrl. enable.
( For internal voltage supply (15 V), bridge the following terminals:
- X2/20 to 86
- X2/28 to 89
( For external voltage supply (24 V):
- Apply supply voltage to terminal 86.
- Bridge terminals 28 and 89.
Danger! (especially for hoist applications)

Please observe when connecting the fuse monitoring:
No torque is generated when the controller is inhibited.
4-20 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.5 Feedback systems

Several feedback systems can be connected to the controller and configured:
( Armature voltage control
( DC tacho feedback
( Resolver feedback
( Encoder feedback
- Incremental encoder TTL
- Incremental encoder HTL
DC tacho feedback
Tacho signals are connected via term. 3/4 of terminal block X1. The controller
processes rated tacho voltages of 10...180V (chapter 4.3.5.1).
Resolver feedback (X7)

( 2-pole resolver (V = 10 V, f = 5 kHz)
( Connection to a 9-pole Sub D socket X7
- We recommend to use the pre-cut Lenze system cable
(see chapter 13.3).
( Resolver cable and resolver are monitored for wire breakage (fault message
”Sd2”)
X7
lmax= 50 m
+REF 1
-REF 2
3
+COS 4
-COS 5
+SIN 6
-SIN 7
8
9
4900Str015
FIG 4-15 Resolver connection (9-pole Sub D socket)
Pin assignment of socket X7:

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal + REF -REF GND +COS -COS +SIN -SIN --- ---
Cross section 0.5 0.14
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-21
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
The resolver signal or encoder signal can be output for following drives at the digital
frequency output X8.
( Connection as shown in the connection diagrams:
- Use cables twisted and screened in pairs.
- Connect both screen ends.
- Use cable cross-sections indicated.
( The feedback system can be activated under C005.
( If resolvers are used which are not specified by Lenze are used, contact
your Lenze representative.
Incremental encoder feedback

( Incremental encoders with two 5 V complementary signals electrically
shifted by 90(TTL encoders) or HTL encoders can be connected.
( Connection to a 9-pole Sub D socket X5 or X9, depending on the
configuration of C005
- Maximum input frequency: 420 kHz with TTL encoder
100 kHz with HTL encoder
- Current consumption per channel: 6 mA
( With HTL signal:
- If there is no inverse track available, the
inputs A and B (with zero track also Z ) must be connected to the
encoder supply potential.
l = 50 m
max
B
B 1
A 2
A 3 A
VE9 A
4
GND B
5
Z 6 B
Z 7 Z
8 Z
9
4900Sttr016
FIG 4-16 Incremental encoder connection (9-pole Sub D socket)
4-22 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
Pin assignment of socket X5/X9:

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A VE9 GND Z Z LC B
Pin 8, LC ( ¥)
- For encoders without lamp control, assign +5 V...+30V. Otherwise, the
controller will indicate fault ”Sd3” or ”Sd4”.
Pin 4, VE9
- Is connected to the terminal of the external incremental encoder supply
X4/VE9.
X5, X9 Pin 4
GND
X4
VE9 90 FE
4900Str017
FIG 4-17 Connection of the incremental encoder supply
VE9 External supply for incremental encoder to X5/X9

90 Internal ground GND
FE Functional earth
4.3.6 Change of the direction of rotation in 2Q operation

In 2Q operation (controller 48XX or C180 = -1-), only one thyristor bridge of the
controller is active, i.e. the output terminal A can only carry positive voltage referred
to terminal B, on the condition that no active loads occur.
The direction of rotation of the motor is determined by the connection of the
armature cable to A and B and of the field cable to I and K. If the opposite direction
of rotation is required, take the following steps (depending on the actual value
feedback system):
Act. speed feedback system Direction of rotation changed by: Additional measures
Armature voltage None
Tacho Connection tacho signal exchange term. 3
Exchange connection:
and 4
l Terminals A and B
Resolver or Signal cable resolver
exchange track +sin and -sin
l Terminals I and K
Incremental encoder Invert act. speed sgnal via
C205 / C027
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-23
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.7 Digital frequency selection and encoder emulation
Digital frequency input

( Possible digital frequency signals:
- Incremental encoder with two 5 V complementary signals electrically
shifted by 90(TTL encoders) or HTL encoder
- Encoder emulation of the host (master)
( Connection to a 9-pole Sub D socket X5 or X9, depending on the
configuration of C005
- max. input frequency: 420 kHz for TTL encoders
100 kHz for HTL encoders
- Current consumption per channel: 6 mA
Digital frequency selection via the digital frequency output of the

master drive
1 1
B B
A A A
A A
B B A
GND GND B
9 9
X8 X5/X9
B
1 2 4900Str018
FIG 4-18 Digital frequency selection for the slave ¦ via digital frequency output (master ¥)
Pin assignment of socket X5/X9:

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal 6.5 A A VE9 GND Z Z LC B
Pin 8, LC (lamp control of the encoder):

- With digital frequency coupling, pin 8 is deactivated in the factory setting
(configuration C005= -5X-, -6X-, -7X-)
Pin 4, VE9
- Is connected to the terminal of the external incremental encoder supply
X4/VE9.
4-24 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
Digital frequency output / encoder emulation

The output signal of the Sub-D socket X8 can be used for superimposed control
circuits to feed back actual values (synchronous running, digital frequency
coupling or positioning control). Depending on the configuration under C005, it is
assigned as a digital frequency output or as an output for the encoder emulation.
Features:
( Two 5V complementary signals (TTL signal), electrically shifted by 90°
( Current capacity 20mA per channel
( Current capacity at PIN 8 (+5V): max. 5mA
The output signal is internally derived from the resolver or incremental encoder
signal.
Resolver feedback Incremental encoder feedback
Resolution 2048 increments per revolution Constant of the incremental encoder
A A
A A
B B
Signal type B
B
Z Z
Z
Z 4900Str019
4900Str020
FIG 4-19 Signal of digital frequency or encoder output X8 assignment of plug X8

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Signal B A A NC GND Z Z +5V B
Note!
If fault messages occur at the encoder monitoring during resolver feedback to
superimposed systems:
( Exchange tracks A and B

( Use inverse tracks
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-25
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.8 Serial interface RS232/485
Danger!
The interface RS232C/RS485 is not isolated, i.e. an additional electrical isolation
(double basic insulation) to VDE 0106, part 1, (protection against electric shock)
and to VDE 0160 (reduction of interference) is required for host connection.
LECOM-A: with 2 Lenze level converters 2101IB connected to the host or
another RS 232C electrical isolation.
LECOM-B: with Lenze level converter 2101IB connected to the host
LECOM-LI: no additional electrical isolation required
Ensure electrical isolation of the voltage supply!
The controllers can communicate with the host (PLC or PC) via the serial interface
LECOM1 or an operating keypad that works according to the LECOM protocol.
The LECOM1 interface (X6) processes the LECOM-A/B protocol. The
LECOM-A/B protocol is based on the standard ISO 1745 and can be used with
up to 90 controllers. It detects faults and avoids the transmission of faulty data.
Controllers to standard RS232C (LECOM-A) or RS485 (LECOM-B) can be
connected to the LECOM1 interface. The interface can be used for parameter
setting, monitoring, analysis and simple control tasks.
With the RS232C interface, it is possible to create point-to-point connections with
a cable length of up to 15 m. Most PCs or other hosts are equipped with this
interface.
For multiple drives and distances >15m, use the RS485 interface. With only 2 wires
it is possible to connect up to 31 controllers and communicate over a cable length
of max. 1,200 m.
Pin Name Input/output Explanation
1 +VCC15 Output Supply voltage +15V / 50mA
2 RxD Input Receive data cable RS232C
3 TxD Output Transmit data cable RS232C
4 DTR Output Transmission control RS232C
5 GND Controller reference potential
6 DSR Input (not used) RS232C
7 T/R (A) Output/input RS485
8 T/R (B) Output/input RS485
9 +VCC5 Output Supply voltage +5V
The baud rate can be changed under C125 (1200/2400/4800/9600 baud).

Protocol: LECOM-A/B V2.0
4-26 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.3.9 Fieldbus connection
Note!
Special features of the controller variants V011 and V013:

1. The interface module 2110IB or 2130IB is integrated into the controller.
2. In the factory setting, the controllers are prepared for the separate mains
supply of power stage and control electronics:
- The bridges BR3, BR4, BR5 are not installed!
( Variant V011 with InterBus interface module

The interface module type 2110IB connects Lenze controllers with the fast serial
communication system InterBus. The module enables the highly dynamic transfer
of process data (e. g. setpoints and actual values) and access to all parameters
of the controller according to the DRIVECOM profile.
The InterBus communication is based on a ring concept. All bus participants are
required for communication. For applications which require a volt-free power
stage, a separate mains supply must be provided to ensure communication (see
chapter 4.3.3).
4900Str117
FIG 4-20 Front view 2110IB
X10 Input InterBus peripheral bus

X11 Output InterBus peripheral bus
V1 LED green, bus supply
V2 LED yellow, communication
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-27
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
( Variant V013 with PROFIBUS interface module

The interface module type 2130IB connects Lenze controllers to the fast serial
communication system PROFIBUS. With PROFIBUS it is possible to parameterize
and control a controller via a host.
4900Str116
FIG 4-21 Front view 2130IB
Connection Explanations
X12 RS485 bus 9-pole SubD socket
connection
X13-W30 Optical fibre (only 2130IB, V002)
receiver
X13-W31 Optical fibre (only 2130IB, V002)
sender
V1 2130IB supply OFF:
Module is not supplied. Controller is switched off or connection is
interrupted(X4).
ON:
Module is supplied.
V2 Communicatio OFF:
n 2130IB No supply or 2130IB and controller not yet initialised.
ON:
Module 2130IB and basic unit are initialised but the PROFIBUS-DP
communication is still not working.
FAST BLINKING (4x per second):
PROFIBUS-DP communication with user data
SLOW BLINKING (1x per second):
PROFIBUS-DP communication initialised
If the interface module 2130IB is no longer supplied, the bus system will not stop
working. However, the connected controller cannot be addressed by the host.
If necessary, the control stage of the controller should be supplied separately (see
chapter 4.3.3).
4-28 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.4 Installation of a CE-typical drive system
4.4.1 General notes

( The electromagnetic compatibility of a machine depends on the type of
installation and care taken. Please observe:
- Assembly
- Filters
- Screening
- Grounding
( For diverging installations, the conformity to the CE EMC Directive requires
a check of the machine or system regarding the EMC limit values. E.g. with:
- the use of unscreened cables

- the use of group RFI filters instead of the assigned RFI filters
- Operation without mains choke
- Multi-motor drive systems
The user of the machine is responsible for compliance with the EMC
Directive.
If you observe the following measures, you can assume that the machine will
operate without any EMC problems caused by the drive system, and that
compliance with the EMC Directive and the EMC law is achieved.
If devices which do not comply with the CE requirement concerning noise
immunity EN 50082-2 are operated close to the controller, these devices may be
interfered electromagnetically by the controllers.
Because of the earth-potential reference of the RFI filters, the CE-typical drive
systems which are described are not suitable for the connection to IT-mains (mains
without earth-reference potential).
For the use of 48XX/49XX drive systems in residential areas observe the following:
( Check that the radio interference suppression level at the supply to the site
of operation complies with the standard (EN55022 class B).
( Check that the permissible level for radio interference (EN55022 class B) is
not exceeded around the site of operation.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-29
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4.4.2 Components of the CE-typical drive system

System component Specification
Controller 4800/4900 DC controllers
RFI filter For data and filters see chapter 13.4
Mains choke For assignment and technical data see chapter 13.2
Armature and field cable Unscreened power cable
Rated max. length: 50m
Control cables Screened signal cable type LIYCY
Encoder cable for digital frequency Lenze system cable or screened signal cable, twisted in pairs, tin plated E-CU braid
with 75% optical overlay
Encoder cable for resolver Lenze system cable type EWLR or screened signal cable, twisted in pairs, tin plated
E-CU braid with 75% optical overlay
Motor Separately excited DC motor
Lenze series MGFQ, MGFR or similar
Accessories InterBus module 2110IB
Profibus module 2130IB
Controller, RFI filter and mains choke are mounted on the same assembly board
inside a standard control cabinet.
4.4.3 Measures required
Control cabinet assembly board

( For HF grounding, only use mounting plates with an excellent conductive
surface (e.g. zinc-coated surface).
( If you use mounting plates with badly conductive surfaces (e.g. painted,
anodized, yellow passivated):
- Remove the paint or coating from the contact surface of the mains filters,
controllers, and screen connections, to provide a large and conductive
connection.
( When using several mounting plates, connect them with a surface as large
as possible (e.g. using copper bands).
( Connect the controller, RFI filter and mains choke to the grounded
mounting plate with a surface as large as possible.
Power connection
( Avoid unnecessarily long cables
( Ensure the separation of motor cable and signal or mains cable.
( Ensure separation of unscreened and screened cables (distance > filter
length)
( Ensure a distance as short as possible between the conductors
(single-cores)
( Both ends of unused cores should be connected to ground/PE.
4-30 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
Signal cables
( Always screen digital and analog signal cables.
- Always connect the signal cables over the shortest possible distance with
the screen connections provided at the controller:
- Connect both screen ends of digital signal cables.
( If potential differences are to be expected, lay an additional compensation
cable.
( For long signal cables, provide additional screening points:
- Connect the screen at the control cabinet input with a suitable clamp to
the conductive mounting plate of the control cabinet.
Remove the coating
Screen braid
Contact the screen
with a surface as large as possible K35.0098
FIG 4-22 Additional screening connection on a mounting plate of the control cabinet
Filters
( Only use the mains filters and RFI filters which are designated for the
controller:
- RFI filters reduce impermissible high-frequency interference to a
permissible value.
- Mains chokes reduce low-frequency interference which depend on the
motor cable and its length.
Screening
Wire the screening and the GND and PE connections very carefully, to avoid
interference.
( All signal cables should be screened.
( Avoid a common terminal board for mains input and motor output.
( Route cable as close as possible to the reference potential. Free-hanging
cables have the same effect as aerials.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-31
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
Grounding
( Ensure a good equipotential bonding of all system parts (controller, RFI filter,
mains choke, etc.) by cables to a central earthing bus (PE busbar). The
prescribed minimum cross-sections must be observed in all cases.
( To comply with the EMC Directive, not the cross-section but the contact
surface is decisive.
( Ensure that grounding of the control electronics does not cause any
damage to external controllers.
4-32 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
2
3
6 P E P E I K A B
P E
7
8 9 1 0 1 1
4900Str021
FIG 4-23 Part of the CE-typical drive system with 4902 ... 4907 on a mounting plate
1 Connection mains fuse

2 RFI filter
3 Uncoated, bare metal contact surfaces
4 Commutating choke
5 Armature fuse
6 Metal plug-in casing connected to screen or Lenze system cable
7 Uncoated surface for screen connection
8 PE connection
9 Screened signal cables
10 Screened cables for act. value encoder or setpoint encoder
11 Motor connection
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-33
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
1 L 3 L 2 L 1 2 3
4
L
1 4
6
l 1 3
5
7
1 1
P E
1 2 1 0
4900Str022
FIG 4-24 Part of the CE-typical drive system with 4X08/4X09 on a mounting plate

2 Connection fan supply L1/N
3 RFI filter
4 Armature fuses
8 Mains choke field supply
9 Line protection fuses for field supply
10 Motor connection with screened cable for act. value encoder
11 Commutating choke
12 PE connection
13 RFI filter
4-34 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
1 L 3 L 2 L 1 2 3 5
6
1 3
l 1 2
1 0
9 8
P E
1 1 7
4900Str023
FIG 4-25 Part of the CE-typical drive system with 4X11 ... 4X13 on a mounting plate

2 Connection fan supply L1/N
3 RFI filter
7 Motor connection with screened cable for act. value encoder
8 Commutating choke
9 Line protection fuses for field supply
10 Mains choke field supply
11 PE connection
12 RFI filter
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4-35
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Installation
4-36 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--C
00408852
Manual
Part C
Commissioning
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
revised
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
5 Commissioning
5.1 Initial switch-on
Stop!
Prior to initial switch-on of the controller, check the wiring for completeness,
short-circuit, and earth fault:
( Power connection:
- Supply via terminals L1, L2 and L3
- Separate field supply (if available)
( Field connection
( Armature connection
( Feedback system (resolver, incremental encoder, ¡)
( Control terminals:
- Controller enable: Terminal X2/28 (reference potential: X2/39)
- Selection of direction of rotation Terminal X2/21 or X2/22
(reference potential: X2/39)
- Setpoint selection
- with internal voltage supply: bridge between X2/39 and X3/40
( Maintain the switch-on sequence!
Note!
( All controllers described are factory set. A DC shunt motor with attached
tacho can be driven as a speed-controlled drive with tacho feedback
without further settings after entering the rated field current (see nameplate).
The motor must comply with the following:
- Vmains = 420V
- nrated = 3000 rpm
- Vtacho = 20V / 1000 rpm
( Simple adaptation to other machine data or special requirements: Use the
following for commissioning:
- Operating unit of the controller or
- LEMOC2 (PC program by LENZE)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
5-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
Wiring recommendation for speed control with tacho
Q1
L1
L2
L3
PE
F’’1...F’’3 L10
L11
F’1...F’3 S1 K2.1
td > tbr.
L1 L2 L3
S2 K2 K3 K2
Z1
L’1 L’2 L’3 K1
K1
K2 K2.1 K1
LK td
L20
PE L1 L2 L3
4900
X1 X2 X3 X4
I K B A 3 4 5 7 8 9 2021 2228 3940 A459 90FE
F’4
I K B A CCW
nset
CW
M1 M T Ctrl.
K2 K3
enable
QSP nact = 0 4900Str024
FIG 5-1 Flow chart section: Speed control with tacho
F’’1...F’’3 Cable protection fuse L11 ”Emergency stop” cable

F’1...F’3 Semiconductor fuse LK Mains choke
F’4 Armature fuse M1 Motor
K1 Mains contactor nset Setpoint potentiometer
K2 QSP relay CW CW rotation
K2.1 Delay timer Ctrl. enable Controller enable
K3 Motor standstill Q1 Main switch
CCW CCW rotation QSP Quick stop function
L10 Direct cable from the control cable ”ON” Z1 RFI filter
With a tacho voltage to ground: bridge terminals X1/4 and X1/5 and configure the
switch S4 on the control module for the operation with a tacho signal to ground
(chpt. 4.3.4.1).
5-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
The following table describes briefly how to commission a DC shunt motor with an
attached tacho according to the example in FIG 5-1(see chapter 15).
Section Activity see also
Switch-on sequence 1.X2/28 (Ctrl. enable) must be opened (LOW) Mains on
Controller
enable
2.Connect the mains 50 ms
Approx. 0.5sec after mains connection the TRIP
90 % of the
controller is ready for operation. I field rated current
The time t1 depends on the initial response

of the field current t
1
RDY
Integration of the
Typical values: t1 = 300ms ...600ms armature controller
in its operating point
t2 = t1 + 20ms Armature
current
FIG: Signal flow after mains connection Time
(see fig. on the right) t
2 4900Str025
Input of the 3.Input of the motor nameplate data Chapter 5.2

motor data - C083 Rated field current
- C084 Armature circuit time constant
- C088 Rated motor current
- C090 Rated motor voltage
adaptation
p of tacho 4.Set S4 before adapting the tacho voltage Chapter
p 7.1.2.2
constants - C025 -2- Select adjustment of terminals 3, 4
- C029 Adjustment of actual speed
Set the current limit 5.Max. motor current
- C022 + IAmax
- C023 -IAmax
Adjustment of max. 6.Select the reference value for 100% setpoint
speed - C011 max. speed
Select direction of 7.CW rotation: HIGH signal at X2/21 (+ 13...+ 30 V) Chapter 5.4
rotation CCW rotation: HIGH signal at X2/22 (+ 13...+ 30 V)
Setpoint selection 8.Apply a voltage higher than 0V (max. 10V)

- do not achivate JOG setpoint (LOW signal at X2/E4 and X2/E5)
Check whether LED 9.If RDY is off and C067 is blinking, remove TRIP first. Chapter 8.1 ff.
’RDY’ ison
Controller enable 10. Assign HIGH-signal to X2/28 (+ 13...+ 30 V) and do not press STP Chapter 5.3
The motor will now run with the selected setpoint and in the selected direction of rotation. If
necessary, adapt the controller to your application.
Additional settings 11. Further setting required for LECOM operation
Stop!
( Do not change the switch-off sequence

The controller must only be disconnected from the mains when it is inhibited or the
motor is in standstill (for mains switch-off logic see chapter 15.9.2).
48XX/49XXSHB0399
5-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
5.2 Input of the motor data
Note
For internal calculations with field-weakening control, the exact input of the
following data is required. See indications on the nameplate of the connected
motor.
( C022, C023 Adapt maximum motor current Imax

( C081 Rated motor power for the power display
( C087 Rated motor speed for the power display
( C083 Rated field current for the field controller
( C084 L/R armature time constant for uncompensated motors
( C088 Rated motor current for ”I2¼t monitoring” (armature circuit)
( C090 Rated motor voltage for armature voltage limitation
Under C084 the controller can be adjusted to different armature time constants
T = L/R. The values can be set between 0 ms and 30 ms.
Common armature time constants: (see motor catalog, section I)
- compensated machines 0 ms to 10 ms
- uncompensated machines 15 ms to 30 ms.
5-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
5.3 Controller enable

For controller enable, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
( Controller enable via terminal:
- Independently of the operating mode, apply a voltage of V = +13...+30 V
to X2/28. (Reference potential: X2/39).
( Controller enable via LECOM interface
- For the operating modes C001 = -3-, -5-, -6- and -7- (LECOM control),
the controller must be additionally enabled via the LECOM interface.
( Stop function
- The controller can be inhibited by pressing the STP key. The stop function
can only be reset via the enable command SH + STP or mains switching.
( TRIP reset
- If a monitoring system sets TRIP the controller will be inhibited
immediately. The internal controller inhibit will be reset when resetting the
fault (C067).
Since the controller inhibit can be caused by many different reasons, the origin of
the controller inhibit is displayed under C183.
1
0
Ctrl. enable
IA t
50 ms
4900Str026
FIG 5-2 Signal flow when enabling the controller
48XX/49XXSHB0399
5-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
5.4 Selection of direction of rotation and quick stop
Direction of rotation
The polarity of the output voltage VA and thus the direction of rotation of the motor
depends on the signs of the setpoint, the control of the digital inputs X2/21 and
X2/22, and the polarity of the field voltage.
Quick stop (QSP)

Independently of the setpoint selection and because of the quick stop function, the
controller can be stopped within a time selectable under C105.
( The quick stop function is active:
- when the mains is switched on, if X2/21= HIGH and X2/22 = HIGH
- during operation with X2/21 = LOW and X2/22 = LOW
The speed is reduced to zero within the deceleration time set under C105.
( Quick stop
- sets the additional setpoint integrator to 0.
- decelerates the drive to 0 according to the deceleration ramp set under
C105.
- is detected internally if no signal has been applied to X2/21, X2/22 for
more than approx. 6 ms.
( The drive starts running again
- if a HIGH signal is applied to one of the inputs (also for keypad or interface
operation).
1
0
CW
1
0
CCW
1
0
QSP
1 2 4900Str027
FIG 5-3 Selection of direction of rotation
¥ CW/CCW not overlapping

¦ CW/CCW overlapping
When the threshold nact = 0 (C019) is reached, the integral action component of
the speed controller will be switched off (only if C005 = -10-, -11-, -40-, -41-). With
all other configurations, the I-component of the n-controller will only be switched
off, if the angle controller is not active (C254 = 0). The drive cannot generate a
torque when stopped by a brake.
5-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
With the configurations C005 = -X2- or -X3- and activated angle controller
(C254 > 0), the drive will be decelerated to speed = 0 and angle-controlled
(drift-free). The drive can thus generate its maximum torque (independently of the
current limit C022, C023).
Code Name Possible settings
Lenze Selection Info
C105 Decele- 0.00s 0 s {0.01 s} 1s Time referred to the speed change

ration time 1s {0.1s} 10s 0...nmax
for quick 10 s {1 s} 100 s
stop 100 s {10 s} 990 s
( Configuration possibilities for the selection of the direction of rotation and

quick stop
Operating Setpoint to X2/21 X2/22 C041 C042 Direction of
mode X1/8 rotation
(View
towards
motor shaft)
Terminal positive HIGH LOW -0- -0- cw
control
negative LOW HIGH -1- -0-
C041 and positive LOW HIGH -1- -0- ccw
C042 display negative HIGH LOW -0- -0-
the status
stat s of pos. / neg. HIGH HIGH -0- / -1- -0- unchanged
terminals
X2/21 and pos. / neg. LOW LOW -0- / -1- -1- Quick stop
X2/22 active
Keypad / positive HIGH/LOW LOW/HIGH -0- -0- cw
LECOM
negative HIGH/LOW LOW/HIGH -1- -0-
C041 and
C042
determine the positive HIGH/LOW LOW/HIGH -1- -0- ccw
direction of
rotation or
quick stop, in negative HIGH/LOW LOW/HIGH -0- -0-
addition LOW
signal
i l X2/21 pos. / neg. LOW LOW -0- / -1- -1- Quick stop
and X2/22 active
activates quick
stop.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
5-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
5.5 Changing the internal control structure

The internal control structure is adapted to the control task (e. g. speed control,
torque control, angle control, ¡) via code C005 (see chapter 7.9). The controller
must however be inhibited first.
Stop!
It is possible that the terminal assignments change when the internal control
structure is changed.
5.6 Changing the terminal assignment
Note!
A function, which is already assigned to an input, can only be assigned to another
terminal if the input used before is assigned with a new function.
If you reassign an input, the function assigned before will be overwritten.
Freely assignable digital inputs

Except for the functions ”Enable JOG setpoints”, ”Enable additional acceleration
and deceleration times”, ”Enable fix setpoints” and ”Select parameter set”, each
function can only be assigned to one input.
It is possible to determine a priority for each input:
The function can either be switched via a terminal, or depending on the selected
operating mode.
Changing the assignment
1. Select the input to be assigned under C112.
2. Select the function for the input under C113.
3. Determine the polarity under C114 (HIGH-active or LOW-active).
4. Determine the priority under C115.
Repeat steps 1. to 4. to assign all inputs.
5 freely assignable inputs are available at the terminals.
5-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
Freely assignable digital outputs

The controller provides 12 freely assignable digital outputs and a relay output.
The free digital outputs 1 to 5 are assigned to terminals X3/A1 to X3/A4 and X4/A5.
The relay output is assigned to terminals X3/K11 and X3/K14. The polarity can be
determined (HIGH-active, LOW-active) and the output can be delayed.
The free digital outputs 6 to 12 can only be evaluated via the LECOM interface.
They are always HIGH-active.
1. Select the output to be assigned under C116.
2. Select the function for the output under C117.
Only for outputs A1 to A5 and relay output:
3. Determine the polarity under C118 (HIGH-active or LOW-active).
4. Determine the signal delay under C128.
Repeat steps 1. to 4. until all outputs are assigned.
Freely assignable ”analog” inputs

The term “freely assignable analog inputs” comprises the analog (terminals) and
digital (X5, X7 and X9) setpoint and actual value inputs.
If you change the configuration under C005, the assignment of the free analog
inputs will be overwritten with the corresponding factory setting. If necessary,
adapt the function assignment to the wiring.
It is possible to determine the priority for terminals X1/1, X1/2, X1/3, X1/4, X1/6,
X1/8, X5, X7 and X9. Thanks to the priority function, the terminal can be switched
indendently of the the operating mode.
1. Select the input to be changed under C145.
2. Select the function for the input under C146.
Only for inputs X1/1, X1/2, X1/3, X1/4, X1/6, X1/8, X5, X7, X9:
3. Determine the priority under C147.
Repeat steps 1. to 3. until all inputs are assigned.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
5-9
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
Freely assignable analog monitor outputs

Via the monitor outputs X4/62, X4/63 und X8, internal signals can be output as
voltage signals, current signals or frequency signals (See chapter 4.3.4.1).
With C108 and C109 (C109 is not effective for the digital frequency output), the
outputs can be adapted, for instance, to a measuring unit or a slave drive.
1. Select the output to be assigned under C110.
2. Select the function for the output under C111.
3. Set the offset under C109 (not for the digital frequency output).
4. Determine the gain under C108.
Repeat steps 1. to 4. until all outputs are assigned.
Special feature of the freely assignable digital frequency output

With the selection of a configuration under C005, the output X8 already has a basic
assignment. The assignment can only be changed afterwards.
If the digital frequency output X8 is assigned to another signal than indicated in the
basic assignment of the configuration (C005),then the output frequency can only
be adapted via code C108.
With signal sources with a reference value of 100% (see C111, except: DF and
resolver inputs) a signal of 100% at the output X8 with a gain factor of
C108 = 1.00 corresponds to a frequency of 250 kHz.
5-10 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
48XX/49XXSHB0399
5-11
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Commissioning
5-12 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
During operation
6 During operation
This chapter is part of the Lenze documentation structure.
It remains free for the 48XX/49XX DC speed controller.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
6-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--D
00408853
Manual
Part D
Configuration
Code table
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
revised
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7 Configuration
7.1 Speed controlled operation

For standard applications, the drive can be immediately commissioned with the
default settings. To adapt the drive to special requirements, please observe the
notes in the following chapters.
7.1.1 Set-valueselection
C W 2 1 2 2 C C W
C 0 4 2
C o n fig u r a tio n C 0 0 5 = - 1 x -
Q S P
C 0 1 2 T ir
n o ffs e t C 0 1 3 T if
n m a x
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 n s e t
C 0 1 1 Q S P C 1 3 4
n s e t' C 0 4 6
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 1 9 0 C 1 0 5
+ 0
8 + ·
± 1 - /
1
-1 0 V ... + 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 1 0 0 %
C 4 6
- C 4 9
C 0 4 1
C W /C C W E x
J O G 1 E 4 E 5 C 2 8 6 C 2 8 7
J O G 2 R F G s to p in % o f n m a x
J O G x E n a b le E x
n o ffs e t R F G z e ro
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6
A d d itio n a l Q S P
s e tp o in t C 0 4 9
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
+ 0
6
1
-1 0 V ... + 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
n o ffs e t S W I
C 2 2 0 , C 2 2 1
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 E 3 n s e t a t n - c o n tr o lle r
in % o f n m a x
T a c h o Z s e t o ff
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 0 5 0
3 +
4
± 1 8 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
C 0 0 5 C o n fig u r a tio n Q S P
In c re m e n ta l M s e t in %
1 1 n a c t
e n c o d e r C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 o f M m a x
C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8 C 0 5 1 n - c o n tr o lle r
E n c . 1 3 C 0 5 6
c o n s t. +
1 2
R e s o lv e r -
1 0 C 0 7 0 V p n
C 0 7 1 T n n
- C 0 7 2 K d n IF a c t
V A B C 2 3 2
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
A r m a tu r e v o lta g e Ia c t I · R - c o m p e n s a tio n C 3 1 0
C 3 1 1
1 0 0 % C 3 1 2
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6
C 3 1 3
T o r q u e r e d u c tio n C 3 1 4 Is e t
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
2 + + C 0 6 3
I m a x
1 -
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
0 V = n o r e d u c tio n
1 0 V = m a x . r e d u c tio n C 0 4 7
M a in s ig n a l p a th
4900Str028
FIG 7-1 Signal-flow chart showing the set-value processing for speed control with addition setpoint
(C005 = -1X-) default setting
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.1.1 Main set-value

The speed is determing via via the set-value set (C046)and related to the adjustable
value nmax (C011). The set-value can be selected as analog value using the input
X1/8, as dig. frequency using X5 or X9, as well as via keypad or LECOM interface.
Which input is activated depends on the operating mode set under C001 and the
signal priority set under C145/C147. The set-value channel is determined via the
configuration. A change to other signal sources is possible via the codes C145 /
C146.
7.1.1.2 Additional set-value

Also with keypad or interface operation, the additional analog set-value can be set
via the input X1/6 (or another signal source). The additional set-value (C049 /
set-value 2)is internally sent to a ramp function generator before it is combined with
the main set-value in a ”fixed” arithmetic block.The additional set-value can be
switched off via X2/E3 (C280).
With this function it is possible, for instance, to deactivate a correction signal during
set-up (dancer position, etc.).
C220* Acceleration 0.00 s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s
time Tir of 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
the 10 s {1 s} 100 s
additional 100 s {10 s} 990 s
set-value
C221* Deceleration 0.00 s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s
time Tif of 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
the 10 s {1 s} 100 s
set-value
7.1.1.3 JOG set-values

If you need certain fixed settings as main set-values, it is possible to retrieve
set-values, which can be parameterised, from the memory using the JOG inputs.
JOG set-values replace the main set-value. Enter JOG set-values as relative values
in % of n max.
Parameter setting for JOG set-values

JOG set-values are set in two steps:
( Select a JOG set-value under C038.
( Enter the value selected for the JOG set-value under C039.
Repeat these two steps if you need several JOG set-values. Up to max. 15 JOG
set-values can be programmed.
7-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C038¤ Input 1 -1- Selection JOG1 Select JOG setpoint to be set under C039.
preselection: -2- Selection JOG2
JOG ...
set-value -15- Selection JOG15
C039 JOG speed -100 % nmax {0.1 %} +100.0 % nmax Enable JOG set-values via the digital
for C038 100.0% JOG1 inputs or via C045.
75.0% JOG2
50.0% JOG3
25.0% JOG4
0.0 % JOG5
.. ...
0.0 % JOG15
Assignment of the digital inputs

The number of inputs to be assigned with the function ”enable JOG set-value”,
depends on the number of JOG set-values required.
Number of JOG set-values required Number of inputs required
1 at least 1
2...3 at least 2
4...7 at least 3
8...15 4
This function can be assigned to up to four inputs.

For input assignment, observe the notes in chapter 5.6.
JOG set-value enabling with terminal control

The assigned digital inputs must be controlled according to the table below to
enable JOG set-values.
2. input 3. input 4. input
JOG 1 1 0 0 0
JOG 2 0 1 0 0
JOG 3 1 1 0 0
JOG 4 0 0 1 0
JOG 5 1 0 1 0
JOG 6 0 1 1 0
JOG 7 1 1 1 0
JOG 8 0 0 0 1
JOG 9 1 0 0 1
JOG 10 0 1 0 1
JOG 11 1 1 0 1
JOG 12 0 0 1 1
JOG 13 1 0 1 1
JOG 14 0 1 1 1
JOG 15 1 1 1 1
The input with the lowest figure is the first input, the input with the next higher figure
is the second input, and so on (e. g. E4 = 1. input, E5 = 2. input).
C045 indicates the active set-value.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
JOG set-value enabling with control via keypad or LECOM interface

Active the JOG set-values under C045.
C045¤ JOG enable 0 -0- Main set-value (C046) active With terminal control only display
-1- Set-value JOG1 active
...
-15- Set-value JOG15 active
7.1.1.4 Master current

If the analog set-value is to be entered via X1/8 as master current, the current
setting range can be selected under C034:
( For -20mA...+20mA: C034 = -0-
( For 4...20mA: C034 = -1- (only unipolar)
If range 4...20mA is selected and the current is less than 2mA, the fault ”Sd5” is
indicated.
Spannungsleitwert auf Stromleitwert (Strombürde 250W) mit dem Schalter S3/1
auf der Steuerbaugruppe 4902MP umschalten:
( Master voltage/potentiometer: S3/1 = OFF
(Default setting)
( Master current: S3/1 = ON
(see chapter 4.3.4)
7.1.1.5 External torque reduction

With a potentiometer, it is possible, for instance, to apply a voltage externally to
terminal 2. This voltage has a direct influence on the I max values set under C022
and C023.
Note!
A voltage of 0V at terminal X1/2 corresponds to Imax if C005 = -1X-, -5X-, -6X- or
-72-.
The corresponding speed set-value is to be applied via terminal X1/8.

Alternatively to the set-value potentiometer, the current limitation can also be under
linear influence from an external control voltage.
7-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
S3/2
+10 V Ref.
1 2 5 9
10 kW (lin.)
min max
VIset = +10 ... 0 V

4900Str029
FIG 7-2 Connection diagram for external torque reduction via potentiometer or master voltage
Note!
The terminal input is inverted and assigned with 100 % Imax to reduce the wiring
for standard applications without external torque limitation.
For torque limit inputs (e. g. via master frequency), the function C047 = 100% -
|terminal (1,2)| can be changed to function C047 = |terminal (X5)|.
C282*¤ Function 0 -0- Function C047 = 100% - |input source|
for C047 -1- Function C047 = |input source|
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.1.6 Acceleration and deceleration times Tir ,Tif

Each acceleration or deceleration time refers to a speed change from 0 to n max
(C011). The times Tir and Tif to be set can be calculated as follows:
n a c t
[rp m ] n m a x
T ir = t ir
n m a x n 2 - n 1
n 2
n m a x
T if = t if
n 1 n 2 - n 1
0
t ir t if t
T ir T if
4900Str030
FIG 7-3 Calculation of acceleration and deceleration time
Here tir and tif correspond to the times desired for the change from n1 to n2 and
vice versa.
The times Tir and Tif calculated are setting values for the controller.
( Acceleration and deceleration time C012 and C013
The ramp function generator of the main set-value (nset or JOG set-value)is set via
the times Tir and Tif under C012 and C013.
( Additonal acceleration and deceleration times
Alternaltively to the acceleration and deceleration times under C012 and C013,
additional Tir and Tif times can be retrieved from the memory, for instance, to
change the drive acceleration from a certain speed on.
Programming of additional acceleration and deceleration times
Set the additional Ti times in two steps. The selection under C100 is valid for a pair
of acceleration and deceleration times:
( Select additional acceleration/deceleration times under C100.
( Enter the required acceleration time under C101, and the deceleration time
under C103.
For several additional Ti times repeat these two steps as often as required.
A maximum of 15 additional acceleration and deceleration times can be
programmed.
7-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C100*¤ Input: -1- Acceleration time Tir1 /deceleration time Tif1 Extends Tir (C012) and Tif (C013) by max.
Additional -2- Acceleration time Tir2 /deceleration time Tif2 15 value pairs. Can be changed under
acceleration/ ... C130:
deceleration -15- Acceleration time Tir15/deceleration time Tif15 1.Select additional times under C100.
times for 2.Set C101 (Tir) or C103 (Tif).
main
set-value
C101* Acceleration 0.00s 0 s {0.01 s} 1s Time refers to speed change 0...nmax
time for 1s {0.1s} 10s
C100 10 s {1 s} 100 s
100 s {10 s} 990 s
C103* Deceleration 0.00s 0 s {0.01 s} 1s Time refers to speed change 0...nmax
time for 1s {0.1s} 10s
C100 10 s {1 s} 100 s
100 s {10 s} 990 s
Assignment of the digital inputs

The of inputs to be assigned with the function ”enable additional acceleration and
deceleration times”, depends on the number of additional T itimes.
Number of additional acceleration and deceleration times Number of inputs required
required
1 at least 1
2...3 at least 2
4...7 at least 3
8...15 4
This function can be assigned to up to four inputs.

For input assignment, observe the notes in chapter 5.6
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Enable of additional acceleration and deceleration times

With terminal control, the inputs must be assigned according to the table below
to enable the additional acceleration and deceleration times. Ti times can only be
activated in pairs.
input 2. input 3. input 4. input
T ir1, Tif1 1 0 0 0
T ir2, Tif2 0 1 0 0
T ir3, Tif3 1 1 0 0
T ir4, Tif4 0 0 1 0
T ir5, Tif5 1 0 1 0
T ir6, Tif6 0 1 1 0
T ir7, Tif7 1 1 1 0
T ir8, Tif8 0 0 0 1
T ir9, Tif9 1 0 0 1
T ir10,Tif10 0 1 0 1
T ir11,Tif11 1 1 0 1
T ir12,Tif12 0 0 1 1
T ir13,Tif13 1 0 1 1
T ir14,Tif14 0 1 1 1
T ir15,Tif15 1 1 1 1
The input with the lowest figure is the first input, the input with the next higher figure
is the second input, and so on (e. g. E4 = 1. input, E5 = 2. input).
C130 displays the momentarily active Ti times.
With control via keypad or LECOM interfaces, C130 is used for the activation of
the Ti times in pairs.
C130*¤ Enable of 0 -0- T ir (C012) / Tif (C013) active If the Ti times are enabled via terminal,
additional -1- T ir1 / Tif1 active C130 is for display only.
Ti times ...
-15- T ir15 / Tif15 active
7-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.1.7 Limitation of the speed set-value

Main and additional set-values are lined via the arithmetic block 1 and then limited
via a limitation element with adjustable limits (C286, C287). This function can be
used if certain negative or positive values must not be exceeded during operation.
21 22 CCW
CW C042
QSP
Configuration C005 = -10- ... -53-
C012 T ir
nmax C013 T if C182
nset 1
C011 QSP C134
C046
C145/C146 C190 C105
0 + ·
` - /
1
C46
100% - C49
C041
CW/CCW FDE
JOG 1 FDE C286 C287
JOG 2 RFG stop
JOG x Enable in % of n max
FDE
RFG zero
nset 2 C050
100 %
QSP n set at n-controller
C049
C145/C146 in % of n max
0
1
n-controller
SPI
C220, C221
FDE
Z set off 4900Str031
FIG 7-4 Signal-flow chart for speed set-value selection with limitation element

C286*¤ Upper limit 180% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Upper limit of the speed setpoint for C050
of the -180 % {1 %} +180 % C286 must be higher than C287!
speed
setpoint
C287*¤ Lower limit -180% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Upper limit of the speed setpoint for C050
of the -180 % {1 %} +180 % C287 must be smaller than C286!
speed
set-value
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-9
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.2 Actual value feedback
7.1.2.1 Armature voltage feedback

In speed control with armature voltage feedback, the actual speed signal is
generated ba an internal armature voltage detection. Select C005 = -10- or -40-.
The value under C232 (adjustable 0 ... 30% of C090) compensated for the speed
error generated by the IôR component of the armature voltage.
Select the ”I¼R-compensation” such that the smallest speed occurs between
motor loading and unloading.
Stop!
( Field-weakening operation is not possible with this configuration.

( The monitoring ”Armature circuit interrupted” (ACI) must be solved externally
for this configuration, because an interruption cannot be reliably detected.
7-10 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.2.2 DC voltage tacho feedback

The actual speed value is fed back via X1/3 and X1/4. The tacho signal is
conditioned with a differential amplifier.
Stop!
Observe for tacho voltage adjustment, that also in field-weakening operation the
max. limit for the tacho input of 180 V must not be exceeded.
Possible configurations under C005:

-11- Speed control with tacho feedback
(Default setting)
-41- Torque control with speed limitation
For speed control with tacho feedback the analog actual value encoder must be
adjusted.
Adjustment of the tacho signal:
The analog inputs can be adjusted in respect of an offset or a gain fault. It is thus
possible to correct faults occuring in the controller or during transmission. The
value is adjusted to nmax (C011).
nset adjustment (main set-value)
1. Inhibit controller via terminal X2/28.
2. Select max. set-value via X1/8.
3. Set C025 (”encoder selection”) to -4-.
4. Assign 100 % to the max. set-value under C029 (”automatic
adjustment”) (with s or t
(Adjustment of level tolerances in the set-value channel).
5. Acknowledge the adjustment with SH + PRG.
6. Set the speed set-value to approx. 50%.
nact adjustment
Stop!
The addition of the mains set-value and the additional set-value is limited to 180%
of nmax! I.e. an addition of the additional set-value results in a motor speed of 1.8
¼ nmax .
Observe max. motor speed and rated motor voltage!
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-11
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Note!
If the field terminals (I, K) or the polarity of the actual value encoder is reversed
(resolver, tacho), a TRIP message is sent (see chapter 8.1). After checking and
correcting the wiring, the drive can be commissioned again. If the speed becomes
stable and the drive is operating with tacho feedback, the speed required can be
adjusted.
1. Adapt the rated tacho voltage on board 4902MP by using the DIP
switch (see chapter 4.3.4).
2. Set C025 (”encoder selection”) to -2-.
3. Select C029 (”automatic adjustment”).
4. Enable controller (X2/28).
5. Machine accelerates to speed xxx.
6. Measure speed with hand tacho.
7. Enter measured speed under C029 using the keypad.
8. Accept with SH+PRG.
9. The entered value will be accepted and the machine accelerated to the
correct speed with the time Ti of the ramp function generator.
Adjustment of additional set-value
Zset is an additional speed set-value to link a correction signal with the main
set-value in the arithmetic block (e.g. dancer position control, correction signal of
a synchronised system, correction signal via terminal during the assignment of the
main set-value via a serial interface, etc.). Adjustment is carried out when selecting
C025 = -3- and subsequent evaluation under C027 or C029.
7-12 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.2.3 Resolver feedback

With the following configurations of C005, a resolver can be used as speed or
phase feedback system. It is connected to X7. Resolver adjustment is not required
since the resolution is determined by the evaluation system. Possible configuration
of C005 are:
-12- Speed control
-52- Master with phase control
-62- Digital frequency bar (set-value bar) with phase control
-72- Digital frequency cascade with phase control
7.1.2.4 Incremental encoder feedback

With the following configurations of C005, an incremental encoder can be used
as speed or phase feedback system. It is connected to X5 or X9. An encoder
constant for pulse numbers to the power of two can be directly adjusted under
C025 / C026. Encoder bar number, which cannot be represented as a power of
two, can be adapted using the evaluation factors C027 and C028. Possible
configuration of C005 are:
-13- Speed control with actual-value feedback via X9
(Act. value feedback via X9)
-53- Master with phase control (act. value feedback via X5)
-63- Dig. frequency bar (set-value bar) with phase control
(Act. value feedback via X5)
Resolutions: 1. encoder 8192 incr./rev. = 0.45 rpm
2. encoder 4096 incr./rev. = 0.91 rpm
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-13
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.3 Adaptation and adjustment fo the control circuit parameters
7.1.3.1 Adaptation of the armature time constant

If the armature time constant set under C084 (TSR) is not the same as the effective
time constant of the motor (Tarmature) (see chapter 5.2), the following occurs:
C084 Effect Remedy
TSR > Tarmature Overcurrents in the armature Reduction of C084:
possible, the semi-conductor l Jump signal to the current controller (e.g. enable the
fuses may trip. controller when a set-value is applied and the field
current is C083 = 0A (motor not running))
l Observe the signal flow at the monitor output term. 61
by means of an oscilloscope.
l Reduce C084 so that the current can be controlled as
fast as possible without overshooting.
TSR < Tarmature Armature current controls too Increase of C084 under the same criteria as described
slowly. Drive provides only little above.
dynamic response.
7.1.3.2 nmaxsetting
C011 maximum speed

The set-value setting range is determined through nmax. Enter nmax in rpm under
C011. nmax can be between 250 rpm...5000 rpm. Default setting is 3000 rpm. nmax
is the reference value for the setting of the deceleration and acceleration times Tir
and Tif.
Stop!
If the additional set-value is added to the main set-value , the speed set-value C050
can reach up to 180% of nmax.
7-14 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.3.3 Field controller adjustment
Stop!
With field weakening operation, the motor speed can be so high that the motor will
be damaged. Do not exceed the maximum speed of the motor (see
manufacturer’s information).
48XX/49XX controllers include two control concepts for override field control.
( The ”Vab limitation” provides a very easy adjustment facility and is sufficient
for most applications.
( The control concept ”with separate Vab controller” offers a higher dynamic
response and accuracy. The adjustment of this system is however more
complicated.
The control method is selected under code C230.
[C230*] Control 0 -0- Limitation of the armature voltage Field weakening must be permitted under
mode for -1- Control of the armature voltage C231.
the
override
field control
Note!
If field weakening operation is not required, enter the rated field current (C083).
To avoid impermissibly high armature voltage at active loads, the field current is
reduced to its minium value (C231) by inhibiting the controller until nact = 0 is
reached.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-15
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Rating to detect IFmin

With the parameter IFmin (C231), the speed setting range is limited so that operation
at impermissible speed is avoided.
The following diagram is based on the standard excitation characteristic. The value
really required for IFmin (C231) is however dependent on the excitation
characteristic of the machine used. The following indications can therefore only
serve the orientation.
n r
n m a x
1 ,0
0 ,5
IF
1 2 % 1 9 % 3 2 % 3 9 % 4 7 % 5 7 % 7 1 % 1 0 0 % IF r
4900Str032
FIG 7-5 Detection of the min. field current in relation to the speed ratio
Example: nrated = 1500 rpm, nmax = 3000 rpm, i.e. nrated / nmax = 0.5
The value to be set under C231 is to be calculated.
Result: For this speed ratio, the diagram indicates approx.
32% for C231.
If necessary, adapt the gain and the integral action time of the field controller under
C077, C078 to different field time constants of the motors. Set C077 and C078
that the field current does not oscillate in field weakening operation.
( Vab limitation
The integrated field controller enables the speed adjustment by field current
weakening. The field current operation is automatically derived from the control
level of the armature current controller. With the armature voltage limitation, the
max. motor voltage is limited to static VAmax = 1.05ô VArated (C090) (short-term
overswinging of the armature voltage possible).
7-16 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Adjustment of the field weakening operation:

1. Enter IFmin under C231 (10...100% ref. to IFrated).
2. Selection of 100% nset at X1/8.
3. Increase nmax under C011 until reaching the required speed.
There is a PT1 element with an adjustable time constant between armature current
controller and field current controller. With this PT1 element the two circuits can
be decoupled.
The time constant is set to 140 ms as standard. For standard applications the time
must not be adjusted.
If the field control circuit is unstable in field weakening operation, increase or
decrease the time constant of the PT1 element.
I
s e t'
I- c o n tr o lle r Ig n itio n p u ls e
+ a lp h a 6
Ia c t' L 1 + ...L 3 -
-
C u r r e n t d e te c tio n C 0 8 4 L /R
C 0 7 9 C 0 9 0
1
C 2 3 1
I F m in C 1 8 7
I F s e t
IF - c o n tr o lle r Ig n itio n p u ls e
C 0 8 3
I -
F r
I F s e t C 0 7 7 V P I_ F C
C 1 8 8 C 0 7 8 T N I_ F C
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
IF a c t
4900Str033
FIG 7-6 Signal flow chart (section) for the field control circuit with Vdown limitation

C079* PT1 140 30 ms {10 ms} 9000 ms The higher the time constant, the higher
element ms the decoupling degree between aramture
Time and field control circuits.
constant
for field
controller
attenuation
In general, the time constant is to be increased if the field current oscillates. As a

result, the dynamic response of the system is reduced.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-17
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
( Vab control
The field weakening operation is derived from the control level of the Vdown
controller. With this control, the maximum motor voltage is limited to static
VAmax = 1.05 VArated (C090). The dynamic response is adjusted via the
parameters for the Vab controller and the field controller.
Adjustment of the field weakening operation:
1. Enter IFmin under C231 (10...100% ref. to IFrated).
2. Selection of 100% nset at X1/8.
3. Increase nmax under C011 until reaching the required speed.
4. Adjustment of the proportional gain of the Vab controller (C233)
5. Adjustment of the integral action time of the Vab controller (C234)
C 0 9 0
8 A r
C 2 3 3 C 2 3 4
C 0 5 2 +
8 A a c t -
C 2 3 1
I C 1 8 7
F m in I
V a b - c o n tr o lle r F s e t
I F - c tr l. Ig n itio n p u ls e
C 0 8 3
I F r -
I C 0 7 7 V
F s e t' P I_ F C
C 1 8 8 C 0 7 8 T N I_ F C
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
I
F a c t 4900Str034
FIG 7-7 Signal-flow chart (section) for the field control circuit with Vab control
7.1.3.4 Adjustment of speed controller parameters
C070 Vpn speed controller

Adapt the drive to different inertias under C070:
1. Increase C070 until the drive becomes instable.
2. Reduce C070 by approx 5 % until the drive becomes stable again.
C071 Tnn speed controller

The integral action time of the speed controller is set to the lower level current
controller. It is not necessary to optimise it for easy speed controls.
Note!
With Tnn = 9999ms, the speed controller operates as proportional controller. For
operation with higher-level control circuits with integral action component, the
speed controller should be parameterised as P controller.
7-18 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
C072 Kdn speed controller

For an improved starting behaviour of high-level controls, it is possible to set a
differential component in the speed controller. The factor indicated refers to the
proportional gain set under C070.
7.1.4 Offset and gain adjustment

( With these functions, the connected analog encoders can be adapted.
( In default setting, the offset voltages of the analog channels are adjusted.
( The offset voltages are not overwritten when loading the default setting.
( Carry out the offset adjustment before adjusting the gain.
Offset adjustment
1. Apply signal 0 V to the input to be adjusted.
2. Select the corresponding analog input under C025.
3. Set the offset correction under C026 (internal display = 0).
Input Display code Meaning (default setting)
X1/1, 2 C047 Torque limitation
X1/3, 4 C051 Actual value at C005 = -11-, -41-
X1/6 C049 Additional setpoint
X1/8 C046 nset
Gain adjustment
1. Apply the set-value, to which the internal display is to be adjusted, to the
input to be adjusted.
2. Select the corresponding analog input under C025.
3. Select the signal gain under C027 or C029 such that the internal display
matches the set-value selection.
Note!
For adjustment of the actual-value input see chapter 7.1.2
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-19
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C025¤ Input 2 -1- Terminals X1/1, X1/2 Select the input which is to be adjusted
selection: -2- Terminals X1/3, X1/4 with C026, C027, C028 or C029 under
Input -3- Terminal X1/6 C025.
adjustment
-4- Terminal X1/8
-5- Armature voltage feedback
-10- Digital frequency input X5
-12- Resolver X7
-13- Encoder output X8
C026¤ Encoder 0mV C007 = -5-, -6-, -9-, -20-: The encoder constants are not overwritten
constant Offset correction of the analog inputs when loading the factory setting.
for C025 -9999 mV {1 mV} +9999 mV
0V C025 = -5-:
Offset correction of the armature voltage feedback
-100V {1V} +100V
1 C025 = -10-, -11-:
Encoder constant of the digital frequency inputs
-0- 8192 increments / revolution
3 C025 = -13-:
Encoder constant of the encoder output with resolver
feedback
C027 Gain factor 1.000 C007 = -5-, -6-, -9-, -20-:
for C025 Gain factor of the analog inputs
-2.500 {0.001} +2.500
1.000 With C005 = -11-, -41-:
Gain factor of the tacho input X1/3, X1/4
0.010 {0.001} +9.999
1.010 C025 = -5-:
Gain factor fo the armature voltage feedback
0.100 {0.001} +9.999
0.1000 C025 = -10-, -11-: If an analog signal source (C145/C146) is
Gain factor of the digital frequency input assigned, the parameter will be displayed
-3.2767 {0.0001}+3.2767 only.
1.000 C025 = -12-:
Gain factor of the resolvers
-32.767 {0.001} +32.767
C028 Divisor for 0.1000 C025 = -10-, -11-:
C025 Divisor for the digital frequency inputs
0.0001 {0.0001} 3.2767
7-20 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C029¤ Automatic 100% This applies to all configurations:
adjustment If an automatic adjustment is not possible,
for C025 the previous value will be maintained.
--ok-- will not be displayed.
C007 = -5-, -6-, -9-, -20-: 1.Inhibit controller.
Automatic adjustment for analog inputs 2.Set setpoint at the terminal selected.
-100 % {0.1 %} 100.0% 3.Enter the required values.
4.C027 displays the calculated gain
factor.
C025 = -2- and tacho at X1/3, X1/4 or Adjustment during operation:
C025 = -5- and actual value from armature voltage 1.Display of actual speed.
feedback: 2.Measure real speed with hand tacho.
nactadjustment 3.Enter real speed.
0 rpm {1rpm} 5000rpm 4.Drive accelerates to this speed.
factor.
C025 = -10-, -11-: Automatic adjustment only possible, if X5
Adjustment of the digital frequency inputs X5, X9 or X9 are not selected as acutal speed
-100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0% inputs:
1.Display of actual output value.
2.Enter required output value.
factor.
C025 = -12-: Automatic adjustment is only possible, if
Adjustment of the resolver the resolver is not used as speed
-100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0% feedback system:
factor.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-21
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.5 Freely assignable inputs and outputs
7.1.5.1 Freely assignable digital inputs (FDI)
Change of the function assignment

Proceed as follows to assign a new function to an input:
( Select the input to be assigned under code C112.
( Select the function required under code C113.
( Select under code C114 whether the function is to be activated with a HIGH
or a LOW signal.
( Determine under code C115 whether the function is always to be switched
via terminal or, depending on the operating mode, via the correspondingly
selected interface.
C112*¤ Input 1 -1- digital input X2/E1 The digital inputs E1..E5 are freely
selection: -2- digital input X2/E2 assignable with the functions under
Freely ... C113.Each function can only be assigned
assignable -5- digital input X2/E5 to one input.
digital input Exceptions:
C113 = -20- : max. 2 dig. inputs
C113 = -1-, -2-, -40-: max. 4 dig. inputs
(binary coded selection of max. 1, 3, 7 or
15 additional Ti times or set-values).
Assignment of functions:
1.Select input under C112.
2.Assign function under C113.
3.Determine polarity under C114.
4.Determine priority under C115.
[C113*] Function -0- No function
for C112 -1- Enable additional Ti times
-2- Enable JOG set-value (X4/E4, E5)
-3- TRIP reset (X2/E2)
-4- TRIP set (X2/E1)
-6- Switch-off additional setpoint (X4/E3)
-7- Switch-off I-component of the n-controller
-9- Ramp function generator stop
-10- Ramp function generator zero
-16- Motor potentiometer deactivated
-17- Motor potentiometer down
-18- Motor potentiometer up
-20- Select parameter set
-21- Load parameter set
-30- Deactivate process controller
-31- Switch-off I-component of the process
controller
-32- Set process controller evaluation to 0
-40- Enable fixed set-value
[C114*] Polarity for 0 -0- Input HIGH active
C112 -1- Input LOW active
7-22 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

[C115*] Priority for -0- Deactivate terminal function, if terminal control
C112 is switched-off under C001. (X2/E4, E5)
-1- Terminal function remains active, if terminal
control is switched-off under C001. (X2/E1, E2,
E3)
C136* FDI Bit Free digital input Only readable via LECOM.
Status 0 FDI 1 C136 indicates the states of the digital
... inputs as decimal or binary value. The
3 FDI 4 change of polarity under C114 is
4 FDI 5 considered in C136.
Example for enable of additional T i time for terminal E2

( C112 -2- Digital input X2/E2
( C113 -1- Enable additional Ti times
T e r m in a l s e le c tio n S ig n a l s e le c tio n
C 1 1 2 C 1 1 3
L e v e l
E 1 C 1 1 4 N o s ig n a l
E 2 A d d itio n a lT i- tim e s
E 3 J O G s e tp o in ts
E 5 C 1 1 5 R F G z e ro
P r io r ity
C 0 0 1
O p e r a tin g m o d e
4900Str035
FIG 7-8 Parameter assignment for digital inputs
Except the functions ”Enable JOG set-values”, ”Enable additional acceleration and
deceleration times”, ”Enable fixed set-values” and ”Select parameter set”, each
function can only be assigned to one terminal. An already assigned function will be
overwritting by re-assigning the input.
A function, which is already assigned to an input, can only be assigned to another
terminal, if the input used before is assigned with a new function.
LECOM code for FDI

The states of FDI (E1 ... E5) can be displayed in binar format in C136 or they can
be read out in HEX format via the LECOM interface.
FDI assignment in C136:
Bit 15 ......... Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
not assigned FDI5 FDI4 FDI3 FDI2 FDI1
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-23
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.5.2 Freely assignable digital outputs (FDO)

13 freely assignable digital outputs are available. 5 FDOs are in form of terminals
and can be alternatively supplied via the internal voltage supply or externally with
a 24V PLC signal source. 1 FDO is designed as digital relay output. The other
7FDOs can be evaluated via the LECOM interface. Each FDO can be assigned with
signals according to C117. The FDO status can be indicated via LECOM
internface.
The following terminals are assigned to the FDOs:
( Terminals A1...A5 => FDA1...FDA5
( Relay output K11/K14 => FDO relay
Via LECOM interfaces, a FDO signals is always detected as active with a 1-signal.
The terminal signals can be inverted under code C118.
The output of the FDOs assigned to the terminals - A1...A5 and the relay - can be
delayed. The delay time can be adjusted in 1 ms steps under C128.
Change of the function assignment

Proceed as follows to assign a new function to an output:
( Select the output to be assigned under C116.
( Select the function under C117.
( Select the terminal level under C118.
( If necessary, determine a signal delay under C128.
Function of the delay time

In p u t o f th e d e la y e le m e n t
O u tp u t o f th e d e la y e le m e n t
0 2 4 6 8 1 0 2 0 3 0
t in s 4900Str036
FIG 7-9 Signal flow for a delay time of 2s (C128 = 2s)
7-24 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
LECOM code for FDO

The states of the FDOs can be displayed in binary format in C151 or they can be
read out in HEX format via the LECOM interface.
Order of FDOs in C151
Bit 15 Bit 0
0 0 0 Relay FDO12 FDO11 FDO10 FDO9 FDO8 FDO7 FDO6 FDO5 FDO4 FDO3 FDO2 FDO1
S ig n a l s e le c tio n P ro c e s s F D O le v e l
C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 7 d a ta c h a n n e l C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 8
L E C O M 1 / L E C O M 2
C 1 5 1 D e la y
A 0 1
N o fu n c tio n 0 0 1 B it0
D e la y A 0 2
n a c t < = n x (C 0 1 7 ) 1 0 2 B it1
A 0 3
C o n tr o lle r e n a b le 2 0 3 B it2
A 0 4
n - c tr l. o u tp u t = M m a x 3 0 4 B it3
D e la y A 0 5
R e a d y fo r o p e r a tio n ( R D Y ) 4 0 5 B it4
5 0 6 B it5 R e la y
P u ls e in h ib it ( IM P )
F a u lt m e s s a g e T R IP 6 0 7 B it6
W a r n in g 7 0 8 B it7
M e s s a g e 8 0 9 B it8
R F G : in p u t= o u tp u t 9 1 0 B it9
n a c t = n s e t 1 0 1 1 B it1 0
n a c t = 0 1 1 1 2 B it1 1
D e la y
Ia c t = 0 1 2 1 3 B it1 2
n a c t & Ia c t = 0 1 3
In p u t T e r m in a l
C 0 4 6 o r. C 0 4 9 > n x 1 4
s e le c tio n s ig n a ls
|Ia rm a tu re | > Ix 1 5 F D O
Ifie ld > Ix 1 6 C 1 1 6
|n a c t| > n x 1 7
B ra k e c o n tro l 1 8
E x a m p le :
C o m p a ra to r 1 1 9 C 1 1 6 /C 1 2 8
F u n c tio n n a c t & la c t = 0 a s s ig n e d to F D O 0 2
C o m p a ra to r 2 2 0 C 1 1 6 = 2 , C 1 1 7 = 1 3
4900Str037
FIG 7-10 Overview of the freely assignable digital outputs (FDO)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-25
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C116*¤ Input 1 -1- FDO 1 The digital outputs FDO1..FDO12 and the
selection: -2- FDO 2 relay output X3/K11, X3/K14 are freelay
Freely ... assignable with the functions under C117.
assignable -12- FDO 12 Multiple assignment is possible.
digital The outputs FDO1...FDO5 are assigned to
output -13- Relay output X3/K11, X3/K14
the terminals X3/A1...X3/A5.
FDO6...FDO12 can only be accessed via
LECOM.
1.Select output under C116.
Only for FDO1...FDO5, relay output:
4.Determine signal delay under C128.
[C117*] Function -0- No function
for C116 -1- nact nx C017 (FDO1)
-2- Controller enabled (FDO10)
-3- n-controller output = Mmax (FDO2)
-4- Ready for operation (RDY) (FDO11)
-5- Pulse inhibit (IMP) (FDO12)
-6- TRIP (relay)
-7- Warning (FDO6)
-8- Message (FDO7)
-9- Ramp function generator Input =Output
(FDO3)
-10- nact= nset(FDO5)
-11- nact= 0 (FDO4)
-12- IA = 0 (FDO8)
-13- IA & nact= 0 (FDO9)
-14- C046 or C049 > nx (Threshold C243)
-15- |IA | > Ix (Threshold C244)
-16- IF > Ix (Threshold C245)
-17- |nact| > nx (Threshold C242)
-18- Brake control
-19- Comparator 1
-20- Comparator 2
[C118] Polarity for -0- Output is HIGH active (FDO2, 3, 5)
C116 -1- Output is LOW active (FDO1, 4, relay)
C128* Delay for 0.000 s 0.000 s {0.001 s} 240.000 s Signal delay times for FDO 1...5 and relay
C116 output.
7-26 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Signal flow Function

nact nx
T h r e s h o ld
C 0 1 7
Threshold adjustable under C017 from -5000rpm...+5000rpm.
Hysteresis fixed 25rpm, default setting: C017 = -3000rpm
l Purpose
n a c t A 1 For monitoring the act. speed with torque control C005 = -40-...-43-
4900SStr118 l Output level = LOW
n-controller output = Mmax
Window fixed 99.9% from n-controller output.
n - c o n tr o lle r Hysteresis fixed 1.9%. The signal is equivalent to I max. LED at the operating unit
A 2
o u tp u t
l Purpose
4900SStr119
Monitoring of the speed control circuit for limitation (control error)
l Output level = HIGH
RFG Inp = RFGoutp
W in d o w s
C 2 4 1
Window adjustable under C241 from 0...100%
Hysteresis fixed 1% of nmax , default setting: C241 = 1%
R F G In p u t
l Purpose
R F G O u tp u t
A 3 Signal for detection of acceleration processes in the set-value channel
4900SStr120
nact = 0
T h r e s h o ld
C 0 1 9
Threshold adjustable under C019 from 0...5000rpm.
Hysteresis fixed 25rpm, default setting: C019 = 50rpm
l Purpose
n a c t A 4 Signal for reliable mains switch-off, standstill detection
4900SStr127
l Output level = LOW
W in d o w nact = nset
C 2 4 0 Window adjustable under C240 from 0...100%.
Hysteresis fixed 25rpm, default setting: C240 = 1%
n a c t l Purpose
A 5
n s e t Signal for detection of control deviation in the speed control circuit
4900SStr121
L o a d to rq u e
t
n m a x
A c t. s p e e d v a lu e
A 5 n a c t= n s e t
t
4900SStr122
ÜnactÜ nx
T h r e s h o ld Threshold adjustable from 100 to + 5000rpm under C242.
C 2 4 2 Hysteresis fixed 2% of nmax
Default setting: C242 = 1000rpm
l Purpose
n a c t C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 7
4900SStr123 Monitoring of the actual speed for overspeed
ÜC046Ü or ÜC049Ü nx
T h r e s h o ld
C 2 4 3 Threshold adjustable from 0 to 100% under C243
Hysteresis fixed, default setting: C243 =1%
l Purpose
C 0 4 6
C 0 4 9 ³ 1 C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 7 Starting protection at digital frequency coupling and analog correction signal
4900SStr124
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-27
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Signal flow Function

ÜIAÜ Ix
T h r e s h o ld
C 2 4 4 Threshold adjustable from 0 to 100% under C244
Hysteresis fixed, default setting: C244 =10%
l Purpose
IA C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 7 Adjustable armature current monitoring
4900SStr125
ÜIFÜ Ix
T h r e s h o ld Threshold adjustable from 0 to 100% under C245
C 2 4 5 Hysteresis fixed
Default setting: C245 =10%
l Purpose
IF C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 7
4900SStr126 Adjustable field current monitoring
Info:
The hysteresis indicates range between the threshold or the window at which the
function is activated and the switch-off value at which is function is deactivated
again.
7-28 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.5.3 Freely assignable “analog” inputs (FAI)

A n a lo g s ig n a l ( C 1 4 5 ) S ig n a l in p u t ( C 1 4 6 )
N o in p u t
T e r m in a l 8 M a in s e tp o in t C 0 4 6
T e r m in a ls 1 , 2 T o r q u e lim it C 0 4 7
T e r m in a l 6 A d d itio n a l s e tp o in t C 0 4 9
T e r m in a ls 3 , 4 A c t. v a lu e s p e e d c o n tr o lle r C 0 5 1
D ig . fr e q u e n c y A d d itio n a l to r q u e s e tp o in t
R e s o lv e r V p o f th e s p e e d c o n tr o lle r
M o to r p o te n tio m e te r V p o f th e p r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r
P r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r o u tp u t S e tp o in t o f th e p r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r
O u tp u t a r ith m e tic b lo c k L im ita tio n fo r p r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r
F ix e d s e tp o in ts In p u t 1 o f a r ith m e tic b lo c k
In p u t 2 o f a r ith m e tic b lo c k
A /D c o d e 1
A /D c o d e 2
F ie ld c u r r e n t s e tp o in t
4900Str038
FIG 7-11 FAI assignment with factory setting in configuration C005 = -11-
With each configuration changeover the corresponding analog signals are

assigned to the signal inputs - according to the configurations -. It is also possible
to reassign the inputs according to your application.
An analog signal can only be assigned to one function. If an analog singal has
already been programmed for the selected signal input, the previous assignment
will be overwritten.
A prioritization of the FAI ensures that terminal signals (X1/1 ... X1/8, X5, X7, X9)
can be used even if the operating mode C001 is set to interface or keypad control.
If an analog signal is assigned to a code, this input code is for display only. If the
assignment of the analog signal to the code is deactivated (e.g. by reassigning the
analog signal), the code stays on the value valid at that time.
If the input code is not linked with an analog signal, it can also be assigned to a
constant value which can also be stored in EEPROM under C003.
Exception: Parameters cannot be stored in codes C046, C047, C049 and C392.
The assignment of an analog signal to C270 or C271 (A/D-converter) enables a
digital evaluation of the analog input signal via interface.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-29
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Normalization of digital frequency inputs

If the digital frequency inputs X5 and X9 are not assigned to the function setpoint
or act. value encoder - depending on the configuration - they can be assigned to
a function according to the selection under C146.
The input frequency is normalized via C026, C027 and C028.
Procedure:
1. Depending on the max. input frequency:
Selection C026 corresponds to incr./rev. f input [kHz]
-5- 256 < 60
-4- 512 < 120
-3- 1024 < 240
-2- 2048 > 240
2. Numerator and denominator of the normalization factor:

( Numerator = 1024 / 2(C026)
- For (C026): Enter the section number (see table above)
( Denominator = Input frequency [kHz];
The value entered corresponds to 100% setpoint
3. Detection of C027 and C028:
Divide numerator and denominator of the normalization factor by a adaptation
factor for both to get setting values for C027 and C028 in a range that is accepted
by the controller.
Example:
Max. input frequency = 9 kHz
1. C026 = -5- (256 incr./rev.)
2. Normalization factor:
( Numerator = 1024 / 25 = 32.0;
( Denominator = 9.0
3. Adaptation factor = 10; setting value C027 = 3.2; setting value C028 =
0.9
The adaptation factor should be as low as possible because of the internal
resolution.
7-30 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C145*¤ Input 1 -1- Input terminals X1/1, X1/2 The functions set under C146 can be
selection: -2- Input terminals X1/3, X1/4 assigned to the input sources under
Analog -3- Input terminal X1/6 C145. Double assignment is not possible.
signal -4- Input terminal X1/8 The function selected last is always
assigned to the input.
C007 = -5-, -6-, -9-, -20-:
-6- Digital frequency input X9 The priority for these inputs can be
-7- Resolver determined under C147.
-8- Motor potentiometer output Change of C005 (configuration):
-9- Output process controller The freely selected assignments are
-10- Output arithmetic block 2 output 1 overwritten with a basic assignement that
-11- Fixed setpoint output depends on the configuration.
-12- Output arithmetic block 2 output 2 Assignments set before must be repeated.
-13- Output dead band element output 1
-14- Output dead band elemeent output 2
-15- Output DT1 element output 1
-16- Output DT1 element output 2
-17- Output absolute value generator output 1
-19- Output limiting element 1 output 1
-21- Output PT1 element output 1
-23- Output arithmetic block 3 output 1
-25- Output addition block 1 output 1
-29- n act from C382
-30- n set from C050
-31- Deviation at n-controller (xw)
-32- Deviation at process controller (xw)
-33- Ramp function generator output
-34- n-controller output
-35- Square-wave generator
-36- Deviation at angle controller
-37- RFG output of process controller setpoint
-38- RFG output of process controller evaluation
-39- AIF process controller setpoint
-42- Output comparator 1
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-31
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

[C146*] Function -0- No function If C146 = -4-, Vpn of the n-controller
for C145 -1- Main setpoint of C046 corresponds to 0% at the input Vp2 under
-2- Input for torque selection C320 and 100% at the input Vpn under
-3- Additional setpoint of C049 C070.
-4- V pn of the speed controller
-5- Field current setpoint If C146 = -5-, the field current setpoint
corresponds to 100% at the input of the
-6- Process controller: setpoint (C330)
rated current under C083. The minimum
-7- Process controller: actual value adjustable value is determined under
-8- Process controller: evaluation (C331) C231.
-9- Process controller: ext. Vp setting
-10- C027 of X5 C146 = -43-, -44-, -46- are for display
-11- C027 of X9 only (according to the configuration). They
-12- Gearbox factor (C032) cannot be assigned.
-13- Angle trimming of C256
-14- Speed trimming of C257
-15- Arithmetic block 2 - input 1 (C338)
-17- Fixed setpoint block input
-18- Analog / digital conversion 1 (C270)
-20- Dead band element input (C622)
-21- DT1 element input (C652)
-22- Absolute value generator input (C660)
-23- Limiting element input (C632)
-24- PT1 element input (C641)
-27- Addition block 1 - input 1 (C610)
-33- Additional torque setpoint 1 (C148)
-35- FAI input of the S&H module
-36- AIF process controller: act. value
-37- Limiting element 2 input (C637)
-38- Comparator 1 input 1 (C580)
-42- Input for ext. excitation characteristic
-43- n act of C051 (for tacho feedback)
-44- n act of C051 (for resolver or incremental
encoder feedback)
-46- Digital frequency setpoint
[C147*] Priority for -0- Terminal function not active, if terminal control
C145 is switched-off under C001.
control is switched-off under C001.
7-32 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.1.5.4 Freely assignable monitor outputs

The controller is equipped with two analog (terminals 62 and 63) and a digital
(digital frequency output X8) monitor outputs to output internal signals as voltage,
current or frequency signals. The positions of switches S1 and S2 required for the
analog outputs, can be obtained from chapter 4.3.4.1.
If you want to assign a new signal to an output, select under C110 which output
is to be changed. Select under C111 the signal to be assigned to this output. Under
C108 and C09 adjust gain and offset (C109 is not valid for the digital frequency
output) to adapt the monitor output, for instance, to a display instrument.
Stop!
With freely assignable signals positive feedbacks may occur, which can lead to
uncontrolled drive acceleration!

C108* Gain for 1.00 -10.000 {0.001} + 10.000 Gain for X4/62, X4/63, X8
C110
C109* Offset for 0mV -10000mV {1mV} +10000mV Loading of the factory settings does not
C110 overwrite C109.
Offset for X4/62, X4/63.
This code is only effective, if the digital
frequency output is selected under C110.
C110*¤ Input 1 -1- Analog output X4/62 (monitor 1) The monitor outputs are freely assignable
selection: -2- Analog output X4/63 (monitor 2) with the signals under C111:
Monitor -3- Digital frequency output X8 1.Select monitor output under C110.
output 2.Assign signals under C111.
3.If necessary, adjust under C108 and
C109.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-33
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

[C111*] Signal for -0- No signal In the armature setting range: 100 %
C110 -1- Main set-value (C046), reference: nmax Mmax correspond to 100 % Imax (C022,
-2- Input ramp function generator, reference: nmax C023)
-3- Outut ramp function generator, reference: nmax The actual armature current value Iact
(C054) is normalised according to the
-4- Additional set-value (C049), reference: nmax
controller:
-5- nset at the n controller input (C050), reference:
Iact X4/62, X4/63 X8 Type
nmax
16A 4 4V
4.4V 110kHz 4902
-6- nact (C051), reference: nmax (X4/63)
25A 4.7V 118kHz 4903
-8- nact (C382), reference: nmax (X8)
55A 4.8V 120kHz 4904
-20- n controller output, reference: Mmax
110A 4.9V 122kHz 4905
-21- M set (C047), reference: Mmax
200A 6.4V 159kHz 4906
-22- Iset (C063), reference: Imax (C022, C023),
250A 4.4V 110kHz 4907
(X4/62)
330A 5 2V
5.2V 129kHz 4X08
-23- Iact(C054), reference: (see ’Info’)
500A 5.8V 144kHz 4X09
-25- M set (C056), reference: Mmax
700A 5.8V 144kHz 4X11
-28- I¼t load, reference: 100%
1000A 5.8V 146kHz 4X12
-29- I2 ¼t load, reference: 100%
1200A 7.0V 175kHz 4X13
-30- V A (C052), reference: 1000 V
-35- Mains frequency, reference: 30Hz = 0V, 70Hz
= 10V
-40- Field current set-value, reference: max. rated
field current IFmax
-41- Actual field current, reference: IFmax
-60- Output motor potentiometer, reference: 100%
-61- Output process controller, reference: 100%
-62- Output arithmetic block 2, reference: 100%
-63- Digital frequency input X5, reference: 100%
-65- Resolver, reference: 100%
-66- Digital / analog conversion 1 (C272), reference:
100%
-67- Digital / analog conversion 2 (C273), reference:
100%
-68- Motor power, reference: 5 V = Prated
-69- Motor torque, reference: 5 V = Mrated
-70- Output dead band element, reference: 100%
-71- Output DT1 element, reference: 100%
-72- Output absolute value generator, reference:
100%
-73- Output limitation element 1, reference: 100%
-74- Output PT1 element, reference: 100%
-76- Output addition block 1, reference: 100%
-77- Output addition block 2, reference: 100%
7-34 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Example for the assignment of a monitor output terminal 62 to the terminal signal
C046 ”main set-value”.
( C110 = -1- Monitor output term. 62
( C111 = -1- Main set-value C046
S ig n a l s e le c tio n
C 1 1 1 T e r m in a l s e le c tio n
G a in O ffs e t C 1 1 0
N o s ig n a l C 1 0 8 C 1 0 9
M a in s e tp o in t C 0 4 6
In p u t s e tp o in t in te g r a to r
+ 6 2
6 3
IF a c t 4900Str039
FIG 7-12 Parameter assignment of the monitor outputs
A D/A conversion is possible using the codes C272 and C273, if the code is
assigned to an analog output. The digital value written via interface occurs as
voltage signal, which has been converted at the programmable monitor output.
Special features of the digital frequency output

If the configuration is changes, the digital frequency output is assigned according
to the basic assignment. The signal ”nact” is output under C005 =-1X- and -4X-.
In all other configuration, the signal ”n set” is assigned to the output. The following
table informs about the basic assignment of the digital frequency ouputs after
configuration changeover and the adaptation of the output frequency. If
necessary, this assignment can also be changed according to the requirements.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-35
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Adaptation of the signal at the digital frequency output X8

If another signal than stated in the basic configuration (C005) is assigned, the
output frequency is adjusted via code C108.
Configurat Basic assignment Adaptation of the output Notes
ion frequency with ...
C005 C026 if C030 C108
C025 = -13-
-10-, -40- nact from C382 - - active
-11-, -41- nact from C382 - - active
-12-, -42- nact from C051 Selection - - The rotor zero position, which depends on
possible the resolver, is output on the zero track.
-13-, -43- nact from C051 - - - The encoder constant is only by the
incremental encoder used (hardware). A
zero track is only output if it is provided by
the incremental encoder.
-5x- nset from C050 - Selection - The output signal is normalized to the
possible number of pulses of the incremental
encoder. A zero track will not be output.
-6x- nset from C050 - - - At the output X8 the signal from X9 is
directly output (electrically buffered). A zero
track is only output, if it is connected to
input X9.
-72- nset from C050 - Selection - The output signal is normalized to the
possible number of pulses of the incremental
encoder. The corresponding encoder
constant can only be set under C030. The
gain can be set via C027 and C028 of the
input X5 (C025 = -10-). A zero track will
not be output.
The sign ”-” means that a change does not influence the output frequency.
7-36 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.2 Torque control with speed limitation
Purpose
The drive is changed to torque control by the setting the configuration to C005 =
-4X- ”torque control with speed limitation”. The torque can be entered in both
directions.
In different operating modes, the speed is monitored with a speed limitation by
means of the n-controller.
Parameter setting
Stop!
With a negative torque set-value , the speed limitation is not effective. The drive can
reach impermissibly an impermissibly high speed, which can damage motor or
machine. These applications can only be monitored with the digital ouput act $ nx.
For standard applications, the drive can be immediately commissioned with the
default settings. To adapt it to special requirements, please observe the notes in
chapter 7.1, ”speed-controlled operation”.
Set-value Terminal Parameter setting with
speed set-value X1/8 C025 = -4-
Additional set-value X1/6 C025 = -3-
External torque selection Mset X1/1, 2 C025 = -1-
The speed set-value and the additional set-value are selected as bipolar values via
X1/8 or X1/6. The direction of rotation results from the sign of the linkage between
main and additional set-value and the selection made at X2/21 und X2/22.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-37
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
n o ffs e t
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 n s e ta t n - c o n tr o lle r C o n fig u r a tio n C 0 0 5 = - 4 x -
in % o f n m a x
T a c h o
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 0 5 0
3 +
4
± 1 8 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
M s e t in %
In c re m e n ta l 4 1 n a c t o f M m a x
e n c o d e r C 2 5 /C 2 6 C 2 7 C 2 8 C 0 5 1 n - c o n tr o lle r
E n c . 4 3 C 0 5 6
c o n s t. +
4 2
R e s o lv e r - + +
4 0 C 0 7 0 V p n
C 1 9 8 C 0 7 1 T n n
- C 0 7 2 K d n
V A B IF a c t
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
A r m a tu r e v o lta g e C 3 1 0
Ia c t C 2 3 2 C 3 1 1
I · R - c o m p e n s a tio n C 3 1 2
C 3 1 3
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 3 1 4
E x te r n a l to r q u e lim it C 0 4 7
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 s p e e d -d e p e n d e n t
2 + c u r r e n t lim ita tio n
1 Is e t
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
0 V = n o to rq u e C 0 6 3
1 0 V = m a x . to rq u e C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 8
A d d . to r q u e s e tp o in t 1 I m a x
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 9 C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
A d d . to r q u e s e tp o in t 2
4900Str040
FIG 7-13 Signal-flow chart (section) for torque control with speed limitation (C005= -4X-)
7-38 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.3 Digital frequency coupling
General description of the system

The digital frequency coupling described here enables a digital set-value
transmission and evaluation between a set-value source and one or more
controllers. The transmission path can be used as bar or cascade for:
( Phase-synchronous running
( Speed-synchronous running
( Speed-ratio synchronism or
( Position controls with drift-free standstill
In every controller, the set-value can be evaluated with a factor and output with
a gain at the corresponding digital frequency output.
The digital frequency coupling is a pure digital set-value transmission with all of
its advantages:
( drift-free
( extremely precise
( increased noise immunity
Therefore, three configurations are offered:
( Master, C005 = -52-, -53-
( Slave for digital frequency bar, C005 = -62-, -63-
( Slave for digital frequency cascade, C005 = -72-
Set-value conditioning
In the set-value branch, the speed and phase set-values are processed as
absolute values.
Gearbox factors (C032 and C033)

The evaluation factors C032 and C033 are in the set-value channel of the
corresponding drive (slave). They are used to set the gearbox factor.
Setting range of the factors:
( C032 from -3.2767 to +3.2767
( C033 from +0.0001 to +3.2767.
The quotient is limited to max. 32767.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-39
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.3.1 Master
Purpose
The master configuration C005 = -52- or -53- is:
( to activate the phase control
which is preconnected to the speed controller
( to configure the drive as master drive for the digital frequency coupling to
generate the master digital frequency for the following drives
The phase control is used to improve the control features of the drive, so that a
drift-free standstill is achieved, e.g. for:
( positioning tasks
( hoists, etc.
The set-value path is selected according to the configurations -1X- and -4X-.
Features
( Either resolver or incremental encoder feedback
( Master with signal conditioning as for the configurations C005 = -1X-, -4X-
( DF output signal is set-value for slave 0 (master drive) and other slaves
( For slava 0 evaluation possibility of the set-value with a factor
(numerator/denominator) as well as gearbox adaptation
(numerator/denominator). Adjustable via LECOM, motor potentiometer or
analog terminal
( External torque limitation possible
( QSP function for the whole drive group
( Ctrl. enable function results in loading of the set-value integrator with the
actual value of slave 0 (set-value = actual value)
( Influence possible via codes for pahse trimming and speed correction (via
LECOM, motor potentiometer, analog terminal or one of the signal sources
under C145)
( Indication ”following error limit reached” can be set by a code
( TRIP when reaching the phase controller limit
( Speed limit of slave 0 = 1.8 ¼ C011
( Phase controller influence of 0 (0 = deactivated) adjustable up to 1.00
The master drive consists of the master integrator and the slave 0. Slave 0 is the
first drive at the master frequency.
7-40 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
FIG 7-14
M a s te r in te g r a to r C W 2 1 2 2 C C W C 0 4 2 D F o u tp u t
C 0 1 2 T ir Q S P
n o ffs e t n m a x C 0 1 3 T if
n s e t
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 1 1 Q S P C 1 3 4
n s e t' C 0 4 6 C 0 3 0 X 8
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 1 9 0 C 1 0 5
Signal-flow chart for mater integrator with slave 0
+ E n c . to fu rth e r
0 + · N C O
8 ± 1
c o n s t. d r iv e s
1 - /
-1 0 V ...+ 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 C 4 6
1 0 0 % - C 4 9 5 1 2
C 0 4 1 C W /C C W 1 0 2 4
E x
J O G 1 2 0 4 8
E 4 E 5 R F G s to p 1 8 0 % o f n
n o ffs e t J O G 2 m a x 4 0 9 6
E x
J O G x E n a b le 8 1 9 2
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 R F G z e ro
A d d .
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 Q S P
+ 0
6
1
-1 0 V ...+ 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
S W I
C 2 2 0 , C 2 2 1
E 3 Z s e t
C 0 2 8 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6
S la v e 0 E n c .
c o n s t.
S p e e d tr im m in g
C 2 5 7 5 1 2
C 0 3 2 C 0 3 3 ± 5 0 0 0 rp m 1 .8 · C 0 1 1 n a t 1 0 2 4
+ s e t
2 0 4 8
n - c o n tr o lle r in
+ + 4 0 9 6
S e t p h a s e C 2 5 6 - % o f n m ax 8 1 9 2
G e a rb o x P h a s e c tr l.
in te g r a to r P h a s e tr im m in g C 0 5 0 Q S P M se in %
+ C 2 5 5 t
+ o f M Im a x
+
n - c o n tr o lle r m a x
X 5 C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8 + - C 0 5 6 C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
P h a s e C o n t. +
E n c . P h a s e o ffs e t c tr l. e rro r C 2 5 4
c o n s t. C 0 0 5 A c t. p h a s e C 2 5 2 lim it lim it -
D ig _ In _ 1 5 1 2 5 3 in te g r a to r
C 1 9 8 C 0 7 0 V p n
1 0 2 4 C 0 4 7 IF a c t
Configuration
5 2 C 0 7 1 T n n
2 0 4 8
M o n ito r in g C 0 5 1 C 0 7 2 K d n
4 0 9 6 5 3 I s e t
lo g ic n a c t
X 7 8 1 9 2
5 2 C 0 6 3
R e s o lv e r
e v a lu a tio n
T o r q u e lim ita tio n
0 V = n o lim ita tio n
1 2 1 0 V = m a x . lim ita tio n
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4900Str041
7-41
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
QSP at the master

If QSP is switched at the master drive, the set-value (C050) is reduced along the
QSP ramp for all drives. Thus, the complete network of drives can be decelerated
to standstill by the QSP integrator.
If QSP is reset before standstill is achieved, the network of drives starts to
accelerate or decelerate at the set-value integrator with the value set under C050.
QSP at slave 0 (master drive)

If the deceleration ramp is very short and it can only be achieved with I max , the
phase synchronism will be lost. With the Imax message, the set-value integrator
follows the actual phase integrator. Thus, the rotor does not turn back when
reaching n = 0. If the Imax message is reset, the phase control will be reactivated
and drift-free standstill can be ensured.
The switching of QSP is a continuous operating mode for the connected slaves
so that a reversal is possible, if the deceleration ramp set at the master should be
too short for one of the slaves.
Ctrl. enable at the master

If the master is inhibited, the actual value of slave 0 is used as a set-value for the
other slaves.Thus, the complete network of drives could be decelerated to
standstill by the coasting slave 0.
If the master is enabled before standstill, the network of drives starts to accelerate
with the actual speed at the set-value integrator.
The phase difference is set to zero by switching controller enable.
7.3.2 Slave for digital frequency bar
Purpose
With configuration C005 = -62- or -63- for the set-value bar,
( the phase control, which is preconnected to the speed controller, is
activated and
( the set-value path is changed to digital frequency coupling for phase and
speed synchronous running.
7-42 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
M a s te r d r iv e w ith
m a s te r in te g r a to r S la v e 1 S la v e 2
R R R
R e s o lv e r In c re m e n ta l R e s o lv e r In c re m e n ta l R e s o lv e r In c re m e n ta l
e n c o d e r e n c o d e r e n c o d e r
X 7 X 5 X 7 X 5 X 7 X 5
F a c to r F a c to r
S W I
j , n - c tr l. j , n - c tr l.
j , n - c tr l.
X 1 X 9 X 8 X 9 X 8 X 9 X 8
E n c o d e r E n c o d e r E n c o d e r
o u tp u t o u tp u t o u tp u t
4900Str042
FIG 7-15 Connection diagram for the configuration of the digital frequency bar
M Master drive with master integrator

S1 Slave 1
S2 Slave 2
R Resolver
Features
( Either resolver or incremental encoder feedback
( Hardware connection between DF output and DF input
( Another evaluation of the set-value with a factor (numerator/denominator)
for the corresponding slave (gearbox adaptation). Adjustable via LECOM,
motor potentiometer or analog terminal
( QSP function for the individual drive. The DF set-value will be output
independently of QSP.
( RFR function for the individual drive. The set-value will be output to the DF
output independtly of the QSP.
( Influence possible via codes for phase trimming and speed correction (via
LECOM, motor potentiometer, analog terminal or one of the signal sources
under C145)
( Following error limit adjustabel via code
( Speed limit = 1.8 ¼ C011
( No alternative set-value conditioning available
(JOG, additional set-value, set-value integrator...)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-43
Show/Hide Bookmarks
7-44
48XX/49XXSHB0399
Configuration
D ig . fr e q u e n c y S la v e f o r d ig . f r e q u e n c y b a r , c o n f ig u r a t io n C 0 0 5 = - 6 x - D F o u tp u t
in p u t
FIG 7-16
X 9 X 8
to n e x t
d r iv e
C 0 4 2
D ig _ In _ 2 c w /c c w 2 1 2 2 Q S P
Slave for digital frequency bar
E n c o d e r c o n s ta n t C 0 4 6
n se t
N u m . D e n o m .
C 1 0 5
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8 C 0 3 2 C 0 3 3 ± 5 0 0 0 rp m
E n c . +
± 1 +
c o n s t.
+ S e t p h a s e C 2 5 6 -
G e a rb o x C 0 4 1 in te g r a to r P h a s e tr im m in g P h a s e c o n tr o lle r
5 1 2
1 0 2 4 S p e e d + C 2 5 5
+
2 0 4 8 tr im m in g
C 2 5 7 + + -
4 0 9 6 P h a s e C o n to u r in g
8 1 9 2 P h a s e o ffs e t c o n tr o lle r e r r o r C 2 5 4
A c t. p h a s e C 2 5 2 lim it lim it
in te g r a to r
In c re m e n ta l M o n ito r in g
e n c o d e r in p u t n s e t a t lo g ic
X 5 n - c o n tr o lle r in
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8
% o f n m ax 1 8 0 % o f n
E n c . m a x
c o n s t. C 0 5 0
D ig _ In _ 1 5 1 2 C 0 0 5
1 0 2 4 6 3
R e s o lv e r 2 0 4 8
6 2 n
C 0 5 1 Q S P M s e t in %
4 0 9 6 a c t C 1 9 8 o f M m ax Im a x
in p u t 8 1 9 2
n - c o n tr o lle r
C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
6 3 C 0 5 6
X 7 +
R e s o lv e r 6 2 -
e v a lu a tio n
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 7 0 V p n
1 0 0 % I
T o r q u e lim ita tio n C 0 7 1 T n n F a c t
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 0 7 2 K d n
2 + + Is e t
1 - C 0 6 3
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
0 V = n o lim ia tio n
1 0 V = m a x . lim ita tio n C 0 4 7
C 2 8 2
4900Str043
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Set-value conditioning of the slave

The value read from Dig_In_2 (X9) forms the set-value (speed and phase) for the
internal control and is also the output value at the digital frequency output. The
set-value is evaluated with the encoder constant (C026, C027 and C028 when
C025 = -11-) and the gearbox factors C032 and C033.
The direction of the slave can be changed with the CW/CCW changeover. If the
direction of rotation is changed while the machine is running, pulse losses, which
lead to phase errors, occur. The direction changeover can, for instance, be used
for electrical shafts, consisting of 2 opposite motors.
Special features compared to speed control
( No set-value integrator in the set-value branch.
( The changeover to a JOG value is not possible.
( The additional set-value is not active.
Feedback system
The feedback system is selected by means of the configuration
( C005 = -62- resolver or
( C005 = -63- incremental encoder
QSP at the slave

If QSP is switched at the slave, the set-value (C050) is reduced along the QSP
ramp. Homing points are lost. A drift-free standstill is obtained because with the
switching of QSP the set phase is led by the QSP integrator.
If the deceleration ramp is very short and it can only be achieved with Imax the
set-value integrator follows the actual phase integrator. Thus, the rotor does not
turn back when reaching n = 0.If the Imax message is reset, the phase control will
be reactivated and drift-free standstill can be ensured.
Ctrl. enable at the slave

If a slave is inhibited, the motor coasts at the friction torque. At the DF output, the
set-value for the following slave is still output.
If the slave is enabled, the drive accelerates to its set-value (possibly at the current
limit). With switching controller enable, the phase difference is set to zero. Homing
points are lost.
Exception
If the controller is inhibited because of a short-term synchronisation fault or mains
interruption, the phase difference will not be reset. After mains recovery, the drive
is able to follow its set phase. A phase difference, detected before, will be
compensated.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-45
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.3.3 Slave for digital frequency cascade
Purpose
With configuration C005 = -72- for the set-value cascade
( the phase control which is connected to the speed controller will be
activated
( the set-value path is changed to digital frequency coupling for speed ratio
synchronism.
M a s te r d r iv e w ith
m a s te r in te g r a to r S la v e 1 S la v e 2
R R R
R e s o lv e r In c re m e n ta l R e s o lv e r R e s o lv e r
e n c o d e r
X 7 X 5 X 7 X 7
j , n -c trl j , n - c tr l.
F a c to r F a c to r
S W I
j , n - c tr l.
X 1 X 9 X 8 X 5 X 8 X 5 X 8
E n c o d e r E n c o d e r E n c o d e r
o u tp u t o u tp u t o u tp u t
4900Str044
FIG 7-17 Connection diagram for the configuration of the digital frequency cascade
Features
( Only resolver feedback possible
( With a cascading factor evaluation of the set-value
(numerator/denominator) possible for the digital frequency output and thus
for all following drives adjustable via LECOM, motor potentiometer or
analog terminal
( Another evaluation of the set-value with a factor (numerator/denominator)
for the corresponding slave (gearbox adaptation). Adjustable via LECOM,
motor potentiometer or analog terminal
( The QSP or RFR function in the individual drive do not influence the
set-value of the cascade
( Influence possible via codes for phase trimming and speed correction (via
LECOM, motor potentiometer, analog termina or signal source (C145))
( Following error limit adjustabel via code
( Speed limit = 1.8 ¼ C011
( No alternative set-value conditioning available (JOG, additional set-value,
set-value integrator, ...)
7-46 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
D ig . fr e q u e n c y E n c o d e r c o n s ta n t
S la v e o r D F - c a s c a d e , c o n fig u r a tio n C 0 0 5 = - 7 2 - D F o u tp u t
in p u t
FIG 7-18
N u m e r a to r D e n o m in a to r
X 5 1 6 B it C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8 C 0 3 0 X 8
E n c . E n c . to n e x t
c o n s t. c o n s t. d r iv e
C 0 4 2
D ig _ In _ 1 5 1 2 C W /C C W 2 1 2 2 Q S P 5 1 2
1 0 2 4 1 0 2 4
Slave for digital frequency cascade
2 0 4 8 2 0 4 8 C 0 4 6
n s e t
4 0 9 6 4 0 9 6
8 1 9 2 C 1 0 5 8 1 9 2
C 0 3 2 C 0 3 3 ± 5 0 0 0 rp m
+
± 1 + -
+ S e t p h a s e C 2 5 6
G e a rb o x C 0 4 1 in te g r a to r P h a s e tr im m in g P h a s e c tr l.
S p e e d + C 2 5 5
+
tr im m in g
R e s o lv e r C 2 5 7 + + - P h a s e C o n t.
in p u t A c t. p h a s e
P h a s e o ffs e t c o n tr o lle r e rro r C 2 5 4
C 2 5 2 lim it lim it
X 7 in te g r a to r
R e s o lv e r
e v a lu a tio n
M o n ito r in g
n s e t a t lo g ic
% o f n m ax 1 8 0 % o f n m a x
C 0 5 0
C 0 5 1 Q S P M s e t in %
n a ct C 1 9 8 o f M Im a x
n - c tr l. m a x
C 0 5 6 C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
+
-
Configuration
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 7 0 V p n
1 0 0 % I F a c t
T o r q u e lim ita tio n C 0 7 1 T n n
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 0 7 2 K d n
2 + + Ise t
1 - C 0 6 3
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
C 0 4 7
48XX/49XXSHB0399
1 0 V = m a x . lim ita tio n

C 2 8 2
4900Str045
7-47
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Cascading factor
The cascading factor directly influences the set-value at the input Dig_In_1 (X5).
Encoder adaptation (C025 = -1-) under C026, C027 and C028.
The following constants can be adjusted under C026:
8192 incr./rev.
4096 incr./rev.
2048 incr./rev.
1024 incr./rev.
512 incr./rev.
Cascading constants, which cannot be represented as a power of two, can be
assigned under C027 / C028. The following relation applies:
C 026 = C 027
Encoder constant C 028
Setting range of the factors:

( C027 from -3.2767 to +3.2767
( C028 from +0.0001 to +3.2767.
The quotient is limited to max. 32767.
Note!
For the largest possible internal resolution, set C026 = -0- (8192 incr./rev.) and
under C027 the value +0.8192 (8192 incr./rev. divided by 10,000) should be set.
Indicate the effective encoder constant, which is evaluated with the divisor
10,000, under C028.
Example:
Encoder = 4000 incr./rev.
C026 = - 0 -
C027 = 0.8192
C028 = 0.4000
Set-value conditioning of the slave

The value read from Dig_In_1, evaluated with C026, C027 and C028, forms the
set-value (speed and phase) for the internal control and is also the output value
at the digital frequency output.
The set-value for the corresponding drive can be evaluated by the gearbox factor
C032 and C033.
The direction of the slave can be changed with the CW/CCW changeover. If the
direction of rotation is changed while the machine is running, pulse losses, which
7-48 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
lead to phase errors occur.The direction changeover can, for instance, be used
for electrical shafts, consisting of 2 opposite motors.
Special features compared to speed control

( No set-value integrator in the set-value branch.
( A changeover to a JOG value is not possible.
( The additional set-value is not active.
Feedback system (X7)

With configuration C005 = -72- only the resolver can be selected as feedback
system.
QSP at the slave

If QSP is switched at the slave, the set-value (C050) is reduced along the QSP
ramp. Homing points are lost. A driftfree standstill is obtained because with the
switching of QSP the set phase is led by the QSP integrator.
If the deceleration ramp is very short and it can only be achieved with Imax the
set-value integrator follows the actual phase integrator. Thus, the rotor does not
turn back when reaching n = 0.If the Imax message is reset, the phase control will
be reactivated and drift-free standstill can be ensured.
At the DF output, the set-value for the following slave(s) is still output.
Ctrl. enable at the slave

If a slave is inhibited, the motor coasts at the friction torque. At the digital
frequency output, the set-value for the following slave is still output. If the slave
is enabled, the drive accelerates to its set-value (possibly at the current limit).
When the controller is enabled, the phase difference is set to zero. Homing points
are lost.
Exception
If the controller is inhibited because of a short-term synchronisation fault or mains
undervoltage, the phase difference will not be reset. After mains recovery, the
drive is able to follow its set phase. A phase difference, detected before, will be
compensated.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-49
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.3.4 Digital frequency output
DF output at the master

The following formula applied to the DF output:
1 Incr.
Output frequency Hz = C030 . Set speed rpm
60 Rev.
The max. output frequency is: fmax 420kHz

(corresponds to 3080 rpm with encoder type 8192 incr./rev.)
DF output at the digital frequency cascade

The signal read in at X5 and evaluated with C026, C027 and C028 is output at
the DF output.
1 Incr.
Output frequency Hz = C030 . Set speed rpm
60 Rev.
The max. output frequency is: fmax 420kHz

(corresponds to 3080 rpm with encoder type 8192 incr./rev.)
DF output at the digital frequency bar

The signal at X9 (hardware) is directly output with a gain at X8 (encoder output).
7-50 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.3.5 Speed synchronism
Selection
For speed synchronising, select the following slave configurations together with
the master configuration C005 = -5X-:
( Slave for set-value bar C005 = -6X-
for only two drives or with fixed speed ratios which have to be set only
once (commissioning).
( Slave for set-value cascade C005 = -72-
for more than two drives or simple modification of the speed ratios with
stretch factors in the actual process.
The speed synchronism offset is changed and displayed under C257.

( The code can be accessed via analog terminal, motor potentiometer,
keypad or LECOM.
( With this correction value, an offset up to 3750 rpm can be selected for
the fixed speed ratio at the drive.
The phase controller must be deactivated for speed synchronism (C254 = 0).
Thus, the phase-synchronous running becomes a speed-synchronous running,
i.e. phase errors occur.
7.3.5.1 Speed-synchronous running
Purpose
For material transport with very low stretching coefficients, such as paper, metal,
etc., the tension can be set through the gearbox factor under C032 and C033
because of the oversynchronisation in the ‰ range.
The stretch coefficient of the material results in a certain tension. For better
operation and higher precision in digital frequency coupling, we recommend the
digital frequency cascade C005 = -72-.
7.3.5.2 Speed ratio synchronism
Purpose
( Stretch systems
( Wire drawing systems
Example
Extruder systems with stretching of plastic threads by a speed ratio sychronism,
with the stretching controlled by a motor potentiometer function on-line during the
process (see chapter 15.7).
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-51
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.3.6 Phase synchronisation
Purpose
( Drive concept for positive movements
(e.g. packaging of bottles on conveyor belts).
( Electric shaft (e.g. line shaft, printing machines with size-dependent
embossing rolls or printing rolls)
Conditions
Configuration C005 = -62-, -63- or -72-
With C005 = -52- or -53- the specifications are only valid for slave 0
Phase-synchronous running
With an active phase controller, every controller can perform a drift-free phase
synchronisation to its set-value. Since for the DF cascade the set-value of the
second slave was conditioned in the first slave and the two systems are not
synchronised, a fixed phase shift between the motor shafts is caused, which
however, does not add up over the time.
7-52 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.3.6.1 Phase controller

S p e e d P h a s e F o llo w in g S p e e d
tr im m in g c o r r e c tio n V p w n s e t
e r r o r lim it p re c o n tro l
C 2 5 4 C 0 5 0
C 2 5 7 C 2 5 2 C 2 5 5
S e t p h a s e C 2 5 3 P h a s e
in te g r a to r C 2 5 6 c o n tr o lle r
+ +
lim it
+ 1 .8 · C 0 1 1
S e tp o in t + + + +
- S p e e d n - c o n tr o lle r
s e tp o in t
P h a s e c o n tr o lle r
A c t. p h a s e
in te g r a to r
A c t. v a lu e
4900Str046
FIG 7-19 Phase controller
Conditions
Configuration C005 = -52-, -53-, -62-, -63- or -72-
Special features
With the configurations C005 = -12-, -13-, -42- or -43-, the activation of the
phase controller (C254 > 0) during quick stop (QSP) ensures a drift-free standstill.
In continuous operation, the controller is not effective.

The difference calculated from set and actual phase is led to the phase controller
which works as proportional controller. It’s influence can be set under C254.
C254 = 0 means the complete disconnection of the phase controller from the
control path.
Setting range of C254 = 0.00 to 1.00. With C254 = 1.00 and 1 increment control
difference, the phase controller changes the speed set-value by 0.186 rpm.
Phase controller limit
Stop!
When the phase controller limit is reached and the monitoring is switched off, the
sign at the phase controller output may change. By switching controller enable,
the phase difference is set to zero.
The phase controller limit is fixed to a phase difference of 65531 revolutions. If

this phase difference is exceeded, the phase controller can no longer correct the
set phase. When the phase controller limit is reached, a TRIP P13 is generated.
The fault message can be evaluated in its priority.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-53
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.3.6.2 Phase trimming

The phase trimming can be changed and displayed under C256.
( Code C256 can be accessed via analog terminal, motor potentiometer,
one of the signal sources under C145, keypad or LECOM.
( Thus, the rotor position can be adjusted by a maximum of 4 revolutions.
Negative values stand for an adjustment to the left and positive values for
an adjustment to the right.
Resolution: 1 incr. ref. to an encoder type 8192 incr./rev.
7.3.6.3 Following error limit

The following error limit can be set under C255 in increments. The setting range
is: 0...536.750.000 increments. The maximum value of the phase difference is
65.521 revolutions and does not depend on the encoder.
Hysteresis: 10 increments.
When the following error limit is reached, a signal is generated which is evaluted
via the ”monitorings”. Thus, the priority (TRIP, message or warning) can be
evaluated according to the user’s requirements.
With switching controller enable, the phase difference is set to zero.
With an activated phase controller, phase synchronism and drift-free
syncoronous running with the controller set-value (the same as set-value of other
controllers) can be achieved.
By means of gearbox factors (C032 and C033) in the corresponding drive it is
possible to compensate for mechanically asymmetric operation of the system
(e.g. different gearboxes). This means, that phase synchronis at the gearbox
output shafts can be implemented.
7-54 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.4 Additional control functions
7.4.1 Redundant actual value feedback
Purpose
In the event of a failure of the actual speed encoder like tacho, resolver or
incremental encoder, this function enables to decelerate the DC drive standstill in
a controlled way (emergency operation) without being inhibited by a TRIP.
Function
If the actual value encoder fails, it is changed to armature voltage feedback:
( Speed operation with configuration C005 = -1X-,
Change to configuration C005 = -10-.
( Torque control with configuration C005 = -4X-,
( Dig. frequency operation with the configurations C005 = -5X-, -6X-, -7X-,
The set-value channel remains active, i.e. a possibly selected phase control is not
active.
Warning!
The message ”encoder polarity reversed” does not automatically lead to a change
of the actual value encoder to armature voltage control.
With the change to armature voltage control, the feedback resolution becomes
less compared to a tacho or resolver. Furthermore, faults in speed adjustment
(encoder constant) can occur.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-55
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Activation of redundant encoder feedback

The redundant encoder feedback is activated by a change of the monitoring, ”Sd1”
to ”Sd4” depending on C005, from TRIP to warning (see chapter 7.7.1).
Warning!
In this case, the monitoring ”armature circuit interrupted” (ACI) cannot detect an
interruption of the armature circuit reliably.
Use the monitoring TRIP for commissioning. If the actual value encoder operates
correctly, the monitoring can be changed from TRIP to warning and thus activate
the redundant feedback.
Adjustment of the redundant feedback

An adjustment through C025, C026 and C027 is not necessary for the armature
voltage control since the gain factor must always be calculated on-line because
of the different actual value encoders.
If the system requires low speed errors when changing the load, the ”I ¼ R
compensation” should be adjusted (see chapter 7.1.2.1).
Change to the actual encoder

Change to the configuration active before if
( the controller is disconnected from the mains
( the controller is inhibited and no warning is active.
7-56 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.4.2 Changeable parameter sets

Up to four different parameter sets can be created, for instance, to process
different materials with a machine or if different operating states (set-up operation,
stand-by, etc.) require different parameter sets.
Programming of parameter sets

Follow these steps to program several parmeter sets:
( Enter all setting required for your application.
( Select code C003 and store your parameter set
e. g. under -1- (parameter set 1).
( Enter all settings required for another application
(e. g. different material).
( Select code C003 and store this parameter set
e. g. under -2- (parameter set 2) etc.
C003¤ Store 1 -1- Parameter set 1
parameter -2- Parameter set 2
set -3- Parameter set 3
-4- Parameter set 4
Note!
If the function “Load parameter set” is assigned to a digital input, the controller
evaluates the signal assigned to the input terminal.
Depending on the polarity, which is required for the activation of the input, selected
under C114, the assignment of the new function may start the loading of a
parameter set (RDY LED is off for approx. 1s).
Parameter changes carries out before and not stored under C003 are lost.
Parameter setting via keypad or LECOM interface:

1. For loading a parameter set under C114, select the polarity of the input
such that the input is deactivated during point 2..
2. Assign function “Load parameter set”
3. Store parameter set under C003
For parameter transfer to the drive via LECOM interface ensure, that the parameter
which selects the input polarity (C114)is set before the function assignment (C113)
is transmitted.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-57
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
The transfer of all parameter in rising sequence of code numbers is only possible
if
- the parameter used to determie the input polarity is not be changed and
- the signal at the digital input does not lead to immediate activation of the
function.
Load parameter set
Danger!
If the controller is not inhibited through control terminal 28, the drive can start
operation when changing the parameter sets.
After mains switching, parameter set 1 is loaded automatically. If the parameter

sets are to be changed via the digital inputs, at least one input of each parameter
set must be assigned to ”Select parameter set” and, if necessary, one input with
”Load parameter set”.
The number of inputs to be assigned with the function ”Select parameter set”
depends on the number of parameter sets to be changed.
Number of additionally required parameter sets Number of inputs required
1 at least 1
2...3 2
A maximum of two inputs can be assigned to this function. For input assignment,
see the notes in chapter 7.1.5.3.
The input with the lowest figure is the first input, the input with the next higher
number is the second input (e. g. E1 = 1st input, E2 = 2nd input).
Terminal assignment for selection of different parameter sets:
1. input 2. input
Parameter set 1 0 0
Parameter set 2 1 0
Parameter set 3 0 1
Parameter set 4 1 1
Loading of a parameter set is started if:

( another than parameter set 1 is selected when switching on the mains with
the function ”select parameter set”.
( the input ”load parameter set” is activated when the controller is inhibited
and after control of the corresponding inputs for the selection of the
required parameter sets.
The input ”load parameter set” is signal triggered. If all parameters are loaded,
C002 indicates the loaded parameter set.
7-58 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
When the function ”load parameter set” is activated, the controller cannot react on
any other signal for approx. 1 second. Therefore, the ”Ready message” (RDY) at
terminal 44 will not be displayed for the time the controller cannot react on control
signals (e.g. controller enable).
For control and parameter setting via the keypad or LECOM interfaces, a
parameter set can be loaded via C002. Here, also default setting is available.
[C002] Load 0 -0- Factory setting Parameter set 1 is automatically loaded
parameter -1- Parameter set 1 after mains connection. If another
set -2- Parameter set 2 parameter set is selected via terminal, the
-3- Parameter set 3 selected parameter set will be loaded
additionally.
-4- Parameter set 4
Default setting: Parameter set 2 for dancer position control

As application support, a parameter set for dancer position control at an unwinder
with diameter precontrol is stored in parameter set 2 in default setting. This
parameter set is meant as example for the adaptation to your application.
Changes compared with parameter set 1, default setting
Code Parameter Meaning
C000 -2- Expanded code set
C005 -11- Speed control with tacho feedback
C145 -4- Select terminal 8
C146 -15- Assign arithmetic block input 1 to terminal 8
C145 -3- Select terminal 6
C146 -16- Assign arithmetic block input 2 to terminal 6
C145 -10- Select arithmetic block 2 output
C146 -1- Assign arithmetic block 2 output main set-value to C046
C145 -9- Select process controller output
C146 -3- Assign additional set-value C049 to process controller output
C145 -1- Select terminal 1,2
C146 -7- Assign actual process controller value to terminal 1,2
C112 -3- Select digital terminal E3
C113 -32- Assign E3 to the process controller suppression
C112 -5- Select digital terminal E5
C113 -31- Assign E5 to suppress the I component of the process
controller
C191 -4- Arithmetic block 2: input1 / input2
Proceed as follows to activate this parameter set:

( C002 = -2-, load parameter set 2
( C003 = -1-, store under parameter set 1
After the adaptation and optimisation of the parameters, store the parameter set
with C003.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-59
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.4.3 4Q / 2Q changeover
Purpose
With a change to 2Q, the armature voltage VA can be set to 1.15 ¼ Vrated instead of
1.05 ¼ Vrated in 4Q operation.The direction of rotation cannot be changed through
the controller (if necessary, consider the change of the direction of rotation through
active loads).
The changeover is carried out through code C180 of the extended code set when
the controller is inhibited.
With the changeover:
( all set-value paths remain the same.
( the current limit C023 is internally set to 0. It is still possible to enter external
values.
( only bridge 1 is active (motor terminal A is positive).
( the deceleration ramp C105 remains effective at QSP. However, no energy
is fed back to the mains, i.e. the motor is coasting to standstill if the
deceleration times are very short.
Stop!
With 48XX controller, the mode 4Q must not be selected. If the controllers
4808...4813 are set to 4Q operation, the fuses may blow.
I m a x
n s e t
C 0 2 2
n - c o n tr o lle r
+
n a c t
-
C 0 2 3 = 0
4900Str047
FIG 7-20 Signal-flow chart (section) for 2Q operation
7-60 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.4.4 Standstill excitation (field heating)

Purpose
With this function, a reduced field current can be set as field heating to avoid
condensation in the event of motor standstill.
C 0 8 3
I F r C 1 8 7
I F s e t
I F - c o n tr o lle r
F ie ld c u r r e n t
s e tp o in t
-
C 2 3 1
I F m in C 1 8 8
C 3 1 6
IF a c t
re d u c e d
C 3 1 7 fie ld c u r r e n t
R F R 0 t
C tr l. in h ib it &
D e la y
C 3 1 8
A c tiv a tio n
fie ld c u r r e n t r e d u c tio n 4900Str048
FIG 7-21 Standstill excitation

C316* Reduced 20 % 0 % IFrated {1 % IFrated } 100 % IFrated Reference: IFrated(C083)
field current With selection 0%, the ignition pulses of
the field controller are inhibited.
C317* Time delay 60 s 0.0 s {0.1 s} 10 s Time which is required to activate the
for the 10 s {1 s} 100 s reduced field current after inhibiting the
reduced 100 s {10 s} 3600 s controller.
field current
C318* Activate 0 -0- Field current reduction function is switched off
field current -1- Field current reduction function is switched on
reduction
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-61
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.4.5 Control of a holding brake

Purpose
Control singal for holding brakes in:
( hoists
( travelling drives
( active loads
C019* Threshold 50 rpm 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm If the acutal speed falls below the
nact = 0 threshold, the corresponding output will be
activated.
C195* Delay 9999 s 0.00s {0.01 s} 1s Delay between signal ’engage brake’ and
between 1s {0.1s} 10s automatic controller inhibit
’engage 10s {1s} 250s 9999 s:
brake’ and 9999 s Unlimited delay, controller will not be
controller inhibited.
inhibit
C196* Delay 0.00s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s Delay between reset of the quick stop
between 1s {0.1s} 10s function and enable of the main setpoint
’setpoint 10s {1s} 100s integrator
integrator 100s {10s} 250s
free’ and
quick stop
[C197*] Sign of the 0 -0- Sign is determined by the torque setpoint Sign of the torque selection between reset
torque -1- positive sign of QSP and enable of the setpoint
selection -2- negative sign integrators
C244* Threshold 10% 0 % IAmax {0.1% IAmax} +100 % IAmax IA > Ix

IA > Ix Reference, rated controller current
(armature)
C245* Threshold 10% 0 % IFmax {0.1% IFmax} +100 % IFmax IF > Ix ,
IF > Ix Reference, rated controller current (field)
C317* Time delay 60 s 0.0 s {0.1 s} 10 s Time which is required to activate the
for the 10 s {1 s} 100 s reduced field current after inhibiting the
reduced 100 s {10 s} 3600 s controller.
field current
C318*¤ Activate 0 -0- Field current reduction function is off
field current -1- Field current reduction function is switched on
reduction
The function for the control of a holding brake only makes sense with the
configurations C005 = -1X- and -5X-. The brake control is always derived from the
QSP function.
7-62 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Configuration C005 = -12-, -13- (digital actual value encoder)

The phase controller is overlayed under the following conditions:
- QSP function active
- V p of the phase controller (C254) higher 0
The I component of the speed controller must not be switched off via terminal or
code because otherwise the drive cannot generate the required torque.
Configuration C005 = -10-, -11- (analog actual value controller)
The phase controller is usually not activated. If the value falls below the nact= 0
threshold (C019), the I component of the speed controller will be switched off.
Otherwise the drive would add a torque to the engaged brake because of the offset
values always available in analog systems.
Configuration C005 = -5X-
The phase controller is always active (if C254 > 0). A digital phase set-value is
generated from the analog set-value. The drive operates phase controlled.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-63
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.4.5.1 Engage brake

The setting of QSP activates the function for the control of a holding brake. The
speed set-value of the drive follows the deceleration ramp of QSP (C105) until
reaching speed 0.
If the actual speed falls below the threshold C019, the control signal for the holding
brake will be activated. At the same time, a time element is activated and after the
time set under C195, the controller will be inhibited. This delay ensures that the
drive provides a holding torque until the brake is reliably activated. Under C318 the
field current can be reduced after the time set under C317.
IM P H o ld in g b r a k e
Q u ic k s to p
Q S P ( T r ip ) e n g a g e d
> 1 F D O
&
T h r e s h o ld B ra k e e n g a g e m e n t
C 0 1 9 tim e C 1 9 5
n a c t S e t c o n tr o lle r
in h ib it
C 0 5 1
4900Str049
FIG 7-22 Block diagram ’Engage brake’
Q S P
n
a c t
T h r e s h o ld C 0 1 9 n a c t= 0
t
B ra k e
e n g a g e d
t
B ra k e e n g a g e m e n t
tim e C 1 9 5
C tr l.
in h ib it
t
T im e d e la y
F ie ld c u r r e n t C 3 1 7
r e d u c tio n
C 3 1 8
t
4900Str050
FIG 7-23 Time diagram ’Engage brake’
7-64 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.4.5.2 Open brake (release)

CW/CCW enable deactivates the internal controller inhibit immediately. At the
same time, the field current reduction is reset. If the field current threshold (C245)
is exceeded, the controller generates a torque or holding torque against the brake.
The drive provides the load torque while the brake is releasing. In phase-controlled
operation the holding torque is generated through the I-component of the speed
controller when a phase failure occurs. If the phase controller is not active (C005
= -10-, -11-) the holding torque is determined under C244.
CW/CCW enable activates a time element. After the time set under C196, the
set-value integrator is enables and the torque is determined by the speed controller
again.
Note!
The function “release brake” is interrupted, if the speed exceeds the value set
under C019. The controller immediately starts speed or phase controlled
operation.
C W /C C W e n a b le
T h r e s h o ld
C 2 4 4
IA
T h r e s h o ld
C 2 4 5
R e le a s e h o ld in g b r a k e
IF & F D O
IM P
( T r ip )
4900Str051
FIG 7-24 Block diagram ’Release brake’
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-65
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
C W /C C W
t
C tr l. e n a b le
F ie ld c u r r e n t
IF > Ix
T h r e s h o ld
C 2 4 5
t
H o ld in g to r q u e T h r e s h o ld
A rm a tu re c u rre n t C 2 4 4
IA > I x
B ra k e
e n g a g e d r e le a s e d
t
B r a k e d is e n g a g e m e n t
n s e t tim e C 1 9 6
t
4900Str052
FIG 7-25 Time diagram ’Release brake’
7-66 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5 Additional function blocks
7.5.1 Process controller
Description
The process controller is designed as independent function block and is a PID
controller with a cycle time of 12 ms.
It can for instance be used as superimposed controller (dancer position control,
tension control, etc.).
E v a lu a tio n
S e t
O u tp u t
A c t.
D e a c tiv a tio n S u p p r e s s io n
p r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r p r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r
I-c o m p o n e n t
s w itc h -o ff 4900Str053
FIG 7-26 Process controller
Features
( P adaptation possible via an internal function (derived from set-value) or
external analog signal source; enable adaptation with C329 = -1-
( Ramp function generator in set-value channel
( Overlay of process controller output over ramp function generator
( Intregral action component to be switched-off via freely assignable digital
terminal (I component = 0)
( Deactivation of the process controller via freely assignable digitale terminal (I
component = 0, output = 0)
( Suppression of the process controller output via freely assignable digital
terminal (output = 0 after time C335)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-67
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
C h a n g e o v e r
E x te r n a l V p s e ttin g
to a d a p ta tio n
T e rm . 1 ,2
T e rm . 3 ,4 C 3 2 9
T e rm . 6 C 2 2 2
T e rm . 8 V p
V p (C 2 2 2 )
M o to r p o t. o u tp u t
V p 2 (C 3 2 5 )
A r ith m e tic b lo c k o u tp u t 1
D ig . fre q u e n c y o u tp u t
V p 0 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
V p (C 2 2 2 ) C h a n g e o v e r fo r
V p 2 (C 3 2 5 ) e x te r n a l V p in p u t
V p 3 (C 3 2 6 )
s e t1 s e t2
C 3 2 8 C 3 2 7 P r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r o u tp u t
P ro c e s s c o n tr o lle r s e tp o in t C 2 2 3 C 2 2 4 ± 1 6 3 8 4
C 3 3 0 T n T v V p M o n ito r o u tp u ts
T e rm . 1 ,2 R F G E v a lu a tio n C 0 4 6
T e rm . 3 ,4 C 0 4 7
T e rm . 6 -1 0 0 % ...+ 1 0 0 % C 0 4 9
T e rm . 8 F ie ld c u r r e n t s e tp o in t
M o to r p o t. o u tp u t - A r ith m e tic b lo c k s
A r ith m e tic b lo c k o u tp u t C 3 3 2 T ir A /D c o n v . C 2 7 0 , C 2 7 1
D ig . fr e q u e n c y o u tp u t C 3 3 3 T if
I-c o m p o n e n t P ro c e s s c o n tr o lle r
c a n b e c a n b e s w itc h e d -
s w itc h e d -o ff o ff e x te r n a lly
A c t. p r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r v a lu e e x te r n a lly v ia v ia F D I
T e rm . 1 ,2 F D I
T e rm . 3 ,4
T e rm . 6
T e rm . 8
A r ith m e tic b lo c k o u tp u t
D ig . fre q u e n c y o u tp u t
E v a lu a tio n -1 0 0 .0 ... + 1 0 0 .0 %
C 3 3 1
T e rm . 1 ,2 R F G
T e rm . 3 ,4 S u p p r e s s io n
T e rm . 6 v ia F D I
T e rm . 8
A r ith m e tic b lo c k o u tp u t C 3 3 4 T ir
D ig . fr e q u e n c y o u tp u t C 3 3 5 T if
4900Str054
FIG 7-27 General signal structure of the process controller
Process controller inputs

1. Analog inputs
With the function ”freely assignable analog inputs” (C145...C147) the process
controller inputs ”set”, ”act.” and ”evaluation” can be assigned to other signal
sources (see table C145).
The inputs ”set” and ”evaluation” have their own codes (C330 and C331) and can
be parmaterised via keypad or interface. The setting via these codes is however
only possible if these no signal inputs are assigned to these codes.
The inputs ”set” and ”act.” represent the set-value and the actual value of the PID
controller.They are adjustable up to á100%.
With the input ”evaluation”, the controller output can be weakened or inverted.
Values up to á100% are adjustable. With the evaluation 100%, all process
controller influence is effective.
The inputs ”set” and ”evaluation” are connected to their own ramp function
generator before being processed any further. Acceleration and deceleration times
can be set separately (C332 to C335).
7-68 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
2. Digital inputs
The digital inputs of the process controller ”Deactivate process controller”,
”Switch-off I component” and ”Evaluation = 0” can be assigned to the FDIs 1 to
5.
The process controller is reset via the input ”Deactivate process controller”, i.e. the
output jumps to zero and the I component is reset.
The input ”Switch off I component” sets the I component of the controller to zero.
The input ”evaluation = 0” suppresses the process controller output.
Process controller outputs

With the function ”freely assignable analog inputs” (C145 ... C147)the ouput of the
process controller can be assigned to different targets (see table C146).
Note!
The output of the process controller cannot be directly assigned to the n controller
adaptation. If this should be required, another function block can be connected in
between (e.g. limitation element).
Example:
C145 = -9- Select process controller output
C146 = -23- Assign limitation element 1
C145 = -19- Select limitation element 1 output 1
C146 = -4- Assign n controller adaptation
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-69
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.2 Arithmetic blocks

Purpose
With the arithmetic blocks two different signals can be arithmetically connected to
meet different application requirements.
Parameter setting
C 1 9 1
A r ith m e tic s e le c tio n
C 3 3 9 C 3 3 8
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 ± 2 0 0 %
In p u t 1 + · C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 O u tp u t 1
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 - /
In p u t 2 1 0 0 %
E 1
- E 2 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
O u tp u t 2
O p e n e d
d u r in g d iv is io n 4900Str055
FIG 7-28 Arithmetic block 2
C 6 0 0
A r ith m e tic s e le c tio n
C 6 0 2 C 6 0 1
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 ± 2 0 0 %
In p u t 1 + · C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 - / O u tp u t 1
In p u t 2 1 0 0 %
E 1
- E 2 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
O u tp u t 2
O p e n e d
d u r in g d iv is io n 4900Str056
FIG 7-29 Arithmetic block 3
1. Inputs
With the function ”freely assignable analog inputs” each input can be assigned to
a ”terminal signal” from the table in C145. If signals are assigned to the inputs, the
input codes are for display only. If the inputs are not assigned, constant values can
be assigned via the input codes. These values can also be save via C003.
2. Outputs
With the function ”freely assignable analog inputs” (see code C146), arithmetic
block outputs (signal sources) can be assigned to certain targets. If the arithmetic
block is assigned to another input or code, the access to this code via keypad or
interface is no longer enabled.
The output signal is limited to max. 200%.
The arithmetic blocks can also be output via the monitor output as analog voltage.
7-70 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Example
The analog inputs terminal 8 and terminal 6 are to be connected (division) via the
arithmetic block 2 and then be assigned to the code C046 ”main set-value”.
Procedure
( Select C145 = -4-, terminal 8
( Assign C146 = -14-, arithmetic block 2 input 1
( Select C145 = -3-, terminal 6
( Assign C146 = -15-, arithmetic block 2 input 2
( Select C145 = -10-, arithmetic block 2
( Assign C146 = -1-, main set-value (C046)
( C191 = -4-, division: select input 1 / input 2 (C338 / C339).
3. Functions
For all arithmetic blocks the following functions can be preselected (example for
arithmetic block 2):
with C191 = -0-, output = C338 (C339 not processed)
with C191 = -1-, output = C338 + C339
100% = 50% + 50%
with C191 = -2-, output = C338 - C339
50% = 100% - 50%
with C191 = -3-, output = C338 : C339
100% = 100% : 100%
with C191 = -4-, output = C338 / |C339|
1% = 100% / 100%
with C191 = -5-, output = C338 / (100% - C339)
200% = 100% / (100% - 50%)
Arithmetic block 1 (fixed)
C190*¤ Arithmetic 1 -0- Output = C046
block 1 -1- Output = C046 + C049
-2- Output = C046 - C049
-3- Output = C046 ¼ C049
-4- Output = C046 / |C049|
-5- Output = C046 / (100% - C049)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-71
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Arithmetic block 2
-2- Output = C338 - C339
-3- Output = C338 ¼ C339
-4- Output = C338 / |C339|
-5- Output = C338 / (100% - C339)
C338* Input 1, 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % If an analog signal source (C145/C146) is
Arithmetic -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
block 2 only.
C339* Input 2, 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % If an analog signal source (C145 / C146) is
Arithmetic -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
block 2 only.
Arithmetic block 3
-2- Output = C601 - C602
-3- Output = C601 ¼ C602
-4- Output = C601 / |C602|
-5- Output = C601 / (100% - C602)
arithmetic -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
block 3 only.
arithmetic -200 % {1%} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
block 3 only.
7-72 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.3 Motor potentiometer

Purpose
The motor potentiometer serves as alternative set-value source which can be
controlled with 2 keys.
N o in p u t
M o to r C 0 4 6 m a in s e tp o in t
p o te n tio - C 0 4 7 to r q u e s e tp o in t
m e te r
...
A c c e le r a tio n D e c e le r a tio n
d e a c tiv a te 4900Str057
FIG 7-30 Motor potentiometer
The motor potentiometer is a function unit which can be assigned to different

inputs.
With the function ”freely assignable analog inputs” the motor potentiometer output
can be assigned to the targets listed under C146.
Note!
The output of the motor potentiometer cannot be directly assigned to the field
current set-value selection. If this should be required, another function block can
be connected in between (e.g. limitation element).
Example :
C145 = -8- Select motor potentiometer output
C146 = -23- Assign limitation element 1
C145 = -19- Select limitation element 1 output 1
C146 = -5- Assign field-current set-value
The signal resolution is [14 bit] (-16384 ... +16384), except for the targets
C146 = -10- C027 of digital input X5
C146 = -11- C027 of digital input X9
C146 = -12- gearbox factor C032
C146 = -13- phase trimming C256
the controller works with a resolution of [15 bit-1] (-32767 ... +32767)
As soon as the motor potentiometer is assigned to an input or a code, the direct
access to this codes is no longer possible.
The motor potentiometer output can also be output as analog voltage via the
monitor output.
The output value of the motor potentiometer is displayed under the code (e.g.
C046, C047)assigned to the motor potentiometer. The functions ctrl. inhibit, TRIP
and QSP have no influence on the motor potentiometer because it is an
independent block.
After motor potentiometer activation all other control functions remain active.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-73
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
If the motor potentiometer acts on the main set-value C046, QSP, the ramp
function generator of the main set-value, JOG enable and CW/CCW changeover
have priority.
7.5.3.1 Control of the motor potentiometer

- If the terminal signal ”acceleration” is active, the ramp function generator
(RFG) accelerates to its upper limit value (C260).
- If the terminal signal ”deceleration” is active, the RFG decelerates to its
lower limit value (C261).
- The existing RFG content remains the same as long as none of the signals
is active.
Upper limit value (C260)

1
1 2
Lower limit value (C261)
Acceleration
Deceleration
4900Str058
FIG 7-31 Signal flow at the motor potentiometer output
¥ Acceleration ramp depends on acceleration time C262

¦ Deceleration ramp depends on deceleration time C263
In addition to the two input terminals ”acceleration” and ”deceleration” there is

another terminal which enables the activation and deactivation of the motor
potentiometer.
If the motor potentiometer is activated, the output accepts the signal value
assigned to be input before. If the signal value is not withing the motor
potentiometer limit, it will be reduces to the corresponding limit value (depending
on the acceleration and deceleration time).
If the motor potentiometer is deactivated, its output reacts as selected under
C264.
-0- No further action, value is stored
-1- The motor potentiometer decelerates or accelerates to 0%.
-2- The motor potentiometer decelerates or accelerates to the lower limit value (C261).
-3- The motor potentiometer immediately changed its output to 0% (important for the emergency-switch-off
function)
-4- The motor potentiometer immediately changes its output to the lower limit value (C261).
-5- The motor potentiometer decelerates or accelerates to the upper limit value (C260).
7-74 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Initialisation
When switching off the mains, the output value of the motor potentiometer is
stored in the EEPROM. Select under code C265 whether the motor potentiometer
accepts the stored value or the lower limit value when starting after mains
connection.
The EEPROM is designed for a minimum of 40.000 mains connection cycles.
7.5.3.2 Memory function of the motor potentiometer (S&H)

Purpose
The memory function of the motor potentiometer (sample and hold, S&H) can be
reassigned to a freely assignable analog input (FAI). It is thus possible to store a
signal stored under C145 when switching the mains.
Note:
Note!
For this function, the deactivation and the initialisation function of the motor
potentiometer is used, i.e. the motor potentiometer can no longer be used when
switching to a FAI signal.
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
In p u t F D I
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
T ir T if
1
C 2 6 2 C 2 6 3 S & H M o to r p o te n tio m e te r
0 o u tp u t
C 2 6 6 C 2 6 0
C 2 6 4 C 2 6 5
F D I C 2 6 1
C 2 6 7
C 2 6 4 C 2 6 5 4900Str059
FIG 7-32 Motor potentiometer with S&H function
With the function ”Deactivate motor potentiometer” via FDI (C113) the hold
function is activated. A change of the input value does not influence the output any
longer. When switching the mains, the value stored last is transferred to the
EEPROM and is available when switching on the mains again.
The initialisation function is however dependent on the codes C264 and C265.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-75
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C260* Upper motor 100% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % C260 must be higher than C261!
potentiometer
limit
C261* Lower motor 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % C261 must be smaller than C260!
potentiometer
limit
C262* Motor 10 s 1s {1 s} 5000 s C262 is activated if the motor
potentiometer potentiometer terminal is set to ”UP”
acceleration Ref.: Change from 0...100%
time
C263* Motor 10 s 1s {1 s} 5000 s C263 is activated if the motor
potentiometer potentiometer terminal is set to ”DOWN”
deceleration Ref.: Change from 0...100%
time
C264*¤ Motor 0 -0- No function, motor potentiometer is not Function, which is executed when
potentiometer changed. deactivating the motor potentiometer
deactivation -1- Down to 0%, motor potentiometer output (terminal DEACTIVE is set).
function runs with the corresponding acceleration or
deceleration time to 0%.
-2- Down to lowest limit, motor potentiometer
output runs with the corresponding
acceleration or deceleration time to the value
under C261.
-3- Jump to 0%, motor potentiometer output
immediately changes to 0%.
-4- Jump to the lowest level, motor potentiometer
immediately changes to the value indicated
under C261.
-5- Up to the highest level, motor potentiometer
acceleration or deceleration to the value
indicated under C260.
C265*¤ Initialisation 0 -0- Acceptance of the saved value S&H output Function which is executed when
function accepts the value which was set before switching on the mains.
Sample & switching the mains.
Hold -1- Lower limit, S&H output accepts the value of
C261.
C266* Motor 100 % {0.1 %} +100 % Under C266 the motor potentiometer can
potentiometer: also be operated with Vand W
Operation via Display: Output value of the motor
keypad potentiometer in % and exact control
program value.
C267*¤ Sample and 0 -0- S&H for motor potentiometer output
Hold function -1- S&H für FAI signal
7-76 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.4 Fixed set-value

Purpose
The function block ”fixed set-values” is used to program a maximum of 15 fixed
setpoints and to call them via digital terminals or control codes.
These fixed setpoints can be used e.g. for:
( Different dancer set positions when a dancer position control is used or
( Different stretch conditions (gearbox factor) when a speed ratio control with
digital frequency coupling is used.
Function
”Fixed set-values” are independent function blocks. Their outputs can be used as
set-value source for other function blocks (e.g. process controller, arithmetic
block, ...). The parameter setting is the same as for the JOG values. The function
block provides another freely assignable analog input (FAI), which is assigned to
the output if none of the 15 fixed set-values is selected via C194 or the control word
includes a 0.
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 9 4
In p u t F A I
F ix e d s e tp o in t 1
F ix e d s e tp o in t 2 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
F ix e d s e tp o in t 3 O u tp u t
F ix e d s e tp o in t 1 5
C 1 1 2 /C 1 1 3
C 1 9 2 C 1 9 3 F r e e ly a s s ig n a b le
F ix e d s e tp o in t F ix e d s e tp o in t d ig . in p u ts
s e le c tio n in p u t
E .. E .. E ..
F ix e d s e tp o in t
e n a b le 4900Str060
FIG 7-33 Fixed set-values
Parameter setting of the fixed setpoints

Similar to the JOG values, the parameters are set via 2 codes.
( Select the fixed set-value to be parameterised under C192
( Change or set the value under C193
The fixed set-values are selected and parameterised via the keypad or the LECOM
interface.
Output of the selected fixed setpoint
The output of the fixed set-values depends on the parameter under C194, the
control word. Via this code always a on fixed set-value is assigned to the output.
This code is controlled via keypad, LECOM or freely assignable digital inputs
(operating mode C001). The function block output is assigned under codes
C145/C146.
Normalisation
The values for the fixed set-value range between -100% and +100%.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-77
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.5 Absolute value generator

Purpose
Bipolar signals can be converted into unipolar signals.
Parameter setting
C 6 6 0
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
In p u t O u tp u t 1
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
O u tp u t 2
4900Str061
FIG 7-34 Absolute value generator
1. Input
a ”terminal signal” from the table in C145.
2. Outputs
With the function ”freely assignable analog inputs” the outputs can be assigned to
the targets listed under C146.
3. Function
The absolute value of the input signal is generated.
C660* Input, 0 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
absolute -200 % {1 %} +200 %
value
generator
7-78 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.6 Limitation elements

Purpose
The controller provides two limitation elements. With these function blocks signals
can be limited to adjustable value ranges.
Parameter setting
C 6 3 1 C 6 3 0
C 6 3 2
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
O u tp u t 2
4900Str062
FIG 7-35 Limitation element 1
C 6 3 1 C 6 3 0
C 6 3 2
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
O u tp u t 2
4900Str062
FIG 7-36 Limitation element 2
1. Input
2. Outputs
3. Function
The function is an override function. If the input signal exceeds the upper limit
(C630 or C635), the upper limit is effective. If the input signal falls below the lower
limit (C631 or 636), the lower limit is effective.
C630* LE 1 upper 100 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % C630 must be higher than C631!
limit -200 % {1 %} +200 %
C631* LE 1 lower -100 -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % C631 must be smaller than C630!
limit % -200 % {1 %} +200 %
C632* Input, LE 1 0 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
-200 % {1 %} +200 %
C635* LE 2 upper 100 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % C635 must be higher than C636!
limit -200 % {1 %} +200 %
C636* LE 2 lower -100 -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % C636 must be smaller than C635!
limit % -200 % {1 %} +200 %
C637* Input, LE 2 0 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
-200 % {1 %} +200 %
Abbreviation: LE = Limitation element
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-79
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.7 PT1 element

Purpose
Signals can be filtered with this function block.
Parameter setting
C 6 4 0
C 6 4 1
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
O u tp u t 2
4900Str064
FIG 7-37 1st order delay element (PT1 element)
1. Input
2. Outputs
3. Function
The delay time T is set under C640. The proportional coefficient is determined as
K = 1.
K=1
T t
4900Str065
FIG 7-38 Transfer characteristic of the PT1 element

C640* PT1 20.00s 0.01 s {0.01 s} 1s
element 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
Time 10 s {1 s} 50 s
constant
C641* Input, 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
PT1 -200 % {1 %} +200 %
element
7-80 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.8 Addition
Purpose
The controller provides two addition facilities with three inputs each. Here, analog
signals can be added or subtracted.
Parameter setting
C 6 1 0
± 2 0 0 %
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 + + C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
In p u t 1 O u tp u t 1
C 6 1 1 + -
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 O u tp u t 2
In p u t 2
C 6 1 2
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
In p u t 3 4900Str066
FIG 7-39 Addition 1
C 6 1 4
± 2 0 0 %
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 + + C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
In p u t 1 O u tp u t 1
C 6 1 5 + -
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 O u tp u t 2
In p u t 2
C 6 1 6
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
In p u t 3 4900Str067
FIG 7-40 Addition 2
1. Input
a ”terminal signal” from the table in C145. If signals are assigned to the inputs, the
input codes are for display only. If the inputs are not assigned, constant values can
be assigned via the input codes. These values can also be stored via C003.
2. Outputs
3. Function
Input 1 is added to input 2. Input 3 is subtracted from the calculated result. Then,
the value is limited to 200%.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-81
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Addition 1:
addition -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
block 1 only.
block 1 only.
block 1 only.
Addition 2:
block 2 only.
block 2 only.
C616* Input 3, 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % If an analog signal soucre (C145 / C146) is
block 2 only.
7-82 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.9 Square-wave generator

Purpose
The square-wave generator accepts jump responses from the control circuits.
Parameter setting
C 6 7 0 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
1
0
C 6 7 1
0 t
C 6 7 2
0 t
4900Str068
FIG 7-41 Square-wave generator
1. Input
The amplitude is set under C670 (upper value) and C671 (lower value).
2. Outputs
With the function ”freely assignable analog inputs” the output can be assigned to
3. Function
The transfer time is set under code C672. The period results from T = 2 ¼ C672.
C 6 7 0
C 6 7 1
C 6 7 2
T
4900Str069
FIG 7-42 Signal flow at the square-wave generator

C670* Square-wave 0 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % C670 must be higher than C671!
generator
upper limit
C671* Square-wave 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % C671 must be smaller than C670!
generator
lower limit
C672* Switch-over 0.1 s 0.1 s {0.1 s} 10 s
time of the 10 s {1 s} 100 s
square-wave 100 s {10 s} 3000 s
generator
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-83
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.10 Dead-band element

Purpose
The dead-band element is used to set interferences around the zero point (e.g.
interference on analog input voltages) to digital zero.
Parameter setting
C 6 2 0 C 6 2 1
C 6 2 2
± 2 0 0 %
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
O u tp u t 2
4900Str070
FIG 7-43 Dead-band element
1. Input
2. Outputs
The output signal is limited to max. 200%.
3. Function
O u tp u t
C 6 2 0
In p u t
C 6 2 1
4900Str071
FIG 7-44 Characteristic for the dead-band element
Code C621 determines the dead band. The gain is set under code C620. The
function is symmetrical to the zero position.
C620* Gain dead 1.00 -10.00 {0.01} +10.00
band
element
C621* Dead band, 1.0 % 0.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 %
dead band
element
C622* Input, dead 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
band -200 % {1 %} +200 %
element
7-84 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.11 DT1 element

Purpose
The DT1 element is to differentiate signals.
It can, for instance, be used for acceleration compensation (dv/dt).
Parameter setting
C 6 5 3 C 6 5 0 C 6 5 1
C 6 5 2
± 2 0 0 %
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
O u tp u t 2 4900Str072
FIG 7-45 1st order derivative element (DT1 element)
1. Input
2. Outputs
the targets listed under C146. The same signal is assigned to both outputs. The
output signal is limited to max. 200%.
3. Function
The gain K is set under code C650, the delay time Tv is set under C651. The input
sensitivity of the DT1 element can be reduced under C653, i.e. according to the
settings, only the high-value bits indicated are evaluated.
K
T v t 4900Str073
FIG 7-46 Transfer characteristic of the DT1 element

C650* Gain 1.00 -10.00 {0.01} +10.00
C651* Time 1.0 s 0.01 s {0.01 s} 1.00 s
constant 1.0 s {0.1 s} 5.0 s
C652* Input 0 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
-200 % {1 %} +200 %
C653* Input -1- 15 bit evaluation
sensitivity -2- 14 bit evaluation
-3- 13 bit evaluation
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-85
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.5.12 Freely assignable comparator

The freely assignable comparators generate a digital output signal which depends
on the analog input signals.
C 5 8 4
R e s e t
C 5 8 1 C 5 8 2 C 5 8 3
R
In p u t 2 1
C 5 8 0 S d ig ita l o u tp u t
0
In p u t 1 a n a lo g o u tp u t
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
4900Str074
FIG 7-47 Comparator 1
C 5 9 4
R e s e t
C 5 9 1 C 5 9 2 C 5 9 3
R
In p u t 2 1
C 5 9 0 S d ig ita l o u tp u t
0
In p u t 1 a n a lo g o u tp u t
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
4900Str075
FIG 7-48 Comparator 2
Inputs:
With the function ”freely assignable inputs” each analog input of the comparator
can be assigned to a ”terminal signal” from the table according to C145. The input
values are compared in the range of 200 %.
With the function ”freely programmable digital inputs”, the reset input can be
connected with a signal source according to the table under code C112.
”Analog” output:
With the function ”freely assignable inputs” the inputs C580 for comparator 1 and
C590 for comparator 2 can be used for further processing tasks. It is possible, for
example, to compare the signal at the analog input terminal 8 with a limit value and
provide the main set-value.
”Digital” output:
With the function ”freely assignable digital outputs”, the result of the comparator
can be assigned to an output according to the table under C116.
7-86 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
2 0 0 %
H y s te r e s is C o m p a ra to r
in p u t 1
C o m p a ra to r
in p u t 2
-2 0 0 %
t
R e s e t
s ig n a l
t
O u tp u t
F ilin g
s ig n a l
d e a c tiv a te d
h ig h - a c tiv e
t
O u tp u t
F ilin g
s ig n a l
a c tiv a te d
h ig h - a c tiv e
t
4900Str076
FIG 7-49 Output signal depending on the input signals of the freely assignable comparator
Under codes C582 and C592 the hysteresis can be changed withing the range of
0...100 %. The hysteresis refers to the signal at input 2 of the comparator.
If the lower threshold (value of the upper threshold according to input 2 minus value
of the hysteresis) is $ -200 %, the comparator output can be reset via the reset
function.
If the memory function is activated under codes C583 and C593, the comparator
sets the digital ouput when switching for the first time. The digital output can only
be reset using the reset function.
For the time, the reset signal is active, the comparator resets the digital output
independently of the memory function.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-87
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C580* Input 1, 0 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % If an analog signal source (C145/C146) is
Comparator 1 -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
only.
Limit value -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
for only.
comparator 1
C582* Hysteresis for 0% 0% {0.1 %} +100 % Lower threshold = C581 - C582,
lower reference: C581
threshold
Comparator 1
C583*¤ Memory -0- Memory function not active
function The output is reset when the value falls below
Comparator 1 the lower threshold (C581 - C582)
-1- Memory function active
The output remains set after initial switch on.
C584*¤ Reset -0- Reset function not active The activation resets the output
function -1- Reset function active
Comparator 1
Comparator 2 -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
only.
Limit value -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
for only.
comparator 2
C592* Hysteresis for 0% 0% {0.1 %} +100 % Lower threshold = C591 - C592,
lower reference: C591
threshold
Comparator 2
function The output is reset when the value falls below
Comparator 2 the lower threshold (C591 - C592)
The output remains set after initial switch on.
C594*¤ Reset -0- Reset function not active The activation resets the output
function -1- Reset function active
Comparator 2
7-88 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.6 Additional control functions
7.6.1 Additional torque values
Stop!
The external torque limitation has an effect on the n controller input, not on the
sum of torque set-value signals.
n o ffs e t
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 n s e t a t n - c o n tr o lle r
C o n fig u r a tio n C 0 0 5 = - 1 x -
in % o f n m a x
T a c h o
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 0 5 0
3 +
4
± 1 8 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
M s e t in %
In c re m e n ta l 1 1 n a c t o f M m a x
e n c o d e r C 2 5 /C 2 6 C 2 7 C 2 8 C 0 5 1 n - c o n tr o lle r
E n c . 1 3 C 0 5 6
c o n s t. +
1 2
1 0 C 0 7 0 V p n
C 1 9 8 C 0 7 1 T n n
- C 0 7 2 K d n IF a c t
V A B
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
A r m a tu r e v o lta g e C 3 1 0
Ia c t C 2 3 2 C 3 1 1
1 0 0 % C 3 1 3
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 3 1 4
2 + + c u r r e n t lim ita tio n
1 -
I s o ll
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
0 V = n o to rq u e C 0 6 3
1 0 V = m a x . to rq u e C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 2 8 2 C 1 4 8
A d d itio n a l to r q u e s e tp o in t 1 I m a x
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 9 C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
A d d itio n a l to r q u e s e tp o in t 2
4900Str077
FIG 7-50 Signal-flow chart (section) for additional torque set-values
Purpose
The additional torque set-values can be used for friction compensation or
acceleration (dv/dt)
Parameter setting
1. Input
If signals are assigned to the inputs, the inputs codes are for display only. If the
terminal control is deactivated, the actual terminal value will be accepted for
operation.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-89
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
If the inputs are not assigned, constant values can be assigned via the input
codes. These values can also be stored in EEPROM via C003.
2. Function
The additional torque set-values have a summing influence on the n controller
output. The sum of these signals is limited to 100%.
C148 Additional 0 -100.0 % Mmax {0.1 %} +100.0 % Mmax Display only with terminal control. If the
torque -200 % Mmax {1%} +200 % Mmax terminal control is deactivated, the actual
value 1 terminal value will be accepted for
operation. In the armature setting range:
100 % Mmax correspond to 100 % Imax
(C022, C023)
C149 Additional 0 -100.0 % Mmax {0.1 %} +100.0 % Mmax Display only with terminal control. If the
torque -200 % Mmax {1%} +200 % Mmax terminal control is deactivated, the actual
value 2 terminal value will be accepted for
operation. In the armature setting range:
100 % Mmax correspond to 100 % Imax
(C022/C023)
7.6.2 Speed dependent armature current limitation
n o ffs e t
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 n s e t a t n - c o n tr o lle r
in % o f n m a x
T a c h o
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 0 5 0
3 +
4
± 1 8 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
C 0 0 5 C o n fig u r a tio n Q S P M s e t in %
In c re m e n ta l 4 1 n a c t
o f M
e n c o d e r C 2 5 /C 2 6 C 2 7 C 2 8 C 0 5 1 n - c o n tr o lle r m a x
E n c . 4 3 C 0 5 6
c o n s t.
+
4 2
4 0 C 0 7 0 V p n
C 1 9 8 C 0 7 1 T n n
- C 0 7 2 K d n I
V A B F a c t
a r m a tu r e v o lta g e C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
C 3 1 0
Ia c t C 2 3 2 C 3 1 1
1 0 0 % C 3 1 3
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 3 1 4
2 + + c u r r e n t lim ita tio n
1 - Is e t
0 V = n o to rq u e
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
C 0 6 3
1 0 V = m a x . to rq u e C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 2 8 2 C 1 4 8
A d d itio n a l to r q u e s e tp o in t 1 Im a x
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 9 C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
A d d itio n a l to r q u e s e tp o in t 2
4900Str078
FIG 7-51 Signal-flow chart (section) for speed-dependent armature current limitation
Purpose
If DC machines are drive with rated armature current in field weakening operation,
the segment voltage (at the armature) can reach impermissibly high values.
7-90 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Therefore, the current limitation must be reduced depending on the

compensation of the DC machine and the actual speed.
Imax
100%
(C022, C023)
Limit value 1
(C310)
Limit value 2
(C311) 0 n0 n1 n2 nact
(C312) (C313) (C314) 4900Str079
FIG 7-52 Parameter assignment to the speed-dependent armature current limitation
The speed-dependent current limitation acts on the current set-value C063

(reference Imax : C022, C023).
Linear characteristic
If the current limit is to be lowered linearly (depending on the machine used), the
speed at which the reduction is to begin is set under C313. The slope of the
characteristic is set under C311 and C314.
Non-linear characteristic
By means of a second section with linear slope, the non-linear characteristic can
be approximated with two vertex.
The speed at which the lowering of the current limit is to start can be set with the
parameter C312. The slope of the 1st section is set under codes C310 and C313.
The 2nd section is parameterised with codes C311 and C314.
Motor types
Usually, compensated machines require a current reduction as of approx. 1:3 field
weakening operation. Uncompensated machines require the reducation as of
1:1.2 field weakening operation. The current limitation is then to be lowered with
the function 1/n.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-91
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C310* Speed-dependent 100% 0.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Valid for speed under C313 C310
current limitation must be higher than C311!
Limit value 1
C311* Speed-dependent 100% 0.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Valid for speed under C314 C311
current limitation must be smaller than C310!
Limit value 2
C312* n0 3000 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm Actual speed threshold (activation of
Speed-dependent rpm current limitation), condition: n1 > n0
current limitation
C313* n1 4000 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm Actual speed threshold for limit value 1,
Speed-dependent rpm condition: n 2 > n1 > n0
current limitation
C314* n2 5000 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm Actual speed threshold for limit value 2,
Speed-dependent rpm condition: n2 > n1 > n0
current limitation
For more detailed information see the motor catalogue or contact the
manufacturer.
7-92 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.6.3 n controller adaptation
Purpose
The adaptation of the speed controller is to improve the control behaviour. It is
recommended for
( low speed set-values (start)
( set-value jumps from nx -> 0 (stop) without return and drives with high
inertias.
Adaptation via characteristic

l Input data:
V p V p1 = C070 (default setting = 8)
V p 1 (C 0 7 0 ) V p2 = C320 (default setting = 8)
V p3 = C321 (default setting = 8)
n0 = C323 (default setting = 50rpm)
n1 = C322 (default setting = 3000rpm)
V p 2
nset = C050 as absolute value
V p 3 l Display value
n 0 n 1 n s e t V pactual = C319
4900Str080
l Conditions
1.nset < n0 valid for Vp3
2.n0 <nset < n1 valid:
V p1 - V p 2
Vp = Vp2 + (n set - n 0 )
n1 - n 0
3.nset > n1 valid for Vp1 (C070)
FIG 7-53 Characteristic for internally derived n controller adaptation
The n controller adaptation is enable under C324 = -1-. The input of the n
controller adaptation must not be assigned with an analog signal (see C145 /
C146).
Adaptation via analog input terminal
l Input data:
V p1 = C070
V p
V p2 = C320
V p 1 (C 0 7 0 )
l Display value
V pactual=C319
l Conditions
1.if Vinput = 0, Vp2
V p 2 2.if Vinput < Vmax :
0 V m a x V in p u t Vp1 - Vp2
Vp = Vp 2 + . V input
4900Str081 Vmax
3.if Vinput Vmax , Vp1 (C070)
FIG 7-54 Characteristic for external selection of the n controller adaptation
The n controller adaptation is enable under C324 = -1-. The input of the n
controller adaptation must be assigned to an analog signal using C145 / C146.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-93
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.6.4 S-shaped ramp function generator characteristic

For the ramp generator of the main set-value you can select two different
characteristics under C134:
( linear characteristic for all accelerations which require a constant
acceleration
( S-shaped characteristic for all accelerations which require a shock-free
acceleration.
C012 Acceleration 0.00s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s Time refers to 0...nmax
time Tir for 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
main 10 s {1 s} 100 s
set-value 100 s {10 s} 990 s
C013 Deceleration 0.00s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s Time refers to 0...nmax
time Tif for 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
main 10 s {1 s} 100 s
set-value 100 s {10 s} 990 s
C131* Ramp 0 -0- Enable ramp function generator If ramp function generator STOP (main
function -1- Stop ramp function generator setpoint) is enabled via terminal, C131 is
generator for display only.
STOP
C132* Ramp 0 -0- Enable mains setpoint at RFG input
function -1- Ramp function generator input = 0
generator
input = 0
C134* Ramp 0 -0- Linear characteristic
function -1- S-shaped characteristic
generator
characteristic
C182* Ti time of the 20.0 s 0.01 s {0.01 s} 1s T i time for the S-shape ramp function
s-shaped 1s {0.1s} 10s generator of the main set-value
ramp function 10s {1s} 50s
generator
Depending on the operating mode, the functions RFG stop (C131) and ramp
function generator input = 0 (C132)can be controlled and used for other switching
via the keypad, LECOM interface or freely assignable digital input terminals.
Note!
With setting controller inhibit, the signal at the RFG output jumps to the value = 0.
If the controller is enabled again, the set-value at the RFG output accelerates from
the actual speed to the speed set-value.
7.6.5 Actual speed filter

The actual speed circuit is equipped with a PT1 filter which is activated under
C198. The filter can be used to reduce mechanical resonances. The filter should
only be used in configurations without superimposed phase control circuits.
(C254=0).
7-94 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

[C198*] Enable 0 -0- Filter not active
actual -1- Filter active
speed filter
C199* Time 10ms 8ms {1ms} 100ms
constant
act. speed
filter
Stop!
Another time constant in the speed control circuit can lead to instability of the
drive!
7.6.6 Excitation characteristic

In basic configuration, the DC controller uses an internally stored excitation
characteristic to detect armature current set-values and to adpat the control
parameters of the field current controller in field weakening operation.
The influence of the internal excitation characteristic can be switched off via code
C235. If this is the case, the further control process is based on operation with
rated excitation (Frated) i.e. neither the gain of the armature control circuit nor the
adaptation of the control parameters for the field current controller are adjusted.
The external selection of the excitation characteristic is possible by assigning an
analog signal source using codes C145/C146.
M s e t in %
o f M m a x
C 0 5 6
C 2 3 5
IF a c t 0
1
1 0 0 % (o ff)
In p u t
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
C h a n g e o v e r C 3 1 0 S p e e d
fo r e x t. e x c ita tio n C 3 1 1 d e p e n d e n t
c h a r a c te r is tic C 3 1 2 c u rre n t
C 3 1 3 lim ita tio n
C 3 1 4
IF - c o n tr o lle r Is e t
a d a p ta tio n C 0 6 3
o f c tr l. p a r a m e te r s Im a x
C 0 2 2 /C 0 2 3
4900Str082
FIG 7-55 Signal-flow chart (section) for the selection of the excitation characteristic

[C235*] Excitation 0 -0- internal excitation characteristic active With C235= -1-, the control process is
characteristic -1- internal excitation characteristic not active based on operation with rated excitation.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-95
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.7 Monitoring
Note!
Fault messages can only be reset, when the fault has been eliminated.
7.7.1 Change of the monitoring functions

Purpose
The changeover offers the possibility to select whether the monitoring function is
indicated as TRIP, warning, message with pulse inhibit or without pulse inhibit.
Furthermore, monitoring functions can also be switched off.
Warning!
For safety reasons the drive should always be disconnected from the mains while
trouble shooting mains failures or failures of the actual value encoder.
TRIP
In the event of a failure, the ignition pulses for armature circuit and field circuit are
inhibited, the digital outputs TRIP and IMP are set and RDY is reset. The failure is
automatically indicated under C067 and it is entered in the history buffer. The
history buffer is not deleted when switching off the mains.
A TRIP must be reset after the fault has been eliminated.
Warning
In the event of a failure one of the freely assignable digital outputs is set (if the
function “Warning” is assigned to the output). The warning is automatically
indicated under C066 and it is entered in the history buffer. The history buffer is not
deleted when switching off the mains.
A warning must be reset after the fault has been eliminated.
Stop!
If a controller protecting monitoring function (”I¼t monitoring”, overtemperature
heat sink, overvoltage) is selected as warning, the controller can be destroyed if
the fault is not eliminated in time.
7-96 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Message with pulse inhibit

In the event of a failure the ignition pulses are only inhibited for the armature circuit,
the digital output IMP is set, and one of the freely assignable digital output is set
(if the function ”Message” is assigned to the output). The message is automatically
indicated under C065 and it is entered in the history buffer. The history buffer is
Message without pulse inhibit
In the event of a failure one of the freely assignable digital outputs is set (if the
function ”Message” is assigned to the output). The message is automatically
indicated under C065 and it is entered in the history buffer. The history buffer is
Name Lecom TRIP Warning Message Message can be
No. with IMP without switched
IMP off
OC5 I¼t overload* 15 1 X - - -
OC6 I2¼t overload* 16 X X - - 1
OUE Mains overvoltage* 22 1 X - - -
LU1 Phase fault* 31 1 - X - X
LU Mains undervoltage 32 X - 1 - -
LF Underfrequency* 41 1 - X - -
OF Overfrequency* 42 1 - X - -
OH Heat sink overtemperature* 50 1 X - - -
CEO Communication fault with option 61 1 X - - X
U15 15V supply interfered* 70 1 X - - -
CCr System fault 71 X - - - -
PR Parameter fault 72 X - - - -
PR1 Parameter set 1 defective 72 X - - - -
PER Program error 73 X - - - -
SP Wrong signal source polarity 80 1 X - - X
Sd1 Analog encoder defective 81 1 X - - X
Sd2 Resolver fault* 82 1 X - - X
Sd3 Encoder fault at X5* 83 1 X - - X
Sd4 Encoder fault at X9* 84 1 X - - X
Sd5 Set-value encoder at 4mA...20mA 85 1 X - - X
defective
EEr External error* 91 1 X X X -
dEr Motor blocked 93 1 X - - X
ACI armature circuit interrupted 94 1 X - - X
FCI Field circuit interrupted 96 1 X - - X
P03 Following error (tolerance exceeded) 153 X X X 1 X
P13 Angle overflow 163 1 - - - X
(Detection not possible)
CE9 Communication monitoring 69 X X X X 1
Serial interface
X = Selection possible - = Selection not possible 1 = Default setting

*Achnowledgement not possible during TRIP
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-97
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Changeover of the monitoring function with active TRIP

Even if a monitoring function has activated a TRIP, which is still active, it can be
changed to warning or message:
( The display changes to warning or message.
( The TRIP remains active!
( Acknowledge the TRIP after fault elimination:
- under C067 with SH + PRG or
- via terminal ”TRIP reset”
Basic settings for some monitoring functions at configuration changeover
The monitoring function for ’defective analog encoder (Sd1), resolver fault (Sd2),
encoder fault at X5 (Sd3) and encoder fault at X9 (Sd4) are preset when the
configuration is changed (C005). The setting depends on the configuration.
Configuration Sd1 Sd2 Sd3 Sd4
Defective analog Resolver fault Encoder fault at X5 Encoder fault at X9
encoder
C005 = -10- switched off switched off switched off switched off
C005 = -11- TRIP switched off switched off switched off
C005 = -12- switched off TRIP switched off switched off
C005 = -13- switched off switched off switched off TRIP
C005 = -40- switched off switched off switched off switched off
C005 = -41- TRIP switched off switched off switched off
C005 = -43- switched off switched off switched off TRIP
C005 = -53- switched off switched off TRIP switched off
C005 = -63- switched off switched off TRIP switched off
These monitoring functions can be changed subsequently.

Display priority when different fault types occur
1. TRIP (C067)
2. Warning (C066)
3. Message with pulse inhibit (C065)
(Pulse inhibit is also activated when a warning is active)
4. Message without pulse inhibit (C065)
Independently of the priority, all faults are displayed in the corresponding codes
and entered in the corresponding history buffer.
7-98 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C119*¤ Selection of -15- OC5 I ¼t overload (controller protection)
monitoring -16- OC6 I2 ¼t overload (motor protection)
function -22- OUE Mains overvoltage
-31- LU1 Phase fault
-32- LU Mains undervoltage
-41- LF Mains underfrequency fmains< 47Hz
-42- OF Mains overfrequency fmains> 63Hz
-50- OH Overtemperature heat sink
-61- CE0 Communication error (automation
interface)
-70- U15 15V failure
-80- SP Wrong signal source polarity
-81- Sd1 Tacho short circuit/interruption
-82- Sd2 Open circuit of resolver
-83- Sd3 Encoder fault at X5
-85- Sd5 Defective setpoint encoder
-91- EEr Ext. TRIP terminal
-93- dEr Motor blocked
-94- ACI Interruption of armature circuit
-96- FCI Interruption of field circuit
-153- P03 Following error
-163- P13 Angle overflow
-69- CE9 Communication error (serial interface)
[C120*] Change of -0- TRIP The important monitoring functions are set
monitoring -1- Warning according to the changes of the
function -2- Message with pulse inhibit configuration under C005.
-3- Message without pulse inhibit
-4- Switched-off
Stop!
With configurations C005 = -10- or -40- and in the event of encoder failure with
redundant actual value feedback, the activation of the monitoring ”Armature circuit
interrupted” (ACI) cannot be guaranteed.
For separate electronics’ supply, observe a special switch-off sequence.

Otherwise, the monitorings ”ACI” and ”FCI” will be activated. Switch-off sequency:
( At first, inhibit the controller.

( Then disconnect field and armature from the mains.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-99
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.7.2 Overload monitoring for the controller (I¼t monitoring)

The I¼t monitoring is designed for 150 % rated current.
P a ra m e te r r P a ra m e te r r
T R IP
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .
.
.
O v e r lo a d tim e R e c o v e r y tim e
4900Str083
FIG 7-56 Overload diagram for 48XX/49XX controllers
The parameter I1/ Irated depends on the controller size. The ratio between
maximum current and rated armature current is indicated in chapter 3.3.
I1
Ira te d
I2
t1 t 2
t 4900Str084
FIG 7-57 Possible current flow when using the full overload capacity of 48XX/49XX controllers
Examples for overload diagrams in FIG 7-56:

given required Result from diagram
Overload, I1 = 1.3ôIrated - I2 = ? (basic load) I2 = 0.6ôIrated
Overload time, t1 = 70s - t 2 = ? (recovery time) t 2 > 220 s
2. Basic load, I2 = 0.8ôIrated, - I1 = ? (overload) I1 = 1.2ôIrated
Recovery time t2 400s - t 1 = ? (overload time) t 1 $75s
For safety reasons, the ”I¼t monitoring” is rated for continuous load with rated
armature current during mains switch-on.
7-100 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.7.3 Overload monitoring for the motor (I2¼tmonitoring)

The unit can approximately calculate and monitor the motor temperature. The
calculation of the thermal characteristic is derived for externally ventilated motors.
Stop!
This monitoring does not provide full motor protection. The DC controller resets
the calculated motor temperature by switching the mains. If the connected motor
is already hot and still overloaded, overheating cannot be excluded. Self-ventilated
motors cannot be protected with this monitoring.
For total motor protection, integrate a thermal contact or a PTC thermistor in the
motor. Lenze DC motors are equipped with thermal contacts as standard.
The motor monitoring is set as follows:
1. Enter the thermal time constant under C085.
2. Enter the rated motor current under C088.
3. Select the ”I2¼t monitoring” under C119.
4. Activate the ”I2¼t monitoring” under C120.
If the motor current exceeds the limit for a long period of time, the fault message
”OC6” occurs and the controller is inhibited.
IA
O v e r lo a d fa c to r =
IA r
2 .0 0
1 .7 5
1 .5 0
1 .2 5
1 .0 0
0 .2 9 0 .5 9 1 .0 2 .0 3 .0 4 .0 t M
4900Str085
FIG 7-58 I2 t monitoring
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-101
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C085*¤ Thermal 1.0 1.0 min {0.1 min} 100.0 min Required for ”I2 t monitoring” (motor
¼
motor time min protection)

constant
C088 Rated 0A {0.1A} 100 A Rated current depends on the controller:
motor 100 A {1A} 3600 A 0..87A (4902)
current 0..135A (4903)
0..270A (4904)
0..450A (4905)
0..720A (4906)
0..900A (4907)
0..1200A (4X08)
0..1800A (4X09)
0..2520A (4X11)
0..3600A (4X12)
See motor nameplate
-41- LF Mains underfrequency fMains< 47Hz
-42- OF Mains overfrequency fMains> 63Hz
interface)
monitoring -1- Warning according to the changes of the
function -2- Message with pulse inhibit configuration under C005.
-4- Switched-off
7-102 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.7.4 Blocking protection for the motor

Purpose
The blocking protection avoids that the collector of the DC motor is overheated in
standstill.
Function
C 1 2 3 C 1 2 4
B lo c k in g c u r r e n t B lo c k in g tim e
IA
T r ip d E r
n a c t
4900Str086
FIG 7-59 Blocking protection function
The blocking protection is activated if

( IAact > threshold in C123
( nact < 1% ¼ nrated (C087) and
( the blocking time set (C124) are exceeded.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-103
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

-41- LF Mains underfrequency fMains< 47Hz
-42- OF Mains overfrequency fMains> 63Hz
interface)
monitoring -1- Warning according to the change of configuration
function -2- Message with pulse inhibit under C005.
-4- Switched-off
C123 Current 0.95 0A {0.1A} 100 A Rated current depends on the controller:
threshold Irated 100 A {1 A} 3600 A 0 ... 87A (4902)
for blocking 0 ... 135A (4903)
protection 0 ... 270A (4904)
for C124
0 ... 450A (4905)
0 ... 720A (4906)
0 ... 900A (4907)
0 ... 1200A (4X08)
0 ... 1800A (4X09)
0 ... 2520A (4X11)
0 ... 3600A (4X12)
0 ... 4050A (4X13)
See motor nameplate
C124* Blocking 60 s 1s {1 s} 100 s Motor standstill time until fault message is
time activated
7-104 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.7.5 Mains monitoring

Purpose
The monitoring ensure faultfree mains operation. In the event of mains failures it
is not possible to refer to the actual mains status. Therefore, the controller sets
pulse inhibit and activates the monitoring function priorisized accordingly.
Message Fault Cause
LU1 Phase failure Failure of the mains voltage or mains interruption for more than 120 ms
If the mains interruption is shorter than 120 ms (e.g. if the short-circuit power of the
mains is too low for the DC controller), only pulse inhibit will be set.
LU Mains undervoltage Mains voltage < 340V or < 410V (variant V014)
OUE Mains overvoltage Mains voltage > 460V or > 550V (variant V014)
LF Mains Mains frequency < 47Hz
underfrequency
OF Mains Mains frequency > 63Hz
overfrequency
Caution!
If one of the mains monitorings is activated, the drive torque can be lost.
Mains synchronisation for DC controllers

In practice, two complete different mains conditions for DC controller operation
must be considered.
1. Powerful interconnected system which is characterised by a low internal
resistance:
The frequency of the mains voltage is more or less constant. The sine
wave is distorted.
Phase failures - static and short-term - are possible.
2. Isolated operation, characterised by a small ratio of generator power
and DC controller power:
The mains voltage amplitude and frequency fluctuations can be caused
by loads. Under load, the wave considerably differs from the sine wave.
Phase failures - static and short-term - are possible.
Under C237 the synchronisation can be adapted to the existing mains situation.
C237 = 0 The synchronisation is carried out as in the software versions up to
V5.2 (see code C099).
In the event of mains failures, the synchronisation procedure sets pulse inhibit itself.
By this, blown fuses can be avoided in the extent possible with physical measures.
Precondition for fault-free operation with this operating mode is that the mains
supply corresponds to the VDE 0160 which contains regulations for DC controller
operation.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-105
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
C237 = 1
Short synchronisation fault do not result in pulse inhibit. This procedure should be
used under the conditions listed under point 2.
C237 = 2
In the event of mains failures, the synchronisation procedure sets pulse inhibit itself.
Frequency fluctuations are processed slowly. By this, blown fuses can be avoided
in the extent possible with physical measures. Only to be used with mains with fixed
frequencies, as described under point 1.
C237 = 3
Short synchronisation faults do not result in pulse inhibit. Only to be used with
mains with fixed frequencies, as described under point 1.
Changeover only when the controller is inhibited.
[C237*] Synchronisation 0 -0- dyn. IMP, 20 ms correction
mode -1- no dyn. IMP, 20 ms correction
-2- dyn. IMP, 400 ms correction
-3- no dyn. IMP, 400 ms correction
7-106 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.7.6 Monitoring of the serial interface

The controller detects an interruption because incoming telegrams are not
received.
( The monitoring is activated under C119 = -69- with C120 (default
setting = switched off).
( Reactions allowed are trip, warning, message and switched off.
( The time between cancelling the communication and activation of the
monitoring function is to be set under C126.
C126* Time 3000 s 0.2 s {0.1 s} 10 s
delay(monitoring 10 s {1 s} 100 s
serial interface) 100 s {10 s} 3600 s
Note!
If a new parameter set is loaded, the time until the monitoring function is activated
starts again. The monitoring works independently of the RDY message.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-107
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.8 Parameter setting

( With the parameter setting of the controller you can adapt the drive to your
application.
( The complete parameter set is organized in codes which are consecutively
numbered and start with ”C” (chapter 7.9).
( It is possible to save the parameter set for an application.
- Four parameter sets are available, so that the controller can be easily
switched from one application to another.
- The parameter sets 1, 3 and 4 are factory set when delivered. Parameter
set 2 is set for an unwinder with diameter precontrol.
7.8.1 Ways of parameter setting

( It is possible to select a code, to change the parameters and transfer the
changes to the controller, via
- the operating unit of the controller
- LECOM interfaces
These Operating Instructions only describe the change of parameters via the
operating unit.
The description of parameter setting via LECOM interfaces or fieldbus systems can
be obtained from the corresponding Operating Instructions.
7-108 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.8.2 Functions of the operation unit
4900Str087
FIG 7-60 Front view: Operating unit with status display
LED Colour Function

RDY green Ready for operation
not on in the event of TRIP
Imax red on, if the speed controller operates at current limit
IMP yellow Pulse inhibit
on, if the controller is inhibited or message LU is displayed
Bedientaste Key function

PRG Change between code and parameter level
SH+ PRG Accept change
▲ Increase displayed value
SH+ ▲ Increase displayed value fast
▼ Decrease displayed value
SH+ ▼ Decrease displayed value fast
STP Inhibit controller
SH+ STP Enable controller
Note!
( ’SH +’
- Press and hold key SH.
- Press second key indicated.
( Display
- The position of the arrow ”” indicates the current operating level
(code or parameter level).
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-109
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.8.3 Structure of the operating programme

The parameters are set in two operating levels - the code leven and the parameter
level. The symbol ”@” in the display marks the active operating level:
1. In the code level select a code with t or s .
2. Change to the parameter level by pressing the key PRG.
3. Parameters are changed with t or s.
After acceptance, the operating program leads you back to the code
level (chapter 7.8.4.1).
4. With parameters with a high resolution (e. g. C032, C033, ...), the values
to be changed can be directly determined. When being in the parameter
level, press the ”SH” key and tip on s. . The cursor will move to the left
to higher values. Press the ”SH” key and t to move the cursor to lower
values.
Code level
The whole code set of the controller is subdivided into standard codes and
extended codes:
Extended code set
Standard code set (factory setting): Additional codes:
Codes for most frequently used applications Codes for special applications
With C000 = -2- you change from the standard code set to the extended code set
by pressing SH + PRG.
Parameter level
( Each code provides parameters for drive adjustment or reading out the
operating status.
( There are four different parameter types:
- absolute values of a physical variable (e. g. 400 V, 10 s)
- relative values of controller variables (e. g. 50% setpoint)
- numbers for certain states
(e. g. -0- = controller inhibited, -1- = controller enabled).
- Display values
These values can only be displayed but not changed
(e. g. C054 actual motor current)
( Absolute and relative values can be modified in discrete
steps. The steps can change in the parameter-setting range.
- Example acceleration time Tir (C012):
- 3 steps in the whole parameter-setting range
- Tir of 0.01 s - 1 s Step 0.01 s
- Tir of 1 s - 10 s Step 0.1 s
- Tir of 10 s - 100 s Step 1 s
7-110 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.8.4 Basics for operation
7.8.4.1 Parameter change via a code
Note!
If changed parameter sets are required after mains switching, they must be stored
(chapter 7.8.4.3).
Each code with parameters, which can be changed, is factory set. Depending on
the code there are three possibilities to change a parameter.
Each possibilities is explained by means of an example.
Direct acceptance (on-line)

The controller accepts the changed parameter immediately.
1. Select a code using s or t .
2. Change to the parameter level using PRG.
3. Select a parameter using s or t .
The controller accepts the changed parameter immediately.
This is also possible during operation of the drive.
4. Change to the code level using PRG.
Code level Parameter level
Code Parameter Uni t Code Parameter Un i t
PRG
C0 11 3 000 r pm C0 1 1 3 0 0 0 r pm
N m a x S PE ED N m a x S PE ED
Change a parameter
with s or t
Code Parameter Un i t Code Parameter Un i t

PRG
C0 1 1 2 7 50 r pm C0 1 1 2 7 5 0 r pm
N m a x S PE ED N m a x S PE ED
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-111
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Acceptance with SH + PRG

The controller accepts the changed parameter only after pressing SH+PRG.
1. Select a code using s or t.
3. Change a parameter (even while the drive is running) using s or t.
4. Press SH + PRG. ( --ok-- is displayed for approx. 0.5 s)
The controller now works with the new parameter.
Code Parameter Unit Code Parameter Unit
PRG
C 083 0 . 0 0 A C 083 0 . 0 0 A
F I E L D C UR RE NT F I E LD CU R RE NT
Change a parameter
with s or t

SH + PRG
C 0 8 3 1. 2 0 A C 083 1. 2 0 A
F I E L D C UR RE NT F I E LD CU R RE NT
Acceptance with SH + PRG when the controller is inhibited

The controller only accepts the changed parameter when the controller is inhibited
and after pressing SH + PRG.
1. Select a code using s or t
3. Change a parameter (even if the drive is running) using s or t .
4. Press STP to inhibit the controller.
5. Press SH + PRG. ( --ok-- is displayed for approx. 0.5 s)
6. Press SH + STP to enable the controller again
The controller now works with the new parameter.
C0 0 5 - 11 - PRG C0 0 5 - 1 1 -
C o nf i g ur a t i o n SP E E D CT R L T A C HO
Change a parameter
with s or t
Code Parameter Unit STP Code Parameter Unit

2. SH + PRG C0 0 5 - 1 0 -
C0 0 5 - 1 0. -
C o n f i g u r a t i o n SP E E D CT R L A RM A T
7-112 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.8.4.2 Parameter change via two codes

Some setting are parameterised via two codes:
1. Select the parameter to be changed with the input selection
2. Change the parameter in the setting code.
Selection code for parameter input under
C025 Encoder C026 Encoder constant
C027 Encoder adjustment (factor)
C028 Encoder adjustment (divisor)
C029 Automatic adjustment
C038 JOG setpoint selection C039 JOG setpoint
C100 Additional accleration and deceleration time C101 Acceleration time
C103 Deceleration time
C110 Monitor output C111 Monitor signal
C108 Gain
C109 Offset
C112 Selection of freely assignable digital inputs C113 Function of the digital terminal
C114 Polarity
C115 Function priority
C116 Selection of freely assignable digital outputs C117 Function of the digital terminal
C118 Polarity
C128 Delay time
C145 Selection of freely assignable analog inputs C146 Signal input
C147 Priority
C192 Selection of freely assignable fixed setpoints C193 Fixed setpoints
Example “Automatic tacho adjustment”

PRG
C 025 - 1- C 025 - 1 -
EN C OD E R TE RM I NAL S 1 , 2
Change a parameter
with s or t
SH + PRG
C 025 - 2- C 025 - 2 -
EN C OD E R TE RM I NAL S 3 , 4
Select a code with V or W

.
PRG
C 029 XXX X r pm C 025 YY Y Y r pm
AU T OM . E N C . A D J . AU T OM . E N C . A D J .
Change a parameter
with s or t

SH + PRG
C 029 YYY Y r pm C 029 YY Y Y r pm
AU T OM . E N C . A D J . AU T OM . E N C . A D J .
Parameter changed
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-113
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.8.4.3 Store parameter set

(see chapter 7.4.2)
The parameter must be stored to ensure that the setting will not be lost after mains
switching.
Up to four different parameter sets can be created, if, for instance, a machine
processes different materials or operates in different states (set-up, stand by, etc.).
If only one paramater set is required, store the change permanently under
parameter set 1, because this parameter set is automatically loaded after switch
on.
1. Select C003 usi ng s or t .
3. Set the parameter to -1- using s or t .
This is also possible during operation of the drive.
4. Press SH + PRG.
--ok-- is displayed for approx. 0.5 s.
Your settings are permanently stored under ”parameter set 1”.
7.8.4.4 Load parameter set

(see chapter 7.4.2)
Loading is only possible when the controller is inhibited.
Warning!
With the loading a new parameter set, the controller is initialised and operates as
if the mains had been switched.
User terminal X2/28 as source for the controller inhibit. Otherwise, the dirve can
start in an uncontrolled way when changing to another parameter set.
Main connection
The controller automatically loads parameter set 1.
Via keypad
1. Inhibit the controller via terminal 28.
3. Select C002 using s or t .
4. Select a parameter set using s or t .
5. Acknowledge with SH + PRG (--ok-- is displayed for approx. 0.5 s).
The parameter set selected is loaded. Enable the controller again.
7-114 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Via terminal control

With terminal control it is possible to change to other parameter sets via the digital
inputs.
- Assign ”select parameter set” to one or two digital input of each
parameter set and ”load parameter set” to one dig. input.
- The assignment of the digital inputs must be the same for all parameter
sets used.
- The controller reads the terminals assigned with ”select parameter set” as
binary code. The input with the lower number is the first input, the input
with the next higher number is the seconde input (e.g. E1 = 1st input, E2
= 2nd input). .
1. input 2. input
Parameter set 1 0 0
Parameter set 2 1 0
Parameter set 3 0 1
Parameter set 4 1 1
The input with the function ”load parameter set” is signal triggered. Length of the
HIGH pulse: 10 ms...2 s.
1. Address digital inputs assigned to the function ”select parameter set”.
2. Inhibit controller with a LOW signal at terminal 28.
3. Supply a HIGH pulse to the digital input assigned to the function ”load
parameter set”.
4. After loading, C002 indicates the number of the loaded parameter set.
5. Enable controller.
Note!
The RDY message is not indicated for the time the controller needs to select a new
parameter set and can thus not respond to new input signals (LED and terminal
44).
7.8.4.5 Password protection

Use a password (three digit number) to protect your parameter settings from
undenied access. If the password is not entered, the parameter of the standard
code set can only be read but not changed. The parameter of the extended code
set can neither be read nor changed:
1. Enter the password under C094.
2. Set C000 to -0- (”Standard code - read only”).
Code C000 can only be changed after input of the password.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-115
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.8.5 Operating modes

The controller can be adapted to your application in different ways:
Terminals: The terminals are to control the controller.
Operating unit: There are five keys and the plain text display on the operating
unit for parameter setting and control of the controller.
LECOM1: LECOM1 is a protocol for control and parameter setting of the
unit via a PC or other hosts. The signals are processed to the
interface standards RS232C and RS485. The controller can be
connected to a superimposed system via X6.
LECOM2: For very difficult requirements, the controller can be parameter-
set and operated with LECOM2 via fieldbus connection
modules for standard bus systems (InterBus-S, PROFIBUS
etc.).
C001¤ Operating 0 Control Parameter setting With C001 =

mode -0- Terminals Keypad -2-, -3-, -4-, -5-, -7-, TRIP must be reset
-1- Keypad Keypad (C043) via the interface or the terminal.
-2- Terminals LECOM1 With LECOM2, TRIP reset is also possible
via the control word of the process data
-3- LECOM1 LECOM1 channel.
-4- Terminals LECOM2 (*)
-5- LECOM2 (*) LECOM2 (*) (*) Fieldbus
-6- LECOM2 (*) Keypad
-7- LECOM2 (*) LECOM1
Note!
With control via keypad, LECOM1 and LECOM2, the terminal functions controller
enable (X1/28), quick stop (X1/21 and X1/22) and the additional setpoint (X1/6)
remain the same in the configurations C005 = -1X-, -4X-, -5X-.
7-116 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.8.6 Display functions
Code set
The factory setting is the display of the standard code set.
The extended code set is displayed when selecting C000 = -2-.
C000¤ Code set 1 -0- (+PW) Standard code set read only Can only be changed via keypad!
-1- (+PW) Standard code set If a password is defined under C094, a
-2- (+PW) Extendend code set change from -0- to -1- or -2- is only
-9- For service only possible after entering this password
(+PW):
-11- Code set automation module
1. Change C000,
acknowledge with SH + PRG .
2. Password setting with ▲ or ▼.
3. Accept with SH + PRG.
C094*¤ User 0 0 {1} 999 0 = No password protection
password (see also C000)
Language
C098 Language 0 -0- German
-1- English
-2- French
Actual value displays

C051 nact speed -5000 rpm {1 rpm} +5000 rpm Display: actual speed
C052* Motor 0V {1 V} 600 V Display: motor voltage VA
voltage
C054 Motor 0.0 A 0.1 A} 100 A Display: motor current IA
current 100 A {1 A} 2000 A
C056 Torque -100.0 % Mmax {0.1 %} +100.0 % Mmax Display: Torque setpoint
setpoint Armature setting range: 100% Mmax
correspond to 100% Imax (C022, C023)
C060* Rotor 0...2047 Display: absolute rotor angle position,
position standardized to 2048 incr./rev.
Incremental encoder feedback: display
only after zero track pulse.
C061* I¼t load 0.0 % {0.1 %} 105.0% Display: ”I¼t load”. Starting value when
switching on the mains is always 100 % !
C185 Pmotor -500.0 kW {0.1 kW} 500.0 kW Display: actual motor power
C186 Mmotor -999 Nm {1 Nm} 999 Nm Display: actual motor torque
C187 IFset 0.00 A {0.01 A} 50.0 A Display: actual field current setpoint
C188 IFact 0.00 A {0.01 A} 50.0 A Display: actual field current value
C189 fmains 0.0 Hz {0.1 Hz} 100.0 Hz Display: actual mains frequency
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-117
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Switch-on display
After switching on the controller, C083 is displayed first (field current). To change
the switch-on display, enter the required code number under C004.
C004¤ Switch-on 83 0 {1} 999 Code No. for switch-on display: Can only
display be changed if C001= -0-, -1-, -6-
Identification
The controller type is indicated under C093.
Code C099 indicates the software version used.
C093* Device 49XX Display: controller type
identification
C099* Software 49 6.X Display: Series and software version
versions
7-118 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.9 Code table
How to read the code table:

Column Abbreviation Meaning
Code C013 Code C013
l The parameter value is accepted immediately (ONLINE).
C009* l Code of the extended code set
C001¤ l The parameter value of the code will be accepted after pressing SH+PRG.
[C002] l The parameter value of the code will be accepted after pressing SH+PRG,
but only if the controller is inhibited.
Name Name of the code
Lenze Factory setting of the code
Selection 1 {1 %} 99 Minimum value {smallest step/unit} maximum value
Info - Additional, important explanation of the code

C000¤ Code set 1 -0- (+PW) Standard code set read only Can only be changed via keypad!
If a password is defined under C094, a
-1- (+PW) Standard code set change from -0- to -1- or -2- is only
possible after entering this password
-2- (+PW) Extendend code set (+PW):
-9- For service only 1 Change C000,
1. C000 acknowledge with SH +
PRG .
-11- Code set for automation module 2 P
2. Passwordd setting
tti withith ▲ or ▼.
3. Accept with SH + PRG.
[C001] Operating mode 0 Control Parameter setting With C001 =
-0- Terminals Keypad -2-, -3-, -4-, -5-, -7-, TRIP must be reset
-1- Keypad Keypad (C043) via the interface or the terminal.
-2- Terminals LECOM1 With LECOM2, TRIP reset is also possible
via the control word of the process data
-3- LECOM1 LECOM1 channel.
-4- Terminals LECOM2 (*)
-5- LECOM2 (*) LECOM2 (*)
-6- LECOM2 (*) Keypad
-7- LECOM2 (*) LECOM1
(*) Fieldbus
[C002] Load parameter 0 -0- Factory setting Parameter set 1 is automatically loaded
set -1- Parameter set 1 after mains connection. If another
-2- Parameter set 2 parameter set is selected via terminal, this
-3- Parameter set 3 parameter set will also be loaded.
-4- Parameter set 4
C003¤ Save parameter 1 -1- Parameter set 1
set -2- Parameter set 2
-3- Parameter set 3
-4- Parameter set 4
C004¤ Switch-on 83 0 {1} 999 Code No. for switch-on display: Can only
display be changed if C001= -0-, -1-, -6-
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-119
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

[C005*] Configuration 11 Speed control with additional setpoint
-10- Armature voltage control If C005 = -10- or -40-, field control
nset: analog at X1/8 override is not possible.
nadd: analog at X1/6 A change of the configuration changes the
Mlimit: analog at X1/1, 1/2. control structure and the terminal
-11- Act. value encoder: tacho at X1/3,X1/4 assignment and activates important
nset: analog at X1/8 monitoring functions.
nadd: analog at X1/6 Change monitoring functions:
Mlimit: analog at X1/1, X1/2 C119 / C120
-12- Act. value encoder: resolver at X7 Change terminal signals: C145 / C146.
nset: analog at X1/8
nadd: analog at X1/6
Mlimit: analog at X1/1, X1/2
-13- Act. value encoder: increment. encoder at X9
Torque control with speed limitation and addi-
tional setpoint
-40- Armature voltage control
Mset: analog at X1/1, 1/2.
-41- Act. value encoder: tacho at X1/3, X1/4
Mset: analog at X1/1, 1/2.
-42- Act. value encoder: resolver at X7
Mset: analog at X1/1, X1/2
Mset: analog at X1/1, X1/2
Dig. freq. of master with additional setpoint
Digital frequency bus
nset: digital at X9
nset: digital at X9
Digital frequency cascade
-72- Acutal value encoder: resolver at X7
nset: digital, X5
C009*¤ Controller 1 1 {1} 99 Bus participant number for operation via
address interface: Parameter 10 reserved for
broadcasting to groups of participants.
Can only be changed with C001 = -0-
and -1-.
7-120 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C011 nmax 3000 250 rpm {1rpm} 5000 rpm nmax is the reference for the analog and
speed rpm relative setpoint selection as well as for
the acceleration and deceleration times.
Parameter setting via interface:
Inhibit the controller before substantial
parameters changes.
C012 Acceleration 0.00s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s Time refers to 0...nmax
time Tir for main 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
setpoint 10 s {1 s} 100 s
100 s {10 s} 990 s
C013 Deceleration 0.00s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s Time refers to 0...nmax
time Tif for main 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
100 s {10 s} 990 s
C017* Threshold -3000 -5000 rpm {1 rpm} +5000 rpm If the actual speed falls below the
nact nx rpm comparison speed nx, the corresponding
output will be activated.
C019* Threshold 50 rpm 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm If the actual speed falls below the
nact = 0 threshold, the corresponding output will
be activated.
C022 + Imax Rated Current limit of thyrister bridge 1 Current limit depends on controller:
limit control- 0 {0.1A} 100A 29A (4902)
ler cur- 100A {1A} 1200A 45A (4903)
rent
90A (4904)
150A (4905)
240A ((4906))
C023 -Imax Current limit of thyrister bridge 2 300A (4907)
limit 0 {0.1A} 100A 400A (4X08)
100A {1A} 1200A 600A (4X09)
840A (4X11)
1200A (4X12)
1350A (4X13)
C025¤ Input selection: 2 -1- Terminals X1/1, X1/2 Select (under C025) the input which is to
Input -2- Terminals X1/3, X1/4 be adjusted with C026, C027, C028 or
adjustment -3- Terminal X1/6 C029.
-4- Terminal X1/8
-5- Armature voltage feedback
-10 Digital frequency input X5
-12- Resolver X7
-13- Encoder output X8
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-121
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C026¤ Encoder 0mV C025 = -1-, -2-, -3-, -4-: The encoder constants are not overwritten
constant for Offset correction of the analog inputs the factory setting is loaded.
C025 -9999mV {1mV} +9999mV
0V C025 = -5-:
Offset correction of the armature voltage feedback
-100V {1V} +100V
1 C025 = -10-, -11-:
Encoder constant of the digital frequency inputs
3 C025 = -13-:
Encoder constant of the encoder outputs with resolver
feedback
C027 Gain factor for 1.000 C025 = -1-, -2-, -3-, -4-:
C025 Gain factor of the analog inputs
-2.500 {0.001} +2.500
1.000 C005 = -11-, -41-:
Gain factor of the tacho input X1/3, X1/4
0.010 {0.001} +9.999
1.010 C025 = -5-:
Gain factor of the armature voltage feedback
0.100 {0.001} +9.999
0.1000 C025 = -10-, -11-: If an analog signal source (C145/C146) is
Gain factor of the digital frequency inputs assigned, only the parameter will be
-3.2767 {0.0001} +3.2767 displayed.
1.000 C025 = -12-:
Gain factor of the resolvers
-32.767 {0.001} +32.767
C028 Divisor for C025 0.1000 C025 = -10-, -11-:
Divisor for the digital frequency inputs
0.0001 {0.0001} 3.2767
C029¤ Automatic Applies to all configurations:
adjustment for If an automatic adjustment is not possible,
C025 the previous value will be maintained.
--ok-- will not be displayed.
C025 = -1-, -2-, -3-, -4-: 1.Inhibit controller.
Automatic adjustment for analog inputs 2.Set the setpoint at the terminal selected
-100% {0.1%} 100.0% 3.Enter the corresponding value.
4.C027 displays the calculated gain factor
C025 = -2- and tacho at X1/3, X1/4 or Adjustment during operation:
C025 = -5- and actual value from armature voltage 1.Display of actual speed.
feedback: 2.Measure real speed with hand tacho.
nact adjustment 3.Enter real speed.
0 rpm {1rpm} 5000rpm 4.Drive accelerates to this speed.
factor.
7-122 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C029¤ Automatic C025 = -10-, -11-: Automatic adjustment only possible, if X5
adjustment for Adjustment of the digital frequency inputs X5, X9 or X9 are not selected as acutal speed
C025 -100.0% {0.1%} 100.0% inputs:
factor.
C025 = -12- Automatic adjustment is only possible, if
Adjustment of the resolver the resolver is not used as a speed
-100.0% {0.1%} 100.0% feedback system:
factor.
C030¤ Constant for the 1
-0- 8192 increments / revolution Number of increments per revolution for
digital frequency -1- 4096 increments / revolution the digital frequency output
output -2- 2048 increments / revolution
C032* Ratio numerator 0.1000 -3.2767 {0.0001} 3.2767 Ratio numerator for configurations with
digital frequency
If an analog signal source is assigned
(C145/146), only the parameter will be
displayed.
C033* Ratio 0.1000 0.0001 {0.0001} 3.2767 Ratio denominator for configurations with
denominator digital frequency
C034*¤ Master current 0 -0- imaster = -20 mA ... + 20 mA For master current input, the switch S3/1
-1- I imaster |= 4 mA ... 20mA must be set to ON.
C034 = -1-:
If imaster < 2mA, the monitoring message
Sd5 will be displayed.
C038¤ Input selection: 1 -1- Selection JOG1 Select JOG setpoint to be set under C039.
JOG setpoint -2- Selection JOG2
...
-15- Selection JOG15
C039 JOG speed for -100.0 % nmax {0.1 %} +100.0 % nmax Enable JOG setpoints via the digital inputs
C038 100.0% JOG1 or via C045.
75.0% JOG2
50.0% JOG3
25.0% JOG4
0.0% JOG5
.. ...
0.0% JOG15
C040 Controller -0- Controller inhibited Input only via LECOM1 or LECOM2. C183
enable -1- Controller enabled indicates the source which has inhibited
the controller.
C041¤ CW/CCW -0- Main setpoint not inverted Input only with control via keypad or
direction of -1- Main setpoint inverted interface.
rotation Display only with terminal control.
C042¤ Quick stop -0- No quick stop Input only with control via keypad or
(corresponds to X2/21 or X2/22 = HIGH) interface.
-1- Quick stop active Display only with terminal control.
(corresponds to X2/21 and X2/22 = LOW)
Drives decelerates to standstill following the
quick-stop ramp C105.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-123
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C043*¤ TRIP reset -0- Read: no fault Only selectable via the interfaces.
Write: reset fault
-1- Read: fault
C045¤ JOG enable 0 -0- Main setpoint (C046) active Display only with terminal control.
-1- Setpoint JOG1 active
...
-15- Setpoint JOG15 active
C046 nset speed -100.0 % nmax {0.1 %} +100.0 % n max Display only with terminal control. If the
terminal control is deactivated, the actual
terminal value will be accepted for
operation.
C047 Torque limit -100.0 % Mmax {0.1 %} +100.0 % Mmax Display only with terminal control. If the
terminal control is deactivated, the actual
terminal value will be accepted for opera-
tion. Armature setting range: 100 % Mmax
correspond to 100 % Imax (C022, C023)
C049 Additional -100.0 % nmax {0.1 %} +100.0 % nmax Display: additional setpoint from terminal
setpoint
C050 nset at controller -180.0 % nmax {0.1 %} +180.0 % nmax Display: speed setpoint at the input of the
speed controller
C051 nact speed -5000 rpm {1 rpm} +5000 rpm Display: actual speed
C052* Motor voltage 0V {1 V} 600 V Display: motor voltage VA
C054 Motor current 0.0 A {0.1 A} 100 A Display: motor current
100 A {1 A} 2000 A
C056 Torque setpoint -100.0 % Mmax {0.1 %} +100.0 % Mmax Display: Torque setpoint
Armature setting range: 100% Mmax
correspond to 100% Imax (C022, C023)
C060* Rotor position 0...2047 Display of the absolute angle position of
the rotor, standardized to 2048 incr./rev.
With incremental encoder feedback,
display only after zero track pulse
occured.
C061* I¼t load 0,0 % {0.1 %} 105,0% Display: ”I¼t load”
Starting value when switching on the
mains is always 100 % !
C063 Iset at controller -100.0 % Imax {0.1 %} +100.0% Imax Display: current setpoint at current
controller input
7-124 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C065 Fault indication: Display Meaning When a message occurs:
message --- no message 1.The display changes to C065.
EEr external TRIP (from terminal) 2.The message blinks until the fault is
LF mains frequency fault fmains < 47Hz reset.
LU Undervoltage Depending on the configuration of C119
LU1 faulty phase, mains interruptions / C120, the drive can inhibit itself while
OF mains frequency fault fmains > 63Hz the message is displayed and restart
when the fault has been reset.
P03 following error (tolerance exceeded)
3.The message is entered into the history
buffer of C065.
The last 8 entries can be displayed by
pressing sind mit ▼ and ▲. The
message saved last is displayed first.
The history buffer is cleared when
switching on the mains.
C066 Fault indication: Display Meaning When a warning occurs:
Warning --- no warning 1.The display changes to C066.
ACI armature circuit break 2.The warning blinks until the fault is
CE0 communication error (automation interface) reset.
CE9 communication error (serial interface) 3.The warning is entered into the history
dEr motor blocked or field break buffer of C066.
EEr external TRIP (from terminal)
FCI interruption of the excitation circuit The last 8 entries can be displayed by
OC5 I¼t overload (controller protection) pressing ▼ and ▲. The message saved
last is diplayed first. The history buffer
OC6 I2¼t overload (motor protection)
isn’t cleared when the mains is switched
OH overtemperature heat sink on.
OUE mains overvoltage
Sd1 short circuit or interruption of tacho
Sd2 open circuit of resolver
Sd3 encoder fault at X5
Sd5 master current < 2mA with C034 = -1-
SP wrong signal source polarity
U15 15V supply voltage is missing
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-125
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C067 Fault indication: Display Meaning When a TRIP occurs:
TRIP --- no fault at present 1.The display changes to C067.
ACI armature circuit break 2.TRIP blinks until the fault and the
CCr System fault memory are reset.
CE0 communication error (automation interface) Reset memory:
CE9 communication error (serial interface) with SH+PRG or via the input
dEr motor blocked or field break TRIP-Reset, with LECOM via C043 or via
the input TRIP-Reset
EEr external TRIP (from terminal)
FCI break excitation circuit 3.TRIP is entered into the history buffer of
C067.
LF mains frequency fault fmains < 47Hz
The last 8 entries can be displayed by
LU Undervoltage pressing ▼ and ▲. The TRIP saved last
LU1 fa lty phase,
faulty phase mains break is displayed
displa ed first.
first The histor
history buffer
b ffer isn’t
OC5 I¼t overload (controller protection) cleared when the mains switched on.
OC6 I2¼t overload (motor protection)
OF mains frequency fault fmains > 63Hz After PR-TRIP, the code C180 must be
OH overtemperature heat sink reset to 2Q operation for controllers 48XX
OUE mains overvoltage or for 2Q applications.
P13 angle overrun
(angle difference cannot be compensated any
longer)
PER software error
(please contact Lenze)
PR all parameters reset (factory setting)
PR1 parameter set 1 reset (factory setting)
Sd1 short circuit or interruption of tacho
Sd2 open circuit of resolver
Sd5 master current < 2 mA with C034 = -1-
SP wrong signal source polarity
U15 15V supply voltage is missing
C068 Operating state Bit Meaning 16 bit status information
0-3 Operation error (bit-decoded) Only readable via LECOM. The signals are
4-7 Communication error (bit-coded) described in the Lecom-A/B protocol.
8 Controller enable
9 nact = 0
10 Setpoint inversion
11 Pulse inhibit
12 Quick stop
13 Imax limit reached
14 nact = nset
15 TRIP fault message
7-126 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C069 Controller state Bit Meaning 8 bit status information
0 Operation error Only readable via LECOM. The signals are
1 Communication error described in the LECOM-A/B protocol.
2 Operating mode was changed
3 Control via LECOM active
4 Control via terminals active
5 Controller reset (CCr fault)
6 not assigned
7 Controller enable
C070 Vpn of the speed 8 1 {1} 1000 Gain adjustment of the speed controller:
controller 1.With low motor speed, increase Vpn until
the drive starts to oscillate (high
frequency).
2.Reduce Vpn, until the drive runs
smoothly.
[C071*] Tnn of the speed 400 ms 20 ms {10 ms} 2000 ms Integral action time of the speed controller
controller 9999 ms Tnn = 9999 ms: I-component switched-off
(only when controller is inhibited)
C072* Kdn of the speed 0 0¼Vpn {0.1} 5.0¼Vpn Differential component of the speed
controller controller
C077* Vpl of the field 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 5.0 Gain adjustment of the field controller
controller
C078* Tnl of the field 300 ms 70 ms {10 ms} 2000 ms Integral action time of the field controller
controller
C079* PT1 element 140 ms 30 ms {10 ms} 9000 ms The larger the time constant, the larger
Time constant the decoupling between armature and
for field field circuits.
controller
attenuation
C081* Rated motor 6.7 kW 0.0 kW {0.1 kW} 10.0 kW See motor nameplate
power 10kW {1kW} 1000kW
C083¤ Rated field 0A 0A {0.01 A} 30.0 A Rated current depends on the controller:
current 0A/0.1A ... 3.5A (4902, 4903)
0A/0.3A ... 10A (4904 - 4907)
0A/0.3A ... 15A (4X08)
0A/0.3A ... 30A (4X09 - 4X13)
Data on the motor nameplate are
setpoints for the field current. With very
low field currents an auxiliary starting
circuit should be provided.
C084*¤ CW/CCW 10 ms 0 ms {5 ms} 30 ms Adaption of the current controller to
armature time compensated and uncompensated motors
constant 0 ms = adaption not active
C085*¤ Thermal motor 1.0min 1.0 min {0.1 min} 100.0 min Required for ”I2 t monitoring” (motor
¼
time constant protection)

C087¤ Rated motor 3000 300 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm See motor nameplate
speed rpm
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-127
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C088 Rated motor 0A {0.1A} 100 A Rated current depends on the controller:
current 100 A {1A} 3600 A 0..87A (4902)
0..135A (4903)
0..270A (4904)
0..450A (4905)
0..720A (4906)
0..900A (4907)
0..1200A (4X08)
0..1800A (4X09)
0..2520A (4X11)
0..3600A (4X12)
0..4050A (4X13)
See motor nameplate
C090¤ Rated motor 420 V 150 V {1 V} 650 V See motor nameplate
voltage Observe max. permissible output voltage
of the controller!
C093*¤ Controller 49XX Display: controller type
identification
C094* User password 0 0 {1} 999 0 = No password protection (see also
C000)
C098 Language 0 -0- German
-1- English
-2- French
C099* Software 49 6.X Display: Series and software version
version
C100*¤ Input selection: -1- Acceleration time Tir1/deceleration time Tif1 Extends Tir (C012) and Tif (C013) by max.
Additional -2- Acceleration time Tir2/deceleration time Tif2 15 value pairs. Can be changed under
acceleration and ... C130:
deceleration -15- Acceleration time Tir15/deceleration time Tif15 1.Select additional times under C100.
times for main 2.Set under C101 (Tir) or C103 (T if).
setpoint
C101* Acceleration 0.00s 0s {0.01 s} 1s Time refers to speed change 0...nmax
time for C100 1s {0.1s} 10s
10 s {1 s} 100 s
100 s {10 s} 990 s
C103* Deceleration 0.00s 0s {0.01 s} 1s Time refers to speed change 0...nmax
time for C100 1s {0.1s} 10s
10 s {1 s} 100 s
100 s {10 s} 990 s
C105 Deceleration 0.00s 0s {0.01 s} 1s Time refers to speed change 0...nmax
time for quick 1s {0.1s} 10s
stop 10 s {1 s} 100 s
100 s {10 s} 990 s
C108* Gain for C110 1.00 -10.000 {0.001} +10.000 Gain for X4/62, X4/63, X8
C109* Offset for C110 0mV -10000mV {1mV} +10000mV Offset for X4/62, X4/63
Loading of the factory settings does not
overwrite C109.
This code is only effective if the digital
frequency output is selected under C110.
C110*¤ Input selection: 1 -1- Analog output X4/62 (monitor 1) The monitor outputs are freely assignable
Monitor output -2- Analog output X4/63 (monitor 2) with the signals under C111:
-3- Digital frequency output X8 1.Select monitor output under C110.
2.Assign signals under C111.
3.If necessary, adjust under C108 and
C109.
7-128 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

[C111*] Signal for C110 -0- No signal Armature setting range: 100 % Mmax
-1- Main setpoint (C046), reference: nmax correspond to 100 % Imax (C022, C023)
-2- Input ramp function generator, reference: The actual armature current Iact (C054) is
nmax standardized, according to the controller:
-3- Output ramp function generator, reference: Iact X4/62, X8 Type
nmax X4/63
-4- Additional setpoint (C049), reference: nmax 16A 4.4V 110kHz 4902
-5- nset at n-controller input (C050), reference: 25A 4.7V 118kHz 4903
nmax 55A 4.8V 120kHz 4904
-6- nact (C051), reference: nmax (X4/63) 110A 4.9V 122kHz 4905
-8- nact (C382), reference: nmax (X8) 200A 6.4V 159kHz 4906
-20- n-controller output, reference: Mmax 250A 4.4V 110kHz 4907
-21- Mset (C047), reference: Mmax 330A 5.2V 129kHz 4X08
-22- Iset (C063), reference: Imax(C022, C023), 500A 5.8V 144kHz 4X09
(X4/62) 700A 5.8V 144kHz 4X11
-23- Iact (C054), reference: (see ’Info’) 1000A 5.8V 146kHz 4X12
-25- Mset (C056), reference: Mmax 1200A 7.0V 175kHz 4X13
-28- I¼t load, reference: 100%
-29- I2 ¼t load, reference: 100% With C111 = -5- the selection depends on
-30- VA (C052), reference: 1000 V the configuration set under C005.
-35- Mains frequency, reference: 30Hz = 0V, If C005 = -6X-,
6X -72-72 the
th signal
i l C111 =
70Hz = 10V -5- outputs the corresponding input pulse
current.
-40- Fiel current setpoint, reference: max.
controller field current IFmax
-41- Actual field current, reference: IFmax
-60- Output motor potentiometer, reference:
100%
-61- Output process controller, reference: 100%
-65- Resolver, reference: 100%
-66- Digital / analog conversion 1 (C272),
reference: 100%
-67- Digital / analog conversion 2 (C273),
reference: 100%
-68- Motor power, reference: 5 V = Prated
-69- Motor torque, reference: 5 V = Mrated
-70- Output dead band element, reference: 100%
-71- Output DT1 element, reference: 100%
-72- Output absolute value generator, reference:
100%
-73- Output limiting element 1, reference: 100%
-74- Output PT1 element, reference: 100%
-75- Output arith.-block 3, reference: 100%
-76- Output add.-block 1, reference: 100%
-77- Output add.-block 2, reference: 100%
-78- Output limiting element 2, reference: 100%
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-129
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C112*¤ Input selection: 1 -1- digital input X2/E1 The digital inputs E1..E5 are freely
Freely -2- digital input X2/E2 assignable with the functions under C113.
assignable ... Each function can only be assigned to one
digital input -5- digital input X2/E5 input. Exceptions:
l C113 = -20- : max. 2 dig. inputs
l C113 = -1-, -2-, -40-: max. 4 dig.
inputs (binary coded selection of max.
1, 3, 7 or 15 additional Ti times or
setpoints).
1.Select input under C112.
4.Determine priority under C115.
[C113*] Function for -0- No function
C112 -1- Enable additional Ti times
-2- Enable JOG setpoint (X4/E4, E5)
-3- TRIP reset (X2/E2)
-4- TRIP set (X2/E1)
-6- Switch-off additional setpoint (X4/E3)
-7- Switch-off I-component of the n-controller
-9- Ramp function generator stop
-10- Ramp function generator zero
-16 Motor potentiometer deactivated
-17 Motor potentiometer down
-18 Motor potentiometer up
-20 Select parameter set
-21 Load parameter set
-30- Deactivate process controller
-31- Switch-off I-component of the process
controller
-32- Set the process controller to 0
-40- Enable fixed setpoint
[C114*] Polarity for 0 -0- Input HIGH active
C112 -1- Input LOW active
[C115*] Priority for C112 -0- Terminal function not active, if terminal
(X2/E4, E5)
(X2/E1, E2, E3)
C116*¤ Input selection: 1 -1- FDO 1 The digital outputs FDO1..FDO12 and the
Freely -2- FDO 2 relay output X3/K11, X3/K14 are freely
assignable ... assignable with the functions under C117.
digital output -12- FDO 12 Multiple assignment is possible.
-13- Relay output X3/K11, X3/K14 The outputs FDO1...FDO5 are assigned to
the terminals X3/A1...X3/A5.
FDO6...FDO12 can only be accessed via
LECOM.
1.Select output under C116.
Only for FDO1...FDO5, relay output:
4.Determine signal delay under C128.
7-130 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

[C117*] Function for -0- No function
C116 -1- nact nx C017 (FDO1)
-2- Controller enabled (FDO10)
-3- n-controller output = Mmax (FDO2)
-4- Ready for operation (RDY) (FDO11)
-5- Pulse inhibit (IMP) (FDO12)
-6- TRIP (relay)
-7- Warning (FDO6)
-8- Message (FDO7)
-9- Ramp function generator on = off (FDO3)
-10- nact= nset (FDO5)
-11- nact = 0 (FDO4)
-12- IA = 0 (FDO8)
-13- IA & nact = 0 (FDO9)
-14- 'C046| or 'C049| >nx (threshold C243)
-15- |IA| > Ix (threshold C244)
-16- IF > Ix (threshold C245)
-17- |nact| > nx (threshold C242)
-18- Brake control
-19- Comparator 1
-20- Comparator 2
[C118] Polarity for -0- Output is HIGH active (FDO2, 3, 5)
C116 -1- Output is LOW active (FDO1, 4, relay)
-41- LF Mains underfrequency fmains < 47Hz
-42- OF Mains overfrequency fmains >63Hz
interface)
-81- Sd1 Tacho short-circuit/interruption
-163- P13 Phase overflow
monitoring -1- Warning according to the change of configuration
function -2- Message with pulse inhibit under C005.
-4- Switched-off
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-131
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C123 Current 0.95 0 A {0.1A} 100 A Rated current depends on the controller:
threshold for Irated 100 A {1 A} 3600 A 0 ... 87A (4902)
blocking 0 ... 135A (4903)
protection for 0 ... 270A (4904)
C124
0 ... 450A (4905)
0 ... 720A (4906)
0 ... 900A (4907)
0 ... 1200A (4X08)
0 ... 1800A (4X09)
0 ... 2520A (4X11)
0 ... 3600A (4X12)
0 ... 4050A (4X13)
See motor nameplate
C124* Blocking time 60 s 1s {1 s} 100 s Motor standstill time until TRIP is set
C125*¤ Change of baud 0 -0- 9600 baud
rate for -1- 4800 baud
interface -2- 2400 baud
-3- 1200 baud
C126* Delay 3000 s 0.2 s {0.1 s} 10 s
(Monitoring ser. 10 s {1 s} 100 s
interface) 100 s {10 s} 3600 s
C128* Delay for C116 0.000 s 0.000 s {0.001 s} 240.000 s Signal delay times for FDO 1...5 and relay
output.
C130* Enable 0 -0- Tir (C012) / Tif (C013) active If the Ti times are enabled via terminal,
additional Ti -1- Tir1 / Tif1 active C130 is for display only.
times ...
-15- Tir15 / Tif15 active
C131*¤ Ramp function 0 -0- Enable ramp function generator If ramp function generator STOP (main
generator STOP -1- Stop ramp function generator setpoint) is enabled via terminal, C131 is
for display only.
C132*¤ Ramp function 0 -0- Enable mains setpoint at RFG input
generator input -1- Ramp function generator input = 0
=0
[C134*] Ramp function 0 -0- linear characteristic
generator -1- S-shaped characteristic
characteristic
C136* FDI state Bit Free digital input Only readable via LECOM. C136 indicates
0 FDI 1 the states of the digital inputs as a
... decimal or binary value.The change of
3 FDI 4 polarity under C114 is considered in
C136.
4 FDI 5
7-132 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C145*¤ Input selection: 1 -1- Input terminals X1/1, X1/2 The functions set under C146 can be
Analog signal -2- Input terminals X1/3, X1/4 assigned to the input sources under
-3- Input terminal X1/6 C145. Double assignment is not possible.
-4- Input terminal X1/8 The function selected last is always
assigned to the input.
C145 = -1-, -2-, -3-, -4-, -5-, -6-:
-6- Digital frequency input X9 Determine the priority for these inputs
-7- Resolver under C147.
-8- Motor potentiometer output If C005 (configuration) is changed:
-9- Output process controller The freely selected assignments are
-10- Output arithmetic block 2 output 1 overwritten with a configuration-
-11- Fixed setpoint output dependent basic assignment. If necessary,
-12- Output arithmetic block 2 output 2 reassign functions.
-15 Output DT1 element output 1
-16 Output DT1 element output 2
-29- nact from C382
-30- nset from C050
-31- Deviation at n-controller (xw)
-32- Deviation at process controller (xw)
-33- Ramp function generator output
-34- n-controller output
-35- Square-wave generator
-36- Deviation at angle controller
-37- RFG output of process controller setpoint
conditioning
-38- RFG output of process controller evaluation
-39- AIF process controller setpoint
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-133
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

[C146*] Function for -0- No function C146 = -4- Vpn of the n-controller
C145 -1- Main setpoint of C046 corresponds to 0% at the input Vp2 under
-2- Input for torque selection C320 and 100% at the input Vpn under
-3- Additional setpoint of C049 C070.
-4- Vpn of the speed controller
-5- Field current setpoint C146 = -5- field current setpoint
-6- Process controller: setpoint (C330) correspond to 100% at the input of the
rated current under C083. The minimum
-7- Process controller: actual value
adjustable value is determined under
-8- Process controller: evaluation (C331) C231.
-9- Process controller: ext. Vp setting
-10- C027 of X5 C146 = -43-, -44-, -46- are for display
-11- C027 of X9 only (according to the configuration). They
-12- Gearbox factor (C032) cannot be assigned.
-13- Angle trimming of C256
-14- Speed trimming of C257
-17- Fixed setpoint block input
-20- Dead band element input (C622)
-21- DT1 element input (C652)
-22- Absolute value generator input (C660)
-23- Limiting element input (C632)
-24- PT1 element input (C641)
-35- FAI input of the S&H module
-36- AIF process controller: act. value
-37- Limiting element 2 input (C637)
-42- Input for ext. excitation characteristic
-43- nact of C051 (for tacho feedback)
-44- nact of C051 (for resolver or incremental
encoder feedback)
-46- Digital frequency setpoint
[C147*] Priority for C145 -0- Terminal function not active, if terminal
7-134 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C148 Additional 0 -100.0 % Mmax {0.1%} +100.0 % Mmax Display only with terminal control. If the
torque value 1 -200 % Mmax {1%} +200 % Mmax terminal control is deactivated, the actual
opera tion. Armature setting range: 100 %
Mmax correspond to 100 % Imax (C022,
C023)
C149 Additional 0 -100.0 % Mmax {0.1%} +100.0 % Mmax Display only with terminal control. If the
torque value 2 -200 % Mmax {1%} +200 % Mmax terminal control is deactivated, the actual
opera tion. Armature setting range: 100 %
Mmax correspond to 100 % Imax
(C022/C023)
C151* FDO Bit Free digital output C151 indicates the states of the digital
Status 0 FDO 1 outputs as decimal or binary values. The
... polarity reversal under C118 is not
11 FDO 12 considered.
12 Relay output
[C180*] 4Q/2Q -0- 4Q operation (49XX) Important for controller type 48XX:
operation -1- 2Q operation (48XX) Controllers must only be operated with
C180 = -1-!
Fault PR sets C180 = -0-. It is absolutely
necessary to set C180 = -1- before
commissioning.
C182* Ti time of the 20.0 s 0.01 s {0.01s} 1s Ti time for the S-shape ramp function
S-shape 1s {0.1s} 10s generator of the main setpoint
ramp function 10s {1s} 50s
generators
C183 Origin of Display Origin of ctrl inhibit Display: Source which has inhibited the
controller inhibit Terminal or term. Terminal controller
Keypad or kp Keypad (STP key)
LECOM1 or L1 LECOM1 interface
Aut.int. (AIF) Automation / fieldbus interface
(module, InterBus, PROFIBUS, ...)
oth. src. Other source
or o.s. Release: TRIP or message
Information: C065, C067
C185 Motor power -500.0 kW {0.1 kW} 500.0 kW Display: actual motor power
C186 Motor torque -999 Nm {1 Nm} 999 Nm Display: actual motor torque
C187 Field current 0.00 A {0.01 A} 50.0 A Display: actual field current setpoint
setpoint
C188 Actual field 0.00 A {0.01 A} 50.0 A Display: actual field current value
current
C189 Mains 0.0 Hz {0.1 Hz} 100.0 Hz Display: actual mains frequency
frequency
-2- Output = C046 - C049
-3- Output = C046 ¼ C049
-4- Output = C046 / |C049|
-5- Output = C046 / (100% - C049)
-2- Output = C338 - C339
-3- Output = C338 ¼ C339
-4- Output = C338 / |C339|
-5- Output = C338 / (100% - C339)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-135
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C192*¤ Input selection: 1 -1- Selection fixed setpoint 1 It is possible to set up to 15 setpoints with
Fixed setpoint -2- Selection fixed setpoint 2 freely selectable references:
... 1.Select fixed setpoint under C192.
-15- Selection fixed setpoint 15 2.Assign value under C193.
3.Enable via the digital inputs or C194.
C193* Setpoint for -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 %
C192 100.0% Fixed setpoint 1
75.0% Fixed setpoint 2
...
C194*¤ Enable fixed 0 -0- Free input is active
setpoint -1- Fixed setpoint 1 is active
...
-15- Fixed setpoint 15 is active
C195* Delay 9999 s 0.00s {0.01 s} 1s Delay between signal ’engage brake’ and
between 1s {0.1s} 10s automatic controller inhibit
’engage brake’ 10s {1s} 250s 9999 s:
and controller 9999 s Unlimited delay, controller will not be
inhibit inhibited.
C196* Delay between 0.00s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s Delay between reset of the quick stop
’setpoint 1s {0.1s} 10s function and enable of the main setpoint
integrator free’ 10s {1s} 100s integrator
and quick stop 100s {10s} 250s
[C197*] Sign of the 0 -0- Sign is determined by the torque setpoint Sign of the torque selection between reset
torque selection -1- positive sign of QSP and enable of the setpoint
-2- negative sign integrators
[C198*] Enable actual 0 -0- Filter not active

speed filter -1- Filter active
C199* Time constant 10ms 8ms {1ms} 100ms
act. speed filter
C200* Software String format: ”33S4902M_61000” Display of the software version only via
identification interface.
C220* Acceleration 0.00 s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s
time Tir of the 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
C221* Deceleration 0.00 s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1s
time Tif of the 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
C222* Vp process 1 0.1 {0.1} 10 Gain of the process controller
controller 10 {1.0} 500
[C223*] Tn process 400 ms 20 ms {1ms} 20000 ms
controller 9999 ms Tn = 9999 ms: I-component switched-off
C224* Kd process 0.0 0.0 ¼ Vpn {0.1 ¼ Vpn} 5.0 ¼ Vpn Differential component of the process
controller controller
[C230*] Control mode 0 -0- Limitation of the armature voltage Field weakening must be permitted under
for the override -1- Control of the armature voltage C231.
field control
7-136 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C231* Min. field 100% 10 % IFrated {1% IFrated} 100% IFrated Reference: IFrated (C083), observe min.
current value under C083!
C232* I¼R 0.0% 0.0 % Vrated {0.1% Vrated } +30 % Vrated Reference: Vrated (C090)
compensation
C233* Vp-Vab controller 1.0 0.1 {0.1} 10 Gain of the Vab controller
10 {1.0} 50
[C234*] Tn-Vab controller 400 ms 20 ms {10 ms} 2000 ms
9999 ms Tn = 9999 ms: I-component switched-off
[C235*] Excitation 0 -0- internal excitation characteristic active With C253= -1-, the control process is
characteristic -1- internal excitation characteristic not active based on operation with rated excitation
[C237*] Synchronisation 0 -0- dyn. IMP, 20 ms correction
mode -1- no dyn. IMP, 20 ms correction
-2- dyn. IMP, 400 ms correction
-3- no dyn. IMP, 400 ms correction
C240* Window 1% 0 % nmax {0.1% nmax} +100% nmax Threshold for nact=nset , reference: nmax
nact = nset
C241 Window 1% 0 % nmax {0.1% nmax} +100% nmax Threshold ramp function generator input
RFG on = = ramp function generator output,
RFG off reference: nmax
C242* Threshold 1000 100 rpm {1 rpm} 5000rpm
|nact| nx rpm
C243* Threshold 1% 0 % nmax {0.1 % nmax} +100 % nmax Threshold for
nset > nx 'C046| or 'C049| > nx , reference: n max
C244* Threshold 10% 0 % IAmax {0.1% IAmax} +100 % IAmax 'IA|>Ix

'IA|> Ix Reference, rated controller current
(armature)
C245* Threshold 10% 0 % IFmax {0.1% IFmax} +100% IFmax IF> Ix ,
IF > Ix Reference, rated controller current (field)
C249*¤ LECOM1 code 1 0 {1} 7 Fixed address offset:
bank LECOM1 interface (protocol LECOM A/B)
can address codes > 255.
C252* Angle offset 0 inc -245760000 inc {1 inc} 245760000 inc Fixed angle offset with digital frequency
configurations (C005 = -5X-, -6X-, -72-)
Format for LECOM: 0.022 (LECOM)
correspond to 220 incr.
C253* Angle offset 0 inc -8190 inc {1} 8190 inc Speed-dependent angle offset
C254* Vp angle 0.33 0.00 {0.01} 1.00 Gain of the angle controller
controller
C255* Following error 220 inc 10 inc {1 inc} 536750000 inc Only active if C254 > 0!
limit Format for LECOM: 0.022 (LECOM)
C256* Angle trimming 0 inc -32768 inc {1 inc} 32767 inc Angle offset with digital frequency con-
figurations (C005 = -5X-, -6X- and -72-)
correspond to 220 incr. If an analog signal
source (C145/C146) is assigned, the
parameter will be displayed only.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-137
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C257* Speed trimming 0 rpm -5000 rpm {1} +5000 rpm Fixed speed offset with digital frequency
configurations (C005 = -5X-, -6X- and
-72-). If an analog signal source
(C145/C146) is assigned, the parameter
will be displayed only.
C260* Upper motor 100% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % C260 must be higher than C261!
potentiometer
limit
C261* Lower motor 0% -100.0 % {0.1%} +100.0 % C261 must be smaller than C260!
potentiometer
limit
C262* Motor pot. 10 s 1s {1 s} 5000 s C262 is activated if the motor
acceleration potentiometer terminal is set to ”UP”
time Reference: Change of 0...100%
C263* Motor pot. 10 s 1s {1 s} 5000 s C263 is activated if the motor
deceleration potentiometer terminal is set to ”DOWN”
time Reference: Change of 0...100%
C264*¤ Motor 0 -0- No function, motor potentiometer is not Function which is executed when
potentiometer changed. deactivating the motor potentiometer
deactivation -1- Down to 0%, motor potentiometer output (terminal DEACTIVE is set).
function runs with the corresponding acceleration or
deceleration time to 0%.
-2- Down to lowest limit, motor potentiometer
acceleration or deceleration time to the value
under C261.
-3- Jump to 0%, motor potentiometer output
immediately changes to 0%.
-4- Jump to the lowest level, motor
potentiometer immediately changes to the
value indicated under C261.
-5- Up to the highest level, motor potentiometer
acceleration or deceleration to the value
C265*¤ Initialisation 0 -0- Acceptance of the saved value S&H output Function which is executed when
function accepts the value which was set before switching on the mains.
Sample & Hold switching the mains.
-1- Lower limit, S&H output accepts the value of
C261.
C266* Motor pot.: 100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Under C266, the motor potentiometer can
Operation via also be operated with ▲ and ▼.
keypad Display: Output value of the motor
potentiometer in % and exact value of
control program.
C267*¤ Sample and 0 -0- S&H for motor potentiometer output
Hold function -1- S&H for FAI signal
C270* Analog/ -16384 {1} 16384 Display: Value assigned and digitized via
digital C145 / C146
conversion 1 Output only via interfaces
C271* Analog/ digital -16384 {1} 16384 Display: Value assigned and digitized via
conversion 2 C145 / C146
Output only via interfaces
C272* Digital/ -16384 {1} 16384 Input: Value for the conversion into an
analog analog signal is to be entered via the
conversion 1 monitor outputs X4/62, X4/63 or digital
frequency output X8.
Input only via interfaces.
7-138 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C273* Digital/ -16384 {1} 16384 Input: Value for the conversion into an
analog analog signal is to be entered via the
conversion 2 monitor outputs X4/62, X4/63 or digital
frequency output X8. Input only via
interfaces.
C280*¤ Additional 0 -0- Additional setpoint is on

setpoint on/off -1- Additional setpoint is off
C282*¤ Function for 0 -0- Function C047 = 100% - [input source]
C047 -1- Function C047 = [input source]
C285* Limitation of 40 1 {1} 1000 Limitation of rate of rise at the armature
rate of rise current controller input. Time:
-IAmax to + IAmax = C285ô t15°electr.
C286* Upper limit of 180% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Upper limit of the speed setpoint for C050
the speed -180 % {1 %} +180 % C286 must be higher than C287!
setpoint
C287* Lower limit of -180% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Upper limit of the speed setpoint for C050
the speed -180 % {1 %} +180 % C287 must be smaller than C286!
setpoint
C310* Speed 100% 0.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Valid for speed under C313
dependent C310 must be higher than C311!
current
limitation
Limit value 1
C311* Speed 100% 0.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Valid for speed under C314
dependent C311 must be smaller than C310!
current
limitation
Limit value 2
C312* n0 3000 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm Act. speed threshold (current limitation),
Speed rpm condition: n1 >n0
dependent
current
limitation
C313* n1 4000 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm Act. speed threshold for limit value 1
Speed rpm condition: n2 > n1 > n0
dependent
current
limitation
C314* n2 5000 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm Act. speed threshold for limit value 2
Speed rpm condition: n2 > n1 > n0
dependent
current
limitation
C316* Reduced field 20 % 0 % IFrated {1 % IFrated } 100 % IFrated Reference: IFrated (C083)
current With 0%, the pulses of the field controller
are inhibited.
C317* Time delay for 60 s 0.0 s {0.1 s} 10 s Time which is required to activate the
the reduced 10 s {1 s} 100 s reduced field current after inhibiting the
field current 100 s {10 s} 3600 s controller.
C318*¤ Activate field 0 -0- Field current reduction function is off
current -1- Field current reduction function is on
reduction
C319* Actual Vp of the 1 {1} 1000 Display: Actual gain factor of the n-
n- controller controller (important for n-controller
adaption)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-139
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C320* Vp2 of the n- 8 1 {1} 1000 Second gain factor for speed controller
controller adaption
adaption
C321* Vp3 of the n- 8 1 {1} 1000 Third gain factor for speed controller
controller adaption
adaption
C322* n1 of the n- 3000 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm Speed setpoint threshold of speed
controller rpm controller adaption, condition: n1 >n0
adaption
C323* n0 of the n- 50 rpm 0 rpm {1 rpm} 5000 rpm Speed setpoint threshold of speed
controller controller adaption, condition: n1 >n0
adaption
C324*¤ n-controller 0 -0- n-controller adaption is off
adaption on/off -1- n-controller adaption is on
C325* Vp2 of the 1 0.1 {0.1} 10 Second gain factor for process controller
process 10 {1} 500 adaption
controller
adaption
C326* Vp3 of the 1 0.1 {0.1} 10 Third gain factor for process controller
process 10 {1} 500 adaption
controller
adaption
C327* set2 of the 100 % 0.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Setpoint speed threshold of the process
process controller adaption, condition: set2 > set1
controller
adaption
C328* set1 of the 0% 0.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Setpoint speed threshold of the process
process controller adaption, condition: set2 > set1
controller
adaption
C329*¤ Process 0 -0- Process controller adaption is off
controller -1- Process controller adaption is on
adaption on/off
C330* Setpoint of the 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % If an analog signal source (C145/C146) is
process assigned, the parameter will be displayed
controller only.
C331* Evaluation of 100 % -100.0 % {0.1%} 100.0 % If an analog signal source (C145/C146) is
the process ctrl. assigned, the parameter will be displayed
output only.
C332* Acceleration 0.00 s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1.00 s
time Tir of the 1.0 s {0.1 s} 10.0 s
process 10 s {1 s} 100 s
controller 100 s {10 s} 990 s
setpoint
C333* Deceleration 0.00 s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1.00 s
time Tif of the 1.0 s {0.1 s} 10.0 s
process ctrl. 10 s {1 s} 100 s
C334* Acceleration 0.00 s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1.00 s
time Tir of the 1.0 s {0.1 s} 10.0 s
evaluation 100 s {10 s} 990 s
C335* Deceleration 0.00 s 0.00 s {0.01 s} 1.00 s
time Tif of the 1.0 s {0.1 s} 10.0 s
evaluation 100 s {10 s} 990 s
7-140 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C336* Actual Vp of the 0.1 {0.1} 500.0 Display: Actual gain factor of the process
process controller (important for process controller
controller adaption)
arithmetic -200 %{1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
block 2 only.
block 2 only.
C370*¤ Enable -0- No communication via automation interface
automation -1- Communication via automation interface
interface enabled
C380* nset speed -16384 {1} 16384 High precision main setpoint selection:
16384 100% under C046
Input only via interface.
C381* nset at -32767 {1} 32767 High precision setpoint display:
n-controller Input of the speed controller,
16384 100% under C050.
C382* Actual speed -32767 {1} 32767 High precision display: Act. speed value
16384 nmax under C011.
C387* Torque limit -16384 {1} 16384 High precision torque setpoint selection:
16384 100% under C047.
C388* Torque setpoint -16384 {1} 16384 High precision torque setpoint display:
16384 100% under C056.
C391* Actual angle 0 {1} 65535 High precision display of the actual angle
if resolver or incremental encoder operate
as feedback system:
16384 360 1 revolution.
C392* Field current 0 {1} 16384 High precision display of the field current
setpoint setpoint:
16384 IFN under C083.
C393* Additional -16384 {1} 16384 High precision additional setpoint display:
setpoint 16384 100% under C049.
C580* Input 1, 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % If an analog signal source (C145/C146) is
comparator 1 -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
only.
limit value for -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
comparator 1 only.
C582* Hysteresis for 0% 0.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Lower threshold = C581 - C582,
lower threshold reference: C581
comparator 1
C583* Memory -0- Memory function not active
function when resettingthe output, the value falls below
comparator 1 the lower threshold (C581 - C582)
The output remains set after inital switching
on.
C584*¤ Reset function -0- Reset function not active The activation resets the output.
comparator 1 -1- Reset function active
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-141
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

comparator 2 -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, only the parameter will be
displayed.
limit value for -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, only the parameter will be
comparator 2 displayed.
C592* Hysteresis for 0% 0.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % Lower threshold = C591 - C592,
lower threshold reference: C591
comparator 2
function when resetting the output, the value falls
comparator 2 below the lower threshold (C591 - C592)
The output remains set after inital switching
on.
C594*¤ Reset function -0- Reset function not active The activation resets the output.
comparator 2 -1- Reset function active

-2- Output = C601 - C602
-3- Output = C601 ¼ C602
-4- Output = C601 / |C602|
-5- Output = C601 / (100% - C602)
block 3 only.
arithmetic -200 % {1%} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
block 3 only.
7-142 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C610* Input 1, addition 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % If an analog signal source (C145/C146) is
block 1 -200 % {1 %} +200 % assigned, the parameter will be displayed
only.
only.
only.
only.
only.
only.
C620* Gain dead band 1.00 -10.00 {0.01} +10.00
element
C621* Dead band, 1.0 % 0.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 %
dead band
element
C622* Input, dead 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
band element -200 % {1 %} +200 %
C630* Limiting 100 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % C630 must be higher than C631!
element 1 -200 % {1 %} +200 %
upper limit
C631* Limiting -100 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % C631 must be lower than C630!
element 1 -200 % {1 %} +200 %
lower limit
C632* Input, limiting 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
element 1 -200 % {1 %} +200 %
C635* Limiting 100 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % C635 must be higher than C636!
element 2 -200 % {1 %} +200 %
upper limit
C636* Limiting -100 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % C636 must be lower than C635!
element 2 -200 % {1 %} +200 %
lower limit
C637* Input, limiting 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
element 2 -200 % {1 %} +200 %
C640* PT1 element 20ms 0.01 s {0.01 s} 1s
Time constant 1s {0.1 s} 10 s
10 s {1 s} 50 s
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-143
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

C641* Input, 0 % -100.0 % {0.1 %} 100.0 % Display parameter only
PT1 element -200 % {1 %} +200 %
C650* Gain 1.00 -10.00 {0.01} +10.00
DT1 element
C651* DT1 element 1.0 s 0.01 s {0.01 s} 1.00 s
Time constant 1.0 s {0.1 s} 5.0 s
DT1 element -200 % {1 %} +200 %
C653* Input sensitivity, -1- 15 bit evaluation
DT1 element -2- 14 bit evaluation
absolute value -200 % {1 %} +200 %
generator
C670* Square 0% -100.0 % {0.1 %} +100.0 % C670 must be higher than C671!
generator
upper limit
C671* Square 0% -100.0 % {0.1%} +100.0 % C671 must be smaller than C670!
generator
lower limit
C672* Switch-over 0.1 s 0.1 s {0.1 s} 10.0 s
time of the 10 s {1 s} 100 s
square 100 s {10 s} 3000 s
generator
7-144 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7.10 Table of attributes

The information given in this attribute table is required for generating a
programmme. It contains all information about the communication to the controller
via parameters:
Column Meaning Entry
Code Name of the Lenze codes Cxxxx
Index dec Index, under which the parameter 24575Lenze code Is only required for control via
is defined. number InterBus or PROFIBUS.
hex The subindex of array variables 5FFhLenze code
corresponds to the Lenze number
subcode number.
Data DS Data structure E Simple variable (one parameter value)
A Array variable (several parameter
elements can be selected through the
code for input selection or via LECOM
subcode)
I Image variable (several parameter
elements can be selected through the
code for input selection).
DA Number of array elements xx
(Subcodes)
DT Data type B8 1 byte bit coded
B16 2 byte bit coded
FIX32 32 bit value with sign; decimal with
four decimal codes
Example:
12
1.2 12000FIX32-dec
FIX32 dec
00002EEOFIX32-hex
-10.45 -104500FIX32-dec
FFFE67CCFIX32-hex
I16 2 byte with sign
(-32768 $ X $ 32767)
I32 4 byte with sign
(-2147483648$X $2147483647)
N16 16 bit value with sign
0% 0; 100% 214
Example:
100% 16384N16-dec
4000N16-hex
-50% -8192N16-dec
E000N16-hex
U16 2 byte without sign
( 0 $X $ 65535)
VS ASCII string
format LECOM format VD ASCII decimal format
(see Operating Instructions for VH ASCII hexadecimal format
fieldbus modules) VS String format
DL Data length in byte
Access P/S Parameter setting / control P Parameter setting
(according to C001) S Control
LCM-R/W
LCM R/W Access authorization for LECOM Ra Reading is always permitted
Wa Writing is always permitted
W Writing depends on condition
AIF Proceß datum in automation PZD Process datum
interface
Mapping to LECOM2 process
data channel possible
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-145
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
Code Index Data Access

dec hex DS DA DT Format DL S/P LCM-R/ AIF-PZD
W
C000 24575 5FFFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra -
C001 24574 5FFEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 - Ra/Wa -
C002 24573 5FFDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C003 24572 5FFCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C004 24571 5FFBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C005 24570 5FFAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C009 24566 5FF6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C011 24564 5FF4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C012 24563 5FF3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C013 24562 5FF2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C017 24558 5FEEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C019 24556 5FECh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C022 24553 5FE9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C023 24552 5FE8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C025 24550 5FE6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C026 24549 5FE5h I 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C027 24548 5FE4h I 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C028 24547 5FE3h I 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C029 24546 5FE2h I 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C030 24545 5FE1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C032 24543 5FDFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C033 24542 5FDEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C034 24541 5FDDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C038 24537 5FD9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C039 24536 5FD8h A 15 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C040 24535 5FD7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C041 24534 5FD6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C042 24533 5FD5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C043 24532 5FD4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C045 24530 5FD2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C046 24529 5FD1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C047 24528 5FD0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C049 24526 5FCEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C050 24525 5FCDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C051 24524 5FCCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C052 24523 5FCBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C054 24521 5FC9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C056 24519 5FC7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C060 24515 5FC3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C061 24514 5FC2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C063 24512 5FC0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C065 24510 5FBEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra -
C066 24509 5FBDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra -
C067 24508 5FBCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra -
C068 24507 5FBBh E 1 B16 VH 2 S Ra -
C069 24506 5FBAh E 1 B8 VH 1 S Ra -
C070 24505 5FB9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C071 24504 5FB8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C072 24503 5FB7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C075 24500 5FB4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C076 24499 5FB3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C077 24498 5FB2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C078 24497 5FB1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C079 24496 5FB0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C081 24494 5FAEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C082 24493 5FADh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C083 24492 5FACh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C084 24491 5FABh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
7-146 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

W
C085 24490 5FAAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C087 24488 5FA8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C088 24487 5FA7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C090 24485 5FA5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C093 24482 5FA2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra -
C094 24481 5FA1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C096 24479 5F9Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C097 24478 5F9Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C098 24477 5F9Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C099 24476 5F9Ch E 1 VS VS 6 P Ra -
C100 24475 5F9Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C101 24474 5F9Ah A 15 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C103 24472 5F98h A 15 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C105 24470 5F96h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C108 24467 5F93h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C109 24466 5F92h A 2 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C110 24465 5F91h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C111 24464 5F90h A 3 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C112 24463 5F8Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C113 24462 5F8Eh A 5 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C114 24461 5F8Dh A 5 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C115 24460 5F8Ch A 5 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C116 24459 5F8Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C117 24458 5F8Ah A 13 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C118 24457 5F89h A 13 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C119 24456 5F88h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C120 24455 5F87h A 23 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C123 24452 5F84h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C124 24451 5F83h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C125 24450 5F82h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C126 24449 5F81h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C128 24447 5F7Fh A 13 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C130 24445 5F7Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C131 24444 5F7Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C132 24443 5F7Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C134 24441 5F79h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C136 24439 5F77h E 1 B16 VH 2 S Ra PZD
C145 24430 5F6Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C146 24429 5F6Dh A 43 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C147 24428 5F6Ch A 7 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C148 24427 5F6Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C149 24426 5F6Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C151 24424 5F68h E 1 B16 VH 2 S Ra PZD
C161 24414 5F5Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C162 24413 5F5Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C163 24412 5F5Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C164 24411 5F5Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C165 24410 5F5Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C166 24409 5F59h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C167 24408 5F58h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C168 24407 5F57h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C180 24395 5F4Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C182 24393 5F49h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C183 24392 5F48h E 1 VS VS 16 S Ra -
C185 24390 5F46h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C186 24389 5F45h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C187 24388 5F44h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
C188 24387 5F43h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra/W -
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-147
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

W
C189 24386 5F42h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C190 24385 5F41h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C191 24384 5F40h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C192 24383 5F3Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C193 24382 5F3Eh A 15 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C194 24381 5F3Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C195 24380 5F3Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C196 24379 5F3Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C197 24378 5F3Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C198 24377 5F39h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C199 24376 5F38h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C200 24375 5F37h E 1 VS VS 14 P Ra -
C201 24374 5F36h E 1 VS VS 20 P Ra -
C220 24355 5F23h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C221 24354 5F22h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C222 24353 5F21h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C223 24352 5F20h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C224 24351 5F1Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C230 24345 5F19h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C231 24344 5F18h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C232 24343 5F17h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C233 24342 5F16h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C234 24341 5F15h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C235 24340 5F14h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C237 24338 5F12h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C240 24335 5F0Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C241 24334 5F0Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C242 24333 5F0Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C243 24332 5F0Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C244 24331 5F0Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C245 24330 5F0Ah E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C249 24326 5F06h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C252 24323 5F03h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C253 24322 5F02h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C254 24321 5F01h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C255 24320 5F00h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C256 24319 5EFFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C257 24318 5EFEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C260 24315 5EFBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C261 24314 5EFAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C262 24313 5EF9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C263 24312 5EF8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C264 24311 5EF7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C265 24310 5EF6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C266 24309 5EF5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C267 24308 5EF4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C270 24305 5EF1h E 1 I16 VH 2 S Ra -
C271 24304 5EF0h E 1 I16 VH 2 S Ra -
C272 24303 5EEFh E 1 I32 VH 4 P Ra/W -
C273 24302 5EEEh E 1 I32 VH 4 P Ra/W -
C280 24295 5EE7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C281 24294 5EE6h E 1 VS VS 16 P Ra -
C282 24293 5EE5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C285 24290 5EE2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C286 24289 5EE1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C287 24288 5EE0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C300 24275 5ED3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C310 24265 5EC9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
7-148 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

W
C311 24264 5EC8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C312 24263 5EC7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C313 24262 5EC6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C314 24261 5EC5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C316 24259 5EC3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C317 24258 5EC2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C318 24257 5EC1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C319 24256 5EC0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C320 24255 5EBFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C321 24254 5EBEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C322 24253 5EBDh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C323 24252 5EBCh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C324 24251 5EBBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C325 24250 5EBAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C326 24249 5EB9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C327 24248 5EB8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C328 24247 5EB7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C329 24246 5EB6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C330 24245 5EB5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C331 24244 5EB4h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C332 24243 5EB3h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C333 24242 5EB2h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C334 24241 5EB1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C335 24240 5EB0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C336 24239 5EAFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C338 24237 5EADh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C339 24236 5EACh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C370 24205 5E8Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C380 24195 5E83h E 1 N16 VH 2 P Ra/W PZD
C381 24194 5E82h E 1 I16 VH 2 P Ra -
C382 24193 5E81h E 1 I16 VH 2 P Ra PZD
C387 24188 5E7Ch E 1 I16 VH 2 P Ra/W PZD
C388 24187 5E7Bh E 1 I16 VH 2 P Ra PZD
C391 24184 5E78h E 1 U16 VH 2 P Ra PZD
C392 24183 5E77h E 1 N16 VH 2 P Ra PZD
C393 24182 5E76h E 1 N16 VH 2 P Ra PZD
C580 23995 5DBBh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C581 23994 5DBAh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C582 23993 5DB9h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C583 23992 5DB8h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C584 23991 5DB7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C590 23985 5DB1h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C591 23984 5DB0h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C592 23983 5DAFh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C593 23982 5DAEh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C594 23981 5DADh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C600 23975 5DA7h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C601 23974 5DA6h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C602 23973 5DA5h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C610 23965 5D9Dh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C611 23964 5D9Ch E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C612 23963 5D9Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C614 23961 5D99h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C615 23960 5D98h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C616 23959 5D97h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C620 23955 5D93h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C621 23954 5D92h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C622 23953 5D91h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-149
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration

W
C630 23945 5D89h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C631 23944 5D88h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C632 23943 5D87h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C635 23940 5D84h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C636 23939 5D83h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C637 23938 5D82h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C640 23935 5D7Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C641 23934 5D7Eh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C650 23925 5D75h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C651 23924 5D74h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C652 23923 5D73h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C653 23922 5D72h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C660 23915 5D6Bh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 S Ra -
C670 23905 5D61h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C671 23904 5D60h E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
C672 23903 5D5Fh E 1 FIX32 VD 4 P Ra/W -
7-150 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
48XX/49XXSHB0399
7-151
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Configuration
7-152 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--E
00408854
Manual
Part E
Troubleshooting and
fault elimination
Maintenance
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
revised
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Troubleshooting and fault elimination
8 Troubleshooting and fault elimination
Warning!
During troubleshooting, the drive should always be disconnected from the mains
supply for safety reasons.
The controller is equipped with several functions to protect it from impermissible

operating conditions. If one of the protection functions is activated, the controller
sets Pulse Inhibit (IMP) or TRIP, warning or message and/or resets the signal
”Ready for operation (RDY) - depending on the monitoring selected.
( Faults during operation are immediately displayed or indicated through a
status information (chapter 8.1).
( The fault can be analysed with the history buffer (chapter 8.2) and the list in
chapter 8.3.
( The list in chapter 8.3 indicates how to eliminate the fault.
8.1 Troubleshooting
8.1.1 Display on the operating unit of the controller

The LEDs RDY and IMP show the controller status.
FAIL = 3 : TRIP or message or warning is active
FAIL RDY IMP Check
P 3 P Controller enabled; no fault
3 P 3 C065, C066, C067
P P 3 C183, C067
P 3 3 C183
3 3 P C065, C066
3 3 3 C065, C066, C067, C183
3 : on P : off
48XX/49XXSHB0399
8-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
RDY
In general, the RDY message will be reset if the machine cannot generate a torque
when running with the command ”Controller enable” or if the mains supply for the
control electronics is switched-off (mains switch-off detection).
RDY is off when
( TRIP is displayed
( the communication with the automation module could not be established
after mains connection (only with C370 = -1-)
( the field current could not be built up after mains connection.
RDY will be reset for a short period of time when
( a new parameter set is loaded via terminal control
( a short-term mains fault (3-phases) occurs ( > 25ms).
Imax
Imax is on when
( the speed controller operates at its limit.
IMP
IMP is on when
( the switch Ctrl. enable is opened or another source of the controller inhibit is
active (check C183)
( a mains undervoltage or mains overvoltage is applied.
IMP is on sporadically when
( short-term mains faults occur (e.g. with weak mains)
During IMP, the ignition pulses in the armature circuit are inhibited.
The codes C065, C066 and C067 display the controller status in plain text.
8.1.2 Display via LECOM

The bits of the status word under C069 indicate the controller status (chapter 12.3).
8-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
8.2 Fault analysis with the history buffer

With the history buffer, faults can be traced. The fault messages are stored in the
history buffer in the order of their occurrence.
8.2.1 Structure of the history buffer

( The history buffer has eight memory locations, which can be retrieved
- under C065, C066 and C067 at the operating unit
- via the LECOM interface under codes C161 to C168 for TRIP messages.
( The first memory location is written only after the elimination or
acknowledgement of the active fault. The eighth from last fault is eliminated
in the history buffer and can no longer be read.
( The memory locations 1-8 contain information about the last to eighth from
last fault.
Code C0168
C063 Active message
C066 Active warning
C067 Active TRIP
C161 Memory location 1
48XX/49XXSHB0399
8-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
8.3 Fault messages
Note!
If the fault message is interrogated by a fieldbus, the fault message is represented
not by an abbreviation but a LECOM no. read from C167.
Display Cause Remedy

--- No fault - -
ACI Armature circuit Defective fuse in the armature circuit or cable Check armature fuse or remove cable
interrupted interruption interruption
CCr System fault Strong interference on control cables Screen control cables
Ground or earth loops in the wiring Check PE wiring (see chapter 4.4”Installation
of a CE-typical drive system”)
CE0 Communication fault Interference during transmission of control Check wiring
(automation interface) commands via the automation interface
CE9 Communication fault Faulty messages from the serial interface. Check wiring
(serial interface)
dEr Motor blocked High standstill torque or motor mechanically Remove motor blockage or increase blocking
blocked. time under C124 or blocking current under
C123.
EEr External fault (TRIP-Set) A digital input assigned to the TRIP-Set Check external encoder.
function has been activated Check polarity to activate TRIP set under
C118.
FCI Field circuit interrupted Defective field fuses F1 and F2 or Replace field fuses when no voltage is applied
interrupted field circuit. or remove cable interruption.
LF Mains underfrequency Mains frequency < 47Hz Check mains frequency,
controller must only be driven within a
frequency range from 47 to 63 Hz.
LU Undervoltage Mains voltage < 340 V or 410 V Increase electronics supply separately with a
(Variant 500 V mains voltage) connected transformer or
Mains synchronisation has not detected any use a controller with a lower mains connection
voltage zero for more than 25 ms. voltage.
LU1 Phase failure Failure of the mains voltage or mains Check mains voltage and remove mains
interruption interruption
Adapt mains synchronisation to mains
conditions under C237.
OC5 Controller overload Frequent or excessive acceleration with Check drive dimensioning
overcurrent
Permanent overload with IA >1.05 IArated
OC6 Motor is thermally Motor is thermally overloaded by, for instance, Check drive dimensioning
overloaded - impermissibly high continuous currents
- frequent and excessive
acceleration processes
OF Mains overfrequency Mains frequency > 63Hz Check mains frequency
Controller must only be driven within a
frequency range from 47 to 63 Hz.
OH Heat sink temperature is Allow controller to cool and ensure better
higher than the value set ventilation
in the controller Ambient temperature Check ambient temperature in the control
Tamb > 45 C or 35 C cabinet
Heat sink very dirty Clean heat sink
Incorrect mounting position Change mounting position
8-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Display Cause Remedy

OUE Mains overvoltage Mains voltage > 460V or 550V (500V variant) Reduce mains voltage with a preconnected
transformer or
use a controller with a higher mains
connection voltage.
P03 Following error Angle difference between set and actual Extend following limit with C255
position is larger than the following error limit Switch-off monitoring if required (C119/C120)
set under C255 Enable drive (Ctrl. enable)
Drive cannot follow the digital frequency (Imax Check drive dimensioning
limit)
P13 Angle overflow Angle controller limit reached Enable drive
Drive cannot follow the digital frequency (Imax Check drive dimensioning
limit)
PER Program interference A fault in the program sequence was detected Send controller with data (on diskette) to
Lenze
PR Parameter reset After switching on, a change in the software Set the required parameters and save settings
version has been detected. under C003.
Automatic loading of factory setting.
PR1 ... PR4 Parameter set error Fault when reading a parameter set Set the required parameters and save settings
CAUTION: under C003.
The factory setting is loaded automatically
Sd1 Tacho fault Short circuit or interruption of tacho cable Check tacho cables for short-circuit or
interruption and remove fault
Sd2 Resolver fault Resolver cable interrupted Check resolver cable for open circuit
Check resolver
Acknowledge fault by mains switching
Sd3 Encoder fault at Dig_In 1 Incremental encoder or digital frequency cable Check cable for open circuit
interrupted at X5 Assign input X5 PIN 8 with encoder potential
Input X5 PIN 8 not assigned or switch off monitoring (C119 / C120)
Sd4 Encoder fault at Dig_In 2 Incremental encoder or digital frequency cable Assign input X9 PIN 8 with encoder potential
interrupted at X9 or switch off monitoring (C119 / C120)
Input X9 PIN 8 not assigned
Sd5 Master current Interruption of the master current selection, Remove interruption of the set-value cable or
interrupted Imaster < 2mA select master selection 0...20 mA under C034
with master current selection 4...20mA, C034 = -0-
= -1-
SP Wrong signal source Tacho, resolver or fieldbus connection are Change tacho, resolver or fieldbus connection
polarity interchanged
U15 15V supply interfered Overload / short-circuit terminal 20 Check load at terminal 20
15 V supply defective Return controller
48XX/49XXSHB0399
8-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
8.4 Reset of fault indications
TRIP
After eliminating the fault, pulse inhibit will only be reset after the acknowledgement
of TRIP.
TRIP acknowledgement:
( Change to the parameter level of C067 and acknowledge with SH+PRG
( LECOM: C043 = 0
( Terminal X2/E2 (reset trip)
( Control word AIF
( Mains switching
Note!
If a TRIP source is still active, TRIP cannot be reset.
Message
After eliminating the fault, the pulse inhibit will be reset automatically.
8-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
8.5 Checking the drive system
Note!
The measurements should be made with a digital voltmeter. The stated measuring
values are rated values. In the event of deviations, a defect has occured.
8.5.1 Checking the motor
Warning!
( The measurements described must only be carried out by specialists.

( Disconnect the motor from the mains.
( Tests should only be carried out when no voltage is applied!
Measurement Measuring point Measured value

Armature resistance A B at the controller RA < 10 W
Insulation resistance of the armature A earth potential R
B earth potential
Field resistance I K RF < 1kW
Insulation resistance of the field I earth potential R
K earth potential
48XX/49XXSHB0399
8-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
8.5.2 Checking the controller
Checking the power stage
Warning!
( The measurements described must only be carried out by specialists.

( Disconnect the controller from the mains.
( Tests should only be carried out when no voltage is applied!
Measurement Measuring point Measuring value

Semiconductor fuse
l at the mains input R 0 W
l armature fuse R 0 W
Internal fuses R 0 W
Thyristors Disconnect armature cables:
A B at the controller R
B A at the controller R
Field controller Disconnect field cables:
I+, K- R
I-, K+ (free-wheeling diode) R > 200kW (diode 0.5V)
Checking the control board 4902MP

Checking the voltage supply:
( Wire up the controller completely
( Set controller inhibit (X2/28 open)
( Switch on the mains
Notes Measuring point Measured value
+ Vcc 15 V X2/20 X3/40 + 14.25 V...+ 15.75 V
+ Vref 10 V X1/9 X3/40 + 9.79 V...+ 10.21 V
-Vref 10 V X1/10 X3/40 -9.79 V... -10.21 V
8-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Maintenance
9 Maintenance
9.1 Maintenance
- The controller is free of maintenance if the prescribed operating condi-
tions are maintained (see chapter 3.2).
- If the ambient air is polluted, the air vents of the controller may be ob-
structed.
- Check the air vents periodically (depending on the degree of pollution):
- Free the obstructed air vents using a vacuum cleaner.
Stop!
Do not use sharp or pointed objects, such as knives or screw drivers to clean the
air vents.
9.2 Service addresses

The addresses of the Lenze representatives all over the world are listed on the last
page of every Lenze document.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
9-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Maintenance
9-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Maintenance
48XX/49XXSHB0399
9-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Maintenance
9-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
10 DC-bus connection
11 Application of brake units
This chapter is part of the Lenze documentation structure.
For 48XX/49XX DC controllers it is not applicable.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
11-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--H
00408856
Manual
Part H
Automation
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
revised
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
12 Automation
48XX/49XX controller can communicate with, for instance superimposed hosts
(PLC or PC) as well as operating units, which work according to the LECOM
protocol, by means of the serial interfaces LECOM.
12.1 LECOM1 interface

The serial interface X6, available as standard, complies with RS232C and RS485.
The LECOM1 interface can be used for parameter setting, monitoring, diagnostics
and simple control tasks (see chapter 4.3.8).
The LECOM-A/B protocol is based on ISO 1745 and supports up to 90 controllers.
It detects faults and avoids transmission faults.
12.2 LECOM2 interface (option)

For increased demands, use fieldbus connection modules. The modules are
available as operations and can be integrated in the controller. For parameter
setting, the interface is called LECOM2. The following bus systems are available:
( InterBus interface module 2110 (variant V011)
( PROFIBUS interface module 2130 (variant V013)
12.3 LECOM code number

The following codes have a special meaning for serial communciation. The codes
C043, C068, C069 are not displayed.
( LECOM1 controller address
Enter the bus participant numbers required for communication via interface under
code C009. It is possible to assign addresses from 1 to 99. ”10”, ”20”, ”30”...”90”
are reserved for broadcast telegrams.
( Fault display and reset
Under code C043 faults can be indicated and reset.
Parameter 0 = no fault
Parameter 1 = fault (reset: parameter input = 0)
Note!
Fault message can only be reset, after the fault has been eliminated.
( Display of the operating state
48XX/49XXSHB0399
12-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
The operating state of the controller is indicated under C068. angezeigt.

Bit No. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Signal TRIP Imax QSP IMP Run nact= 0 Ctrl. Communication error Operation error
enab
le
( Display of the operating state of the controller.

The operating state of the controller is displayed under C069.
Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Signal Ctrl. xxx RESET AUTO REMOT PCHG CALARM BALARM
enable
Meaning Controller Controller Terminal LECOM Operating Communicatio Operation
enable reset control control mode changed n error error
( LECOM1 baud rate

The baud rate can be set under C125.
C125*¤ Baud rate 0 -0- 9600 baud
changeover -1- 4800 baud
for -2- 2400 baud
interface -3- 1200 baud
Note!
For communication via modem please contact Lenze.
( History of the reset fault

Codes C161 to C168 indicate the last 8 TRIPs stored. The fault reset last is
( LECOM1 code bank
With version 1.0 of the LECOM-A/B protocol only codes up to C255 can be
processed. The access range of this version can be changed under C249 so that
it is possible to reach higher codes. Code C249 does not exist in every code range.
Parameter in C249 Access to code range
0 C000...C255
1 C250...C505
2 C500...C755
3 C750...C1005
4 C1000...C1255
5 C1250...C1505
6 C1500...C1755
7 C1750...C2000
For more information about serial communication with the standard interface
LECOM1 (LECOM-A/B) see the Operating Instructions LECOM-A/B.
12-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
12.4 Enable LECOM interface

Use fieldbus connection modules, e.g. InterBus or PROFIBUS, to integrate the
controller in more complex automation systems. These fieldbus systems ensure
very fast data transfer. The controller can be connected to a winding calculator or
a positioning controller using the automation module 221X.
Install the module and activate it under C370.
C370*¤ Enable -0- No communication via automation interface
automation -1- Communication via automation interface
interface enabled
If communication via C370 is enabled even if no automation module is connected,

the ready (RDY) message will be output.
If communication via InterBus or PROFIBUS is required, select the necessary
operating mode (-4- to -7-) under code C001. If the controller is connected to an
automation module, the operating mode must not be adapted accordingly.
Note!
The LECOM2 inteface is enabled independently of the default setting, i.e. when
loading the default setting under C002, the parameter set under C370 remains the
same.
12.4.1 Process data and parameter channel

The InterBus or PROFIBUS system provides two transmission channels:
( a fast process data channel
( a slower parameter channel
With the parameter channel, the codes can be parmaterised as usual via LECOM1.
The fast process data channel enables fast transmission of time-critical process
data from and to the controller. According the DRIVECOM agreement, InterBus
and PROFIBUS can only send or receive two control parameters via the process
data channel.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
12-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
The following is available:

Proass output data to be sent from the controller to the commmunication interface:
( Mains status word from the basic unit (index 6041hex)
( Status figure of the FDO of C151 (index 5F68hex)
( Speed set-value of C380 (index 6042hex)
( Actual speed value of C382 (index 5E81hex)
( Torque set-value of C388 (index 5E7Bhex)
( Actual phase value of C391 (index 5E78hex)
Process input data from the communication interface to be received by the
controller:
( Main control word (index 6040hex)
( Freely programmable digital inputs (index 5F77hex)
( Speed main set-value of C380 (index 6042hex)
( Speed additional set-value of C393 (index 5E76hex)
( Torque set-value of C387 (index5E7Chex)
( Field current set-value of C392 (index 5E77hex)
In default setting, the main control word and the speed main set-value are assigned
to the two process input words. The main status word and the actual speed value
are assigned to the process output words.
For more detailed information about the main control word, see the Operating
Instructions/Manual DRIVECOM / InterBus connection module type 2110IB or the
Operating Instructions PROFIBUS-FMS / DP bus connection module type 2130IB.
The control word (C136)for freely programmable digital inputs (index 5F77hex)has
the following structure (see 7.1.5.1):
Bit 0: FDI 1
Bit 1: FDI 2
Bit 2: FDI 3
Bit 3: FDI 4
Bit 4: FDI 5
The process data words are re-assigned via the communication parameter index
6000hex or 6001hex and 6002hex.
12-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
12.4.2 High precision set and actual values

Select high precision set and actual values with a resolution of 14 bit plus sign
under codes C380 to C393. Here, the controller value can be directly read or
written without any conversion errors.
These codes can only be accessed via the LECOM interface.
C380 nset speed
Input and display of the main set-value. The main set-value is normalized to the
max. speed (C011).
The figure 214 = 16384 corresponds to 100% of the maximum speed. The
information is the same as under C046. The only difference is that the controller
value can be directly read without any conversion errors.
C381 nset at speed controller
Display of the sum calculated from the mains set-value and the additional
set-value, each after the ramp function generator and normalized to the maximum
speed set under C011. The figure 214 = 16384 corresponds to 100% of the
maximum speed. The information is the same as under C050.
C382 actual speed
Display of the actual speed for the speed controller, normalized to the maximum
speed set under C011. The figure 214 = 16384 corresponds to 100% of the
maximum speed. The information is the same as under C051.
C387 torque limit
Input and display of the torque limit for the controller. The figure 214 = 16384
corresponds to 100% of the maximum torque. The information is the same as
under C047.
C388 torque set-value
Display of the torque set-value for the controller The figure 214 = 16384
corresponds to 100% of the maximum torque. The information is the same as
under C056.
C391 act. phase value
Display of the actual phase value when using a resolver or incremental encoder as
actual value encoder. The figure 214= 16384 corresponds to 360. The maximum
display value can be 65535, so that 4 revolutions can be detected. With
incremental encoder feedback, 0 is displayed until the zero pulse is set.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
12-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
C392 field current set-value
Note!
The field current cannot be reduced more than to the minimum field current set
under C231. If the controller is in field-weakening operation, this range cannot be
left by setting a higher field current set-value.
Display of the field current set-value.The figure 214= 16384 corresponds to 100%
of the rated value under C083. The field current set-vlaue can be assigned to a
process input word so that the set-value can be controlled via the fieldbus system.
C393 additional set-value
Display of the additional set-value for the speed controller. The figure 214 = 16384
corresponds to 100% of the maximum additional set-value. The information is the
same as under C049.
C380* nset speed -16384 {1} 16384 High precision set-value input:
16384 100% under C046
Input only via interface
C381* nset at -32767 {1} 32767 High precision set-value display:
n controller Input of the speed controller
16384 100% under C050.
C382* Actual -32767 {1} 32767 High precision display: actual speed value
speed 16384 nmax under C011.
C387* Torque limit -16384 {1} 16384 High precision torque set-value input:
16384 100% under C047.
C388* Torque -16384 {1} 16384 High precision torque set-value display:
setpoint 16384 100% under C056.
C391* Actual 0 {1} 65535 High precision display of the actual phase
phase value if resolver or incrmental encoder
operate as feedback system:
16384 360 1 revolution
C392* Field 0 {1} 16384 High precision display of the field current
current set-value:
set-value 16384 IFrated under C083.
C393* Additional -16384 {1} 16384 High precision additional set-value display:
set-value 16384 100% under C049.
Display only via interface.
12-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
48XX/49XXSHB0399
12-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
12-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--I
00408857
Manual
Part I
Accessories and motors
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
revised
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Accessories
13 Accessories
For the controllers, Lenze offers the following accessories (to be ordered
separately):
( Mains chokes
( RFI filters
( Fuses
( Fuse holders
( System cable for resolver / incremental encoder
( System cable for digital frequency coupling.
A PC can be connected to the controller via the fieldbus module LECOM A/B
(RS232, RS485 or fibre optics). The parameter setting of the controller is very easy
using LEMOC 2.
PC program LEMOC2
The program runs under DOS and is supplied with drivers for LECOM A/B (RS232,
RS485 or fibre optics).
Functions of the program:

( Well-structured parameter setting and diagnosis
( Easy backup
48XX/49XXSHB0399
13-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Accessories
13.1 Fuses
Note!
The fuses protect the controller from impermissible operating conditions. After a
protection function has been activated, the controller or system must be checked
for faults before replacing the fuse.
Because of possible damage to the semiconductor fuses, which have not blown,
replace the complete set (phase and armature fuses).
Ensure to use the same fuse type of the same manufacturer as used before.
To protect the semiconductors (thyristors) from short-circuit, use very

quick-acting fuses. The characteristics of fuse and semiconductor must be
adapted to each other.
( The tables TAB 1and TAB 3 list the max. permissible fuse sizes, which
protect the semiconductors in the event of short-circuit, for all controller
sizes.
The protection characteristics of the fuses are guaranteed even if the
controller is operated with max. armature current (1.2 to 1.8 times rated
current of the controller).
The fuses are recommended for standard controllers as well as for variants
with “500V mains voltage”.
( For applications which do not require the max. permissible armature
current, check whether it is possible to use smaller rated fuse currents.
The tables TAB 2 and TAB 4 list the assignment of the fuses to the
controller sizes (mains voltage 340 ... 460 V 0%) on condition that the
max. armature current (C022, C023) does not exceed the rated armature
current of the controller.
With fuses other than recommended, check the switch-off characteristic and
whether the actual load cycle does not lead to early ageing of the fuse.
For further information, please contact Lenze or the fuse supplier.
13-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Accessories
13.1.1 Mains fuses
Stop!
An additional cable protection is required when using fuses of the operating class
aR (partial characteristic) as phase fuses.
If the fuses of the operating class gR also protect the cable, the cable cross-
sections must be dimensioned according to the fuse. Otherwise, provide a
separate cable protection!
Type Max. perm. size of the phase fuse (F’1, F’2, F’3) Fuse holder
$
Mains voltage 550V +0%
Fuse type Operating class Order designation Order designation
4902 FF 32 A (22 x 58) gR EFSFF0320AYI EFH30006
4905 FF 200 A (01.110) aR EFSFF2000AYR EFH10003
4X08 FF 450 A (01.110) aR EFSFF4500AXP EFH10003
4X09 FF 700 A (02.110) aR EFSFF7000AYR EFH10003
TAB 1 Assignment of max. mains fuse size to the controller
Type Recommended phase fuse size (F’1, F’2, F’3) when IAmax = IArated of the Fuse holder
controller
Mains voltage 460V +0%$
4902 FF 20 A (14 x 51) aR EFSFF0200AYH EFH10002
4904 FF 63 A (22 x 58) aR EFSFF0630AYI EFH30006
4905 FF 125 A (00.80) aR EFSFF1250AXL EFZ0003
4X08 FF 400 A (01.110) aR EFSFF4000AXR EFH10003
TAB 2 Assignment of mains fuses to the controller when IAmax = IArated and a mains voltage of $ 460V +0%
The controllers 4X11 to 4X13 are equipped with cell fuses (F1.1/F1.2, F2.1/F2.2,
F3.1/F3.2). Fuseholders are not necessary.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
13-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Accessories
13.1.2 Armature fuses

Armature fuses protect the thyristors of the controller from feedback of the motor
in generator mode.
When using AC fuses as armature fuses, the max. operating voltage of the
semi-conductor fuse is restricted, because of the time constant L/R of the
armature circuit.
Therefore, the rated fuse voltage of the following fuse type is considerable higher
than the voltage of the phase fuses recommended.
Type Max. perm. fuse size for the armature circuit (F’4) Fuse holder
$
Mains voltage 550V +0%
4902 FF 40 A (27 x 60) 1 EFSCC0400AYJ EFH30005
4905 FF 250 A (01.110) aR EFSFF2500AZR EFH10003
4X08 FF 550 A (03.110) aR EFSFF5500AZR EFH10003
TAB 3 Assignment of max. armature fuse size to the controller
1 DC fuse
Type Recommended armature fuse size (F

(F’4)
4) when IAmax = IArated of the controller Fuse holder
Mains voltage 460V +0% $
4904 FF 80 A (22 x 58) aR EFSFF0800AYI EFH30006
TAB 4 Assignment of armature fuses to the controller when IAmax = IArated and at a mains voltage of $ 460V
+0%
13-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Accessories
13.1.3 Internal fuses

Except for the cell fuses, all fuses are on the board 4902/3/5 LP or 4X08/11 LP.
Type Rated data Order designation

g
V [V] Dimensions
Fuse type
[mm]
Field fuses 4902 ... 4907 FF 16 A 500 6.3 x 32 EFSFF0160AWB
F1, F2 4X08 ... 4X13 FF 32 A 600 14 x 51 EFSFF0320AYH
Electronics fuses F3, F4 M0.5 A 500 5 x 30 EFSM-0005AWA
Overvoltage protection F5,
FF16 A 500 6.3 x 32 EFSFF0160AWB
F6, F7
Cell fuses 4X11 500 A 1000 01.80 EFSFF5000AZ
F1 1/F1 2
F1.1/F1.2
4X12 800 A 1000 02.80 EFSFF8000AZ
F2.1/F2.2
F3.1/F3.2 4X13 900 A 1000 03.80 EFSFF9000AZ
13.1.4 Fuse holder

Dimensions
Order designation Fig
Fig.
a [mm] b [mm] e [mm] m [mm] c [mm]
EFH10002 FIG 13-1 17.5 97 78.5 - -
EFH30006 FIG 13-1 35 125 83 - -
EFH30005 FIG 13-2 see figure
EFZ0003 FIG 13-3 40 146 43 6 25
EFH10003 FIG 13-4 see figure
a b
4900Str088
FIG 13-1 Fuse holder for DIN rail assembly (35mm)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
13-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Accessories
5 4
3 9
1 9
1 0 7
1 1 ,5
6 ,5
3 2
1 5 0
4900Str089
FIG 13-2 Fuse holder order No.: EFH30005
4900Str090
FIG 13-3 Insulating base order No: EFZ0003
1 1 0 M 1 0
8 2
1 1
9
3 0
5 8 ,5
2 5
2 1 5
2 4 5
4900Str091
FIG 13-4 Insulating base order No.: EFH10003
13-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
13.2 Mains chokes

The following mains chokes are for operation with mains voltages up to #550V
+ 0%.
13.2.1 Mains chokes for power connection

L I Ploss 1) [W] m [kg]
4902 3ô 1.2 mH 3 ô17 A 30 3 ELN3-0120H017
4903 3ô 1.1 mH 3 ô25 A 46 6 ELN3-0120H025
4904 3ô 0.75 mH 3 ô45 A 80 10 ELN3-0075H045
4905 3ô 0.27 mH 3 ô105 A 120 20 ELN3-0027H105
4906 3ô 165 mH 3 ô170 A 125 32 ELN3-0017H170
4907 3 ô 115 mH 3 ô270 A 215 40 ELN3-0011H270
4X08 3ô 94 mH 3 ô300 A 220 50 ELN3-0009H300
4X09 3ô 60 mH 3 ô450 A 245 58 ELN3-0006H450
4X11 3ô 46 mH 3 ô600 A 280 77 ELN3-0005H600
4X12 3ô 32 mH 3 ô900 A 390 125 ELN3-0003H900
4X13 3ô 28 mH 3 ô1000 A 360 115 ELN3-0003H1k0
1) for operation with rated current

k
e
f
m n
c d
a b
K35.0094
FIG 13-5 Mains chokes with connection lug
48XX/49XXSHB0399
13-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
e
f
m n
c d
a b
4900Str092
FIG 13-6 Mains chokes with connection lug
Type FIG a b c d e f k m n
4902 FIG 13-5 120 65 109 51 162 110 80 5 10
4903 FIG 13-5 150 76 140 61 180 140 95 5 10
4904 FIG 13-5 180 91 161 74 225 165 120 6.3 11
4905 FIG 13-5 228 111 206 94 273 205 150 6.3 11
4906 FIG 13-5 264 128 240 107 257 237 166 8.3 16
4907 FIG 13-5 300 140 274 114 290 265 190 8.3 16
4X08 FIG 13-6 300 140 224 105 290 270 200 10 18
4X09 FIG 13-6 360 140 330 105 330 318 210 10 18
4X11 FIG 13-6 360 140 330 137 345 320 250 10 18
4X12 FIG 13-6 420 220 370 160 400 365 290 12 16
4X13 FIG 13-6 420 192 385 157 385 370 265 12 21
All dimensions in mm
13.2.2 Mains choke for separate supply of the field bridge

L [mH] I [A] Ploss 1) [W] m [kg]
4902 ... 4903 9 5 11 1.0 ELN1-0900H005
4904 ... 4X08 3.5 14 28 2.4 ELN1-0350H014
4X09 ... 4X13 0.98 35 35 2.9 ELN1-0009H035
1) for operation with rated current
13-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
e
f
m n
c d
a b
4900Str093
FIG 13-7 Mains choke for separate supply of the field bridge
Type a b c d e f k m n
4902 ... 4903 66 67 50 53 80 61 37 4.8 9
4904 ... 4X08 96 77 84 61 96 87 52 5.5 9
4X09 ... 4X13 96 88 84 70 112 87 64 5.5 9
48XX/49XXSHB0399
13-9
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
13.3 Pre-assembled Lenze system cable
13.3.1 Resolver connection cable

Design Length [m] Order designation
5 EWLR005GM
10 EWLR010GM
15 EWLR015GM
20 EWLR020GM
25 EWLR025GM
Pl g at both ends
Plug
30 EWLR030GM
35 EWLR035GM
40 EWLR040GM
45 EWLR045GM
50 EWLR050GM
only with motor plug 10 EWL0028
only with plug X7 for controller 2.5 EWL0027
DC motor Controller
4900Str094
FIG 13-8 Resolver connection cable
13-10 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
13.3.2 Incremental encoder connection cable

2.5 EWLE002GM-T
5 EWLE005GM-T
10 EWLE010GM-T
15 EWLE015GM-T
20 EWLE020GM-T
25 EWLE025GM-T
Plug at both ends 30 EWLE030GM-T
35 EWLE035GM-T
40 EWLE040GM-T
45 EWLE045GM-T
50 EWLE050GM-T
75 EWLE075GM-T
100 EWLE100GM-T
V e r s c h ie d e n e L ä n g e n / v a r io u s le n g th s
B g rü n / g re e n
B s c h w a r z / b la c k
A s c h w a r z / b la c k 1
9 A ro t / re d
1 8
Z g e lb / y e llo w
2 1 0 1 1
7 Z s c h w a r z / b la c k
3 1 2
6 + 5 V w e iß / w h ite
4 5
G N D s c h w a r z / b la c k 9
+ K T Y b la u / b lu e
-K T Y s c h w a r z / b la c k
D C m o to r C o n tr o lle r
4900Str095
FIG 13-9 Incremental encoder connection cable
13.3.3 System cable for digital frequency coupling

Pin/socket 2.5 EWLD002GGBS92
48XX/49XXSHB0399
13-11
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
13.4 RFI filter
13.4.1 RFI filter for power connection

Type Irated [A] Pv [W] V max m [kg] Order designation
4902 16 12 4.0 EZF3-016A004
4903 25 15 4.0 EZF3-025A002
4904 50 15 4.0 EZF3-050A005
4905 120 33 10 EZF3-120A001
4906 180 40 13 EZF3-180A002
4907 250 12 550V á0% 15 EZF3-250A001
4X08 320 21 21 EZF3-320A001
4X09 600 57 22 EZF3-600A001
4X11 600 57 22 EZF3-600A001
4X12 1000 100 28 EZF3-1k0A001
4X13 1000 100 28 EZF3-1k0A001
1
a
e
PE L3 L2 L1
PE L3 L2 L1
f b
LINE LOAD
n m
g d 2
4900Str096
FIG 13-10 RFI filter, design A
13-12 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
1
k c
n
m
a
e
L3
L3
h d f b
L2
L2
j
LOAD LINE
L1
L1
g 12
4900Str097
FIG 13-11 RFI filter, design B
Type Design a b c d e f g h i k m n É
[mm2]
4902 A 163 113 81 141 70 100 22.5 - - 25 5.5 0 M6 4
4903 A 216 156 91 166 80 140 22.5 - - 30 6.6 0 M6 10
4904 A 216 156 91 166 80 140 22.5 - - 30 6.6 0 M6 10
4905 A 348 171 141 261 115 155 32 - - 65 6.6 0 M10 50
4906 A 404 171 141 301 165 155 32 - - 62 6.6 6.6 M10 95
4907 B 300 190 115 140 240 165 40 80 30 90 11 30 M10x30 -
4X08 B 300 260 115 210 240 235 40 120 30 90 11 35 M10x30 -
4X09 B 350 260 115 210 290 235 40 120 30 90 11 35 M10x30 -
4X11 B 350 260 115 210 290 235 40 120 30 90 11 35 M10x30 -
4X12 B 350 300 165 250 290 275 50 160 40 140 14 60 M12x30 -
4X13 B 350 300 165 250 290 275 50 160 40 140 14 60 M12x30 -
48XX/49XXSHB0399
13-13
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
13.4.2 RFI filter for fan supply

The 4X08 to 4X13 controllers must be connected to a voltage between 200 ...
240V~ to supply the fan.
Use the following RFI filter to ensure the CE conformity of the drive system:
85
65 40
L1
L1 L1
5
LOAD
LINE
55
N PE N
PE
N
6
75
4900Str098
FIG 13-12 RFI filter for fan supply
Type Irated [A] Vmax [V] m [kg] Order designation

4X08 ... 4X13 4 250 0.25 EZF1-004A001
13-14 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
13.5 Networking accessories

The modules listed in the following are for controller networking.
13.5.1 Connection elements for optical fibres

For networking with optical fibres, Lenze offer various connection elements
(optical fibre system components 212X IB), which are especially adapted to the
controllers. Connection elements are adapters with optical sender and receiver,
distributor and power supply. Optical fibres ensure very noise-resistant data
transmission.
For further information, please see the Operating Instructions LECOM-LI.
13.5.2 Level converter

With the 2101 level converter serial transmission signals of standard RS232 can
be changed to standard RS485 or RS422. Furthermore, the converter ensures
electrical isolation. It is thus possible to install the drive system with large
distances between the components (cable length < 1200m). The components
can be connected via a multi-point connection to RS485 or a point-to-point
connection to RS422.
For further information, please see the Manual 2101 (register H).
48XX/49XXSHB0399
13-15
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Automation
13-16 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--K
00408858
Manual
Part K
Selection aid
Application examples
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
revised
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
14 Selection aid
14.1 Assignment of controller and motor

Lenze does not only offer controllers but also a complete motor programme with
surface ventilated and enclosed ventilated machines. These motors perfectly
match the controllers 48XX/49XX.
On request, these motors can be equipped with the following:
( Gearbox
( Clutches/brakes
( Analog tachos
( Resolvers
( Incremental encoder
More information about installation, commissioning and maintenance of Lenze
DC motors can be obtained from the Operating Instructions ”DC motors”.
14.1.1 Selection criteria

The electrical rated data (armature current, armature voltage) of the controller
should be more or less the same as for the driving motor to ensure optimum
operating features of the whole drive (controller and motor, see chapter 3.3).
Since the motor provides overcurrent reserves from 12.5% to up to 80% over a
short period of time, the compensated drive motor generated a torque increased
by this factor when constantly excited.
For unadapted motors we distinguish between the following:
1. Rated armature voltage of the motor > rated armature voltage
of the controller
(= max. permissible controller output voltage).
The motor cannot be fully driven at this speed. The armature voltage is
proportional to the speed at constant excitation.
2. Rated armature voltage of the motor < rated aramture voltage of the
controller (= max. permissible controller output voltage)
The controller output voltage is to be limited to the motor voltage by
setting the parameters accordingly (C011 = nmax). Check, whether the
motor can be used with this control mode (insulation, commutation
voltage). In general, this control mode is possible with deviations up to
approx. 20%.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
14-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Stop!
The peak values of the mains voltage are also reached with low armature voltages
(speed).
3. Rated armature current of the motor > rated armature current of the
controller for continuous operation. The motor cannot be fully driven in
continuous operation at this torque. The current is limited to the rated
aramture current. The torque is proportional to the armature current at
constant excitation.
Note!
With this assignment, the armature circuit gain is increased. This may lead to
overcurrents in the armature circuit, which may even cause fuse tripping. For
these application, please contact Lenze.
4. Rated armature current of the motor < rated armature current of the
controller for continuous operation. In this case, the current limitation
Imax (C022, C023) of the controller should be reduced to the motor
current to avoid thermal overload of the motor caused by impermissibly
high currents. If the difference is too high, use a smaller controller.
Note!
The current controller of 48XX/49XX controller is default-set for the application of
adapted machines. In some cases (e.g. high ratio of electrical rated data between
controller and DC machine, high dynamic control requirements) it can be
necessary to optimise the current-control circuit. For these applications, please
contact Lenze.
14-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
14.1.2 Armature choke

When using Lenze 48XX/49XX controller adapted to the DC motor, it is not
necessary to use an armature choke.
When using other controller, check whether an armature choke will be required.
See Lenze Formula Reference.
An armature choke reduces
( the ripple content of the DC (lower thermal armature losses)
( the magnetic motor noises
( the torque harmonic waves for extremely high requirements to the
uniformity of the torque characteristic
( the brush wear.
Stop!
An additional inductance may cause a vibration of the drive. Please contact Lneze
before using an armature choke.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
14-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
The following table indicates planning recommendations for components

completing your drive.
Requirement/ Resolver Incremental Tacho Armature Field voltage
application encoder voltage
(4096 incr/rev.)
20V 60V 200V 340V 360V
Field weakening - - - up to 3000 rpm no ++ ++ o
Field constant - - - - - ++ ++ no
Torque control - - - - - ++ ++ no
Dig. frequency coupling ++ ++ no no no - - -
Speed setting n rated *)
range n min
1:20 ++ ++ ++ ++ +
1:50 ++ ++ ++ ++ o - - -
1:200 ++ ++ ++ ++ no - - -
1:500 ++ ++ o o no - - -
1:1000 ++ ++ no no no - - -
1:2000 + ++ no no no - - -
Speed n set - nact *)
accuracy n rated
5% ++ ++ ++ ++ ++ - - -
1% ++ ++ + + no - - -
0.5% ++ ++ o o no - - -
0.1% ++ ++ no no no - - -
0.05% ++ ++ no no no - - -
Maximum speed
up to 5000rpm ++ ++ + no - - - -
up to 3000rpm ++ ++ + + - - - -
up to 2000rpm ++ ++ + + - - - -
up to 1000rpm ++ ++ o o - - - -
up to 500rpm ++ ++ o o - - - -
Torque Mchange
ripple Mrated
5% ++ ++ + + o - - -
1% ++ ++ o o o - - -
Condition: Standard motor with VArated = 400 V, nrated = 3000 rpm, VMains= 400 V
++ = good
+ = acceptable
o = tolerable
- = not relevant
*) valid for M = 0 ... Mrated = constant and Imax (C022, C023) 1.2 ô Irated
14-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15 Application examples
The following specifications, processes, and circuitry described are for guidance
only and must be adapted to your own specific application.
( Speed control with tacho

- (This application is described in chapter 5 as commissioning example)
( Speed control with armature-voltage feedback
( Speed control with resolver
( Torque control with speed limitation
( Current-ratio control
( Dancer control at an unwinder
( Hoists
( Speed ratio synchronism
( Modular box
( Mains isolation
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15.1 Speed control with armature-voltage feedback
Q 1
L 1
L 2
L 3
P E
F ''1 . . . F ''3
F '1 . . . F '3
L 1 L 2 L 3
Z 1
L '1 L '2 L '3
K 1
L K
P E L 1 L 2 L 3
4 8 0 0 /4 9 0 0
X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4
I K B A 7 8 9 2 0 2 1 2 8 3 9 4 0 5 9 9 0 F E
F '4
I K B A n s e t c w C tr l.
e n a b le
M 1 M
4900Str099
FIG 15-1 Connection diagram for speed control with armature-voltage feedback
15-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Parameter setting
Code Input Description
Input according to motor nameplate
C083 xxx A Rated field current
C084 xxx ms Armature-time constant
C088 xxx A Rated motor current
C090 xxx V Rated motor voltage
Enter controller configuration
C000 -2- Extended code set
C005 -10- Speed control with armature-voltage feedback
Input of current limits
C022, C023 xxx A Maximum motor current
Adjustment of speed controller
C011 xxxx rpm Enter max. speed
C025 -5- Select armature voltage
C232 xx % VArated I ¼ R - Set compensation
C029 nact Adjust speed
Application parameters
C070 V pn At high inertia, adapt n - controller gain Vpn
Save parameter
C003 Save parameter set
Note!
( With armature-voltage feedback, the control terminals are still volt-free!

( Mains disconnection only when no current is applied!
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15.2 Speed control with resolver
Q 1
L 1
L 2
L 3
P E
D ir e c t c o n n e c tio n to c o n tr o l c a b le " O N "
F ''1 . . . F ''3 L 1 0
" E m e r g e n c y o ff" c a b le
L 1 1
F '1 . . . F '3 S 1 K 2 .1
td > tB r.
L 1 L 2 L 3
S 2 K 2 K 3 K 2
Z 1
L '1 L '2 L '3 K 1
K 1
K 2 K 2 .1 K 1
td
L K L 2 0
P E L 1 L 2 L 3
4 9 0 0
X 7 X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4
I K B A 7 8 9 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 8 3 9 4 0 A 4 5 9 9 0 F E
F '4
I K B A n s e t c w c c w
M 1 M R K 2
C r tl.
e n a b le K 3
Q S P n a c t = 0
4900Str100
FIG 15-2 Connection diagram for speed control with resolver
15-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Parameter setting
C005 -12- Speed control with resolver feedback
C011 xxxx rpm Max. max. speed
C019 xxxx rpm Set threshold nact = 0
C070 V pn At high inertia, adapt n - controller gain Vpn
Save parameter
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15.3 Torque control with speed limitation
Q 1
L 1
L 2
L 3
P E
F ''1 . . . F ''3 L 1 0
L 1 1
F '1 . . . F '3 S 1 K 2 .1
td > tB r.
L 1 L 2 L 3
S 2 K 2 K 3 K 2
Z 1
L '1 L '2 L '3 K 1
K 1
K 2 K 2 .1 K 1
td
L K L 2 0
P E L 1 L 2 L 3
4 9 0 0
X 7 X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4
I K B A 2 8 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 8 3 9 4 0 A 1 A 4 5 9 9 0 F E
F '4
M se t n s e t c w c c w
I K B A
C tr l.
P L C K 2
e n a b le
M 1 M R K 4 K 3
T o r q u e c a lc u la to r K 4
n
M
Q S P n a c t < n x n a c t = 0
U n w in d e r
4900Str101
FIG 15-3 Connection diagram for torque control with speed limitation
15-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Parameter setting
C005 -42- Torque control with speed limitation
C016 xxxx rpm Reference speed nact nx
C070 Vpn At high inertias, adapt n - controller gain
Save parameter
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15.4 Current-ratio control
Q 1
L 1
L 2
L 3
P E
F ''1 . . . F ''3 F ''4 . . . F ''6

D ir e k tle itu n g v o n d e r S te u e r le itu n g " E in "
L 1 0
" N o t- A u s " L e itu n g
L 1 1
F '1 . . . F '3 F '5 . . . F '7
S 1 K 2 .1
td > tB r.
L 1 L 2 L 3 L 1 L 2 L 3
Z 1 Z 2
S 2 K 2 K 3 K 2
L '1 L '2 L '3 L '1 L '2 L '3
K 1
K 1 K 1
K 2 K 2 .1 K 1
td
L 2 0
L K L K
P E L 1 L 2 L 3 P E L 1 L 2 L 3
4 9 0 0 (M a s te r) 4 9 0 0 ( S la v e )
n s o ll Is o ll Is o ll n s o ll
X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4 X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4
I K B A 3 4 7 8 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 8 3 9 4 0 A 4 5 9 6 2 9 0 F E 3 4 6 7 8 2 0 2 1 2 2 2 8 3 9 4 0 5 9 9 0 F E A B K I
F '4
F '8
I K B A c w c c w c w c c w A B K I
+
M 1 M T C r tl.
K 3 K 2
C r tl. T M
- K 2 e n a b le e n a b le
M 2
U le it Q S P n is t = 0 Q S P
4900Str102
FIG 15-4 Connection diagram for current-ratio control
15-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Parameter setting
Master and slave
Master and slave

Master and slave
C005 -11- Speed control with tacho feedback
Master
C110 -1- Input selection term. 62
C111 -25- Monitor output ’Mset’
Master and slave
C011 xxxx rpm Select max. speed
C025 -2- Select adjustment at terminals 3 and 4
Slave
C071 9999 ms T nn, no I component
C025 -3- Select adjustment at terminal 6
C027 Select weighting factor for act. speed influence divided by Vpn
C070 V pn Adapt n-controller gain
Master and slave
C054 Check current division between master and slave.
Master
Save parameter
Master and slave
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-9
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15.5 Dancer-position control at an unwinder

P E P E
P E L 1 L 2 L 3
4 9 0 0
X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4
I K B A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2 1 2 2 2 8 E 1 E 2 E 3 E 4 E 5 3 9 4 0 A 4 5 9 9 0 F E
F '4
I K B A v s e t c w c c w K 3
- n is t = 0
M 1 M T C r tl. 2 4 V
e n a b le
+
Q S P E 1 = T R IP s e tz e n
E 2 = T R IP rü c k s e tz e n
E 3 = A u s b le n d u n g P r o z e ß r e g le r
E 4 = J O G 1
E 5 = I-A n te il P r o z e ß r e g le r a u s
Is tla g e A b s ta n d k
A c t. p o s itio n
a r
W a re n b a h n
+ 1 0 V
d m in d m a x T ä n z e r la g e p o ti
U ltr a s c h a llg e b e r
d m a x = 2 (k - a )
A b w ic k le r
4900Str103
FIG 15-5 Signal-flow chart for dancer-position control at an unwinder
15-10 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
n o ffs e t
T a c h o C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6
3 +
4
± 1 8 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 A r ith m e tic b lo c k S e tp o in t in te g r a to r
n m a x
o ffs e t In p u t 1 n s e t
C 0 1 1 C W C C W
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 (N u m e ra to r) C 3 3 8 C 0 1 2 T ir
v s e t' C 0 4 6 2 1 2 2
C 1 9 1 C 0 1 3 T if
+ C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 n a c t
8 + · C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 - / 0 C 0 5 1
-1 0 V ... + 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 C 3 3 8
1
± 1
1 0 0 % - C 3 3 9
C 0 4 1 C W /C W
n o ffs e t In p u t 2
J O G 1 E 4
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 ( D e n o m in a to r ) C 3 3 9
( D ia m e te r )
E n a b le
D is ta n c e
+
6
0 ... + 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 P r o c e s s c tr l. C 2 2 2 V p p n s e t
R F G C 2 2 3 T n p R F G C 0 5 0
C 2 2 4 K d p n - c o n tr o lle r
C 3 3 0
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
+ + · +
P o s . s e tp o in t x x x x - /
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 - 1 0 0 %
C 4 6
- C 4 9 -
C 3 3 2 T ir C 2 2 0 T ir C 1 9 0 C 0 7 0 V p n
A c t. p o s . v a lu e C 3 3 3 T if C 2 2 1 T if C 0 7 1 T n n
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 P r o c e s s c tr l.
1 + C 0 7 2 K d n
c a n b e
2 C 0 4 9
d e a c tiv a te d
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 C 1 1 2 /C 1 1 3
-1 0 V ... + 1 0 V
E 5
I-c o m p o n e n t c a n b e
d e a c tiv a te d
C 3 3 1 R F G
E v a lu a tio n 1
-1 0 0 ...+ 1 0 0 % x x x x
0
C 3 3 4 T ir
C 1 1 2 /C 1 1 3 C 3 3 5 T if
S u p p r e s s io n o f
E 3
p r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r o u tp u t
4900Str104
FIG 15-6 Example for a dancer-position control at an unwinder
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-11
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Parameter setting
Freely assignable analog inputs
C146 -15- Arithmetic block2 input 1
C146 -16- Arithmetic block2 input 2
C145 -10- Input selection arithmetic block output
C146 -1- Main set-value C046
C145 -9- Input selection process controller output
C146 -3- Additional set-value C049
C145 -1- Input selection term. 1.2
C146 -7- Actual process controller value
C112 -3- Input selection E3
C113 -32- Process controller evaluation
C113 -31- Process controller I component off
Arithmetic block
C191 -4- Output = input 1 / input 2
@
Convert distance diameter
C026 Offset for distance a = -xxx mV
C027 2.000 Evaluation for diameter
C011 xxxx rpm Enter max. speed
C025 -2- Select adjustment at terminals 3 and 4
process controller
C330 xxx % Select position set-value
C331 xxx % Evaluation of process controller output
C070 V pn At high inertias, adapt n - controller gain
C222 Vpp Optimise process controller
Save parameter
15-12 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15.6 Hoists
P E P E
P E L 1 L 2 L 3
E 4 , E 5 J O G 1 ... J O G 3
A 1 Ia c t > Ix
4 9 0 0 A 2
A 4
M s e tl
n a c t =
= M m a x
0
A 5 n a c t = n s e t
X 7 X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4
I K B A 8 9 2 1 2 2 2 8 E 4 E 5 3 9 4 1 4 4 4 5 A 1 A 2 A 4 A 5 5 9 9 0 F E
F '4
I K B A
K 5 K 6 K 7 K 3
c w c c w
M 1 M R
C r tl. T R IP R D Y IM P n a c t = 0
G N D
e n a b le
P L C
Q S P
+ 2 4 V
P L C B R
B r a k e r e le a s e P L C
M G B ra k e
L im it s w itc h " u p "

s
P r o x im itx s w itc h 1
L iftin g
L o w e r in g
L im it s w itc h " u p "
P r o x im ity s w itc h 2
s
L im it s w it c h " d o w n " L im it s w it c h " d o w n "
v _ p o s
s = C 1 0 5 · v _ p o s / 2
tf (C 1 0 5 ) t
4900Str105
FIG 15-7 Connection diagram for hoiset
Bridge between terminals 8 and 9 sets a value of 100% n max , if no JOG value
is activated.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-13
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Parameter setting
C005 -52- Speed control with phase controller
Adjustment of the phase controller
C254 V pw Adapt V pw to the system, if Vpw = 0, the phase controller is not
activated.
C011 xxx rpm Enter max. speed (this speed corresponds to v max)
C019 xxx rpm Set threshold nact = 0
C240 xxx % nmax Setting of the permissible speed deviation
C116 -5- Input selection of the digital output A5
C128 xxx s Time, during which the drive can leave the selected range, without a
message being sent
C255 xxxx incr Following error limit
C105 xxx s Deceleration time tf = 2 : s / vpos
C116 -1- Input selection of the digital output A1
C117 -15- Iact > Ix
C244 xxx % Imax (limit value for the starting torque against the brake)
C038 -1- Input selection JOG 1
C039 xxx % C011 (save speed for vpos in JOG 1)
C038 -x- Input selection JOG x
C039 xxx % C011 (other speeds)
Save parameter
15-14 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
15.7
FIG 15-8
Speed-ratio synchronism
P u ll-o ff u n it (m a s te r d r iv e ) S tr e tc h in g u n it 1 S tr e tc h in g u n it 2
Connection diagram for speed-ratio synchronism
v = 5 0 m /m in v = 8 0 m /m in v = 1 1 0 m /m in
i = 1 9 .4 i = 5 .3 i = 5 .3
R M R M R M
D ig . fr e q u e n c y D ig . fr e q u e n c y
X 7 X 8 + 2 4 V e x te rn a l X 5 X 7 X 8 + 2 4 V e x te rn a l X 5 X 7 X 8
4 9 0 0 M a s te r 4 9 0 0 S la v e 4 9 0 0 S la v e
9 E 4 E 4
S tre tc h > S tre tc h >
v s e t E 5 E 5
8 S tre tc h < S tre tc h <
S tr e tc h in g S tr e tc h in g
7 fa c to r fa c to r
G e a rb o x
G e a rb o x G e a rb o x
2 8 2 1 E 2 5 9 3 9 4 1 A 3 4 0 A 5 2 8 2 1 E 2 5 9 3 9 4 1 A 3 4 0 A 5 2 8 2 1 E 2 5 9 3 9 4 1 A 3 4 0 A 5
+ 2 4 V + 2 4 V + 2 4 V
e x te rn a l e x te rn a l e x te rn a l
n a c t = 0 n a c t = 0 n a c t = 0
P L C
Selection aid
C tr l. C W T R IP - T R IP I A > IA x C tr l. C W T R IP T R IP I A > IA x C tr l. C W T R IP T R IP I A > IA x
S e q u e n c e c o n tro l e n - Q S P R e s e t e n - Q S P R e s e t S e t e n - Q S P R e s e t S e t
a b le a b le a b le
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4900Str106
15-15
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Parameter setting
Master and slave
Master and slave

Master and slave
Master
C005 -52- Speed control with resolver
Slave
C005 -72- Set-value cascade with resolver
Slave
C113 -17- Motor potentiometer down
C113 -18- Motor potentiometer up
Freely assignable analog inputs
Slave
C145 -8- Input selection motor potentiometer output
C146 -10- Gain C027 of X5
Freely assignable digital outputs
Master and slave
C116 -5- Input selection A5
C117 -15- IA > IAX
Gearbox factor
Master (FIG 15-8; i = 19.4)
C032 xxx Numerator = 1.9400
C033 xxx Denominator = 0.1000
Slave (FIG 15-8; i = 5.3)
C032 xxx Numerator = 0.5300
C033 xxx Denominator = 0.1000
Stretch factor
Slave
C027 xxx Numerator = 1.6 (Streching unit 1);
Numerator = 1.375 (Streching unit 2)
C028 xxx Denominator = 1
Motor potentiometer parameter setting
Slave
C260 100% Motor potentiometer upper limit
C261 -100% Motor potentiometer lower limit
C262 xxx s Motor potentiometer acceleration time
C263 xxx s Motor potentiometer deceleration time
15-16 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid

Master and slave
Master and slave
C244 xxx % IA > IAx
Save parameter
Master and slave
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-17
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15.8 Modular box 2215
15.8.1 Winding drive

Purpose
For winding applications, e.g. winding of a paper reel, the drive can be
economically expanded as operator-friendly winding drive. For this, use the 2215
modular box. With this box, the winding drive can be individually adapted to many
different applications. Variants, such as winding drive with terminals, InterBus,
Beckhof bus or PROFIBUS are available. The parameters for the winding drive are
set as physical units which makes the usually complicated adjustment no longer
necessary.
U n w in d e r W in d e r
M M M
B a s ic u n it
L 4 9 0 0 L 4 9 0 0 L 4 9 0 0
M o d u la r b o x
4900Str107
FIG 15-9 Drive system 48XX/49XX as winding application
With winding drives, the following functions are possible:

( Winding/unwinding from top or bottom
Torque controlled winding with determination of the winding characteristic as
function or from a table with 16 values (here the diameter range of d min to dmax
is subdivided into 16 section, the factor of the corresponding table position has
an influence on the initial tension). The characteristic can be changed from 0%
to 200%. This means:
- 0% = constant torque
- 100% = constant tension
- 200% = tension increase with larger diameters
These functions can be controlled via terminals.
15-18 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Compensation of friction, acceleration and breakaway torque

The friction can be compensated as function or from a table with 16 values as
function of the torque. The required acceleration torque can be adjusted by
entering the material data (width and density) or via terminals. The breakaway
torque can be added to the torque as offset percentage through an adjustable
time (0 to 5 s).
Digital detection of speed and material speed

A conventional adjustment is not necessary. Simply enter the machine data such
as minimum diameter, gearbox factors, maximum line speed, motor data
according to nameplate, etc. The actual diameter, actaul tension and actual
torque, etc. are indicated in the corresponding codes. These values can also be
read from an analog output.
Integrated tension controller

An integrated tension controller, which can be configured for tension measuring
rollers or dancers, enable a constant tension according to a preselected
set-value. With an analog output, this tension set-value as control signal can be
used as variable for the dancer tension when being converted by an I-p converter
(important for winding with characteristic). The output signal of the tension
controller can be added to the torque or speed with or without diameter evaluation
(adaptation of the tnesion controller with the diameter).
Tables
In addition to the tables for characteristic and friction, there are tables for 16
different initial diameters as well as 16 fixed set-values for circumferential speed
(fixed set-values evaluated with the diameter).
Consideration of the dancer deflection

With diameter calculation, the dancer deflection can be considered as path
change. By this, the dancer movement can reduce the positive feedback.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-19
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Digital, freely programmable inputs

( Ctrl. inhibit of the automation module
( Diameter calculation enable
( Initial diameter
( Winding or unwinding
( Winding from top or bottom
( Enable speed offset
( Changeover torque from calculated value to maximum value
( Enable tension controller
( Enable I component of the tension controller
( Activate web-break monitoring
Note!
For the winding drive explained above do not only observe the Operating
Instructions 48XX/49XX but also the Operating Instructions ”Winding calculator”
(see register H).
15.8.2 Positioning drive
Purpose
Simple positioning tasks can be solved with the positioning drive. In many cases
the PLC can be releaved or will not be necessary at all.
For this, use the 2215 modular box. With this box, the positioning drive can be
individually adapted to many different applications.Variants, such as positioning
drive with terminals, InterBus, Beckhof bus or PROFIBUS are available.
15-20 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
v
v p o s
A c c e le r a tio n D e c e le r a tio n
S ta rt T a rg e t
L im it s w itc h R e fe r e n c e s w itc h L im it s w itc h
L 4 9 0 0
4900Str108
FIG 15-10 Drive system 48XX/49XX as positioning application
The following features are integrated into the positioning drive:

( 32 freely assignable digital input
of which, depending on the variant, 8 or 28 assignable via terminals
( 32 freely assignable digital outputs
of which, depending on the variant, 4 or 16 assignable via terminals
( Measuring system absolute or relative (endless incremental dimension)
( 32 program sets, each with the following functions:
- Point-to-point positioning
- Point-to-point positioning with changeover of velocity
- Positioning with interrupt input
- Acceleration, delay, travelling and final speed adjustable
- Waiting for input
- Switching of several outputs
- Homing according to 6 different modes
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-21
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
- Adjustable waiting time

- Adjustable number for repetition function
- Limited program branching depending on the inputs
- Jump to the following program set
( 32 adjustable position targets
( 32 adjustable speeds
( 32 adjustable acceleration/deceleration values
( 32 adjustable number of pieces
( 32 adjustable waiting times
( Manual or program operation
( Inputs and displays via keypad and display of the basic unit
( Parameter setting and diagnostics via the serial interface LECOM-A/B of
the basic unit and the PC program LEMOC2
( Connection of BCD switches
( Connection of an absolute value encoder
( Control, parameter setting and diagnostics via InterBus or Profibus possible
(variant with fieldbus connection)
Note!
For the positioning drive explained above do not only observe the Operating
Instructions 48XX/49XX but also the Operating Instructions ”Positioning” (see
register H).
15-22 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15.9 Mains isolation
15.9.1 Tipping with mains isolation

In this application proposal, the power stage is connected to or separated from
the mains through a tipp command (momentary-contact pushbutton S4). Since
the control electronics and the field supply are ready for operation when the mains
switch is on, the tipp command only delays the signal of the mains contactor.
Controller preparation:
( With controllers 4902...4907 (PCB 4902LP, 4903LP or 4905LP), remove
the wire bridge between BR1, BR2, BR3, BR4 and BR5 when no voltage is
applied.
( With controllers 4X08...4X13 (PCB 4908LP oder 4911LP), remove the
bridges BR3, BR4 and BR5 when no voltage is applied.
To get to the bridges to be removes, observe the following steps:

( Open the controller cover (4 fixing screws)
( Loosen 2 screws fixing the flap of the control electronics
( Open flap
Stop!
( Ensure correct phase connection of mains supply.

(Wrong connection leads to fuse tripping).
( The phase angle of the voltages in power stage and control electronics
must be lower than 2 electrically.
( Before opening or closing the contactor K1, the controller must be
inhibited via the function ”controller enable”. Ith this switching sequence is
not observed, fuses may trip or the fault message ACI may be indicated.
( In tipping operation with K! the electronics remain supplied.
The main switch separate the controller from the mains.
( With this application, a voltage is continuously applied to the field.
Activate standstill excitation (field heating)!
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-23
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
F 1 F 2
4 9 0 2 /3 /5 L P 4 9 0 2 V P
F F 1 6 A
5 0 0 V M 0 .5 A 5 0 0 V
B R 1 B R 5 F 4
B R 3 F 3
B R 2 B R 4
P E L 1 L 2 L 3 A B L 1 .1 L 3 .1 I K L 1 .2 L 2 .2 L 3 .2
L K L K 2 L K 2 F ''6 . . . F ''8
F ''4 F ''5
L 1 L 2 L 3
Z 1
L '1 L '2 L '3
F '1 . . . F '3 P E
K 1
F ''1 . . . F ''3
P E L 1 L 2 L 3 V m a in s = 3 4 0 ... 4 6 0 V ~ ± 0 % 5 0 ... 6 0 H z
4900Str109
FIG 15-11 Power connection for tipping operation with mains isolation
Explanations
F’1...F’3 Semi-conductor fuses
F’’6...F’’8 Cable-protection fuses 4A
F’’1...F’’4 Cable-protection fuses
Q1 Main switch
K1 Mains contactor
Power stage
Field controller
15-24 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
Contactor or relay circuit
4 9 0 0 L 1 0
L 1 1
X 2 X 3 X 4
2 0 2 1 2 2 2 8 3 9 4 0 A 4 5 9 9 0 F E S 1 K 2 .1 S 3
td > tB r. 1 2
S 2 K 2 K 3 K 4 S 4 K 2 K 1
R L
K 3 K 1
K 4 K 5
Q S P R F R n a c t = 0
K 2 K 2 .1 K 1 K 4 K 5
td
L 2 0
4900Str110
FIG 15-12 Connection of the signal electronics for tipping operation via momentary-contact pushbutton S4
K1 Controller mains contactor

K2.1 Safety relay for mains isolation if no standstill message is indicated
K4, K5 Relay with gold-plated contacts
S1 Drive off
S2 Drive on
S3 1: Tipping / 2: Automatic
S4 Inching
L10 Direct cable from the control cable ’on’
L11 ’Emergency-Off cable
15.9.2 Mains switch-off logic
Stop!
The controllers 48XX/49XX must only be separated from the mains when they are
inhibited or the motor is in standstill.
This also applies to the emergency-off function.
The function |nact| < C019 can be used for the mains switch-off logic.
The digital output terminal A4 is for automatic mains switch-off. The terminals sets
”low”, if the actual speed value is lower than the value set under C019. The
threshold can be set under C019 from 0 to 5000 rpm. For this application, the
setting must not exceed 2% nrated.
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-25
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
D ir e c t c o n n e c t io n t o c o n t r o l c a b le " O N "
4 9 0 0 L 1 0
L 1 1
X 2 X 3 X 4
2 0 2 1 2 2 2 8 3 9 4 0 A 4 5 9 9 0 F E
S 1 K 2 .1
td > tB r.
S 2 K 2 K 3 K 2
c w c c w
K 3 K 1
K 2
Q S P C r tl. n a c t = 0
e n a b le K 2 K 2 .1 K 1
td
L 2 0
4900Str111
FIG 15-13 Example for fastest possible switch-off in inverter operation
15-26 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
48XX/49XXSHB0399
15-27
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Selection aid
15-28 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--L
00408859
Manual
Part L
Signal-flow charts
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
revised
Show/Hide Bookmarks
16 Signal-flow charts
FIG 10-1
M a s te r in te g r a to r C W 2 1 2 2 C C W C 0 4 2 D F o u tp u t
C 0 1 2 T ir Q S P
n o ffs e t n m a x C 0 1 3 T if
n s e t
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 1 1 Q S P C 1 3 4
n s e t' C 0 4 6 C 0 3 0 X 8
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 1 9 0 C 1 0 5
+ E n c . to fu rth e r
0 N C O
Signal-flow chart Masterconfiguration C005 = -5X-
8 + · c o n s t. d r iv e s
± 1 - /
1
-1 0 V ...+ 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 1 0 0 %
C 4 6
- C 4 9 5 1 2
C 0 4 1 C W /C C W 1 0 2 4
E x
J O G 1 2 0 4 8
E 4 E 5 R F G s to p 1 8 0 % o f n m a x
n o ffs e t J O G 2 4 0 9 6
E x
J O G x E n a b le 8 1 9 2
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 R F G z e ro
A d d .
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 Q S P
+ 0
6
1
-1 0 V ...+ 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
S W I
C 2 2 0 , C 2 2 1
E 3 Z s e t
C 0 2 8 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6
S la v e 0 G e b e r-
k o n s t.
S p e e d tr im m in g
C 2 5 7 5 1 2
C 0 3 2 C 0 3 3 ± 5 0 0 0 rp m 1 .8 · C 0 1 1 n a t 1 0 2 4
+ s e t
n - c o n tr o lle r in 2 0 4 8
+ + 4 0 9 6
S e t p h a s e C 2 5 6 - % o f n m a x
G e a rb o x 8 1 9 2
in te g r a to r P h a s e tr im m in g P h a s e c tr l.
C 0 5 0 Q S P M s e t in %
+ C 2 5 5
+ o f M I m a x
Signal-flow charts
n - c o n tr o lle r m a x
X 5 C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8 + + - C 0 5 6 C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
P h a s e C o n t. +
E n c . P h a s e o ffs e t c tr l. e rro r C 2 5 4
c o n s t. C 0 0 5 A c t. p h a s e C 2 5 2 lim it lim it -
D ig _ In _ 1 5 1 2 5 3 in te g r a to r
C 1 9 8 C 0 7 0 V p n
1 0 2 4 C 0 4 7 IF a c t
5 2 C 0 7 1 T n n
2 0 4 8
M o n ito r in g C 0 5 1 C 0 7 2 K d n
4 0 9 6 5 3 I s e t
lo g ic n a c t
X 7 8 1 9 2
5 2 C 0 6 3
R e s o lv e r
e v a lu a tio n
T o r q u e lim ita tio n
1 2 1 0 V = m a x . lim ita tio n
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4900Str112
16-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
16-2
48XX/49XXSHB0399
Signal-flow charts
D ig . fr e q u e n c y S la v e fo r d ig . fr e q u e n c y b a r , c o n fig u r a tio n C 0 0 5 = - 6 x - D F o u tp u t
FIG 10-2
in p u t
X 9 X 8
to n e x t
d r iv e
C 0 4 2
D ig _ In _ 2 c w /c c w 2 1 2 2 Q S P
Signal-flow chart Configuration C005 = -6X- (DF bus)
E n c o d e r c o n s ta n t C 0 4 6
n s e t
N u m . D e n o m .
C 1 0 5
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8 C 0 3 2 C 0 3 3 ± 5 0 0 0 rp m
E n c . +
± 1 +
c o n s t.
+ S e t p h a s e C 2 5 6 -
G e a rb o x C 0 4 1 in te g r a to r P h a s e tr im m in g P h a s e c o n tr o lle r
5 1 2
1 0 2 4 S p e e d + C 2 5 5
+
2 0 4 8 tr im m in g
C 2 5 7 + + -
4 0 9 6 P h a s e C o n to u r in g
8 1 9 2 P h a s e o ffs e t c o n tr o lle r e r r o r C 2 5 4
A c t. p h a s e C 2 5 2 lim it lim it
in te g r a to r
In c re m e n ta l M o n ito r in g lo g ic
e n c o d e r in p u t n s e t a t
X 5 n - c o n tr o lle r in
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8
% o f n m a x
E n c . 1 8 0 % o f n m a x
c o n s t. C 0 5 0
D ig _ In _ 1 5 1 2 C 0 0 5
1 0 2 4 6 3
R e s o lv e r 2 0 4 8
6 2
C 0 5 1
n a c t
Q S P M s e t in %
4 0 9 6 C 1 9 8 o f M m a x Im a x
in p u t 8 1 9 2 n - c o n tr o lle r C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
6 3 C 0 5 6
X 7 +
R e s o lv e r - 6 2 -
e v a lu a tio n
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 7 0 V p n
1 0 0 % IF a c t
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 0 7 2 K d n
2 + +
Is e t
1 - C 0 6 3
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
C 2 8 2
4900Str113
Show/Hide Bookmarks
D ig . fr e q u e n c y S la v e o r D F - c a s c a d e , c o n fig u r a tio n C 0 0 5 = - 7 2 - D F o u tp u t
FIG 10-3
E n c o d e r c o n s ta n t
in p u t N u m e r a to r D e n o m in a to r
X 5 1 6 B it C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8 C 0 3 0 X 8
E n c . E n c . to n e x t
c o n s t c o n s t. d r iv e
C 0 4 2
D ig _ In _ 1 5 1 2 C W /C C W 2 1 2 2 Q S P 5 1 2
Signal-flow chart Configuration C005 = -72- (DF cascade)
1 0 2 4 1 0 2 4
2 0 4 8 2 0 4 8 C 0 4 6
n s e t
4 0 9 6 4 0 9 6
8 1 9 2 C 1 0 5 8 1 9 2
C 0 3 2 C 0 3 3 ± 5 0 0 0 rp m
+
± 1 + -
+ S e t p h a s e C 2 5 6
G e a rb o x C 0 4 1 in te g r a to r P h a s e tr im m in g P h a s e c tr l.
S p e e d + C 2 5 5
+
tr im m in g
R e s o lv e r C 2 5 7 + + - P h a s e C o n t.
in p u t A c t. p h a s e
P h a s e o ffs e t c o n tr o lle r e rro r C 2 5 4
C 2 5 2 lim it lim it
X 7 in te g r a to r
R e s o lv e r
e v a lu a tio n
M o n ito r in g
n s e t a t lo g ic
% o f n m a x
1 8 0 % o f n m a x
C 0 5 0
M in %
C 0 5 1 Q S P s e t
Signal-flow charts
n a c t o f M I m a x
C 1 9 8 n - c tr l.
m a x
C 0 5 6 C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
+
-
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 7 0 V p n
1 0 0 % IF a c t
C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6 C 0 7 2 K d n
2 + + Is e t
1 - C 0 6 3
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
C 2 8 2
48XX/49XXSHB0399
4900Str114
16-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Signal-flow charts
S o u rc e s (C 1 4 5 ) T a rg e ts (C 1 4 6 ) S o u rc e s (C 1 4 5 )
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 F ix e d s e t-v a lu e s C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
0
O ffs e t 1
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 3 4 F ix 1
F ix 2
B ip o la r a n a lo g F ix x
in p u t P r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r F D E E n a b le
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5 C 2 2 2
+ C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
8 V p V p (C 2 2 2 ) C 3 2 9
-1 0 V ... + 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 V p 2 (C 3 2 5 ) 0
1
1
0 C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
V p V p (C 2 2 2 )
O ffs e t S w itc h - o v e r fo r
V p 2 (C 3 2 5 ) e x te r n a l V p p r e s e le c tio n
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 V p 3 (C 3 2 6 )
B ip o la r a n a lo g s e t 1 s e t 2 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
In p u t C 3 2 8 C 3 2 7
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
+ C 2 2 3 C 2 2 4
6 T n T v V p
-1 0 V ... + 1 0 V C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 R F G E v a lu a tio n
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 -1 0 0 % ...+ 1 0 0 % C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
O ffs e t -
C 3 3 2 T ir
B ip o la r a n a lo g C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 3 3 3 T if I-c o m p o n e n t P r o c e s s c o n tr o lle r
d iffe r e n c e in p u t C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
o ff n o t a c tiv e
A d ju s tm e n t C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5 R F G
+ R e m o v e
3 C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 v ia F D E C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
4
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
-1 8 0 V ... + 1 8 0 V C 3 3 4 T ir
C 3 3 8 C 3 3 5 T if
O ffs e t C 1 9 1
± 2 0 0 %
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 A r ith m e tic b lo c k 2 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
B ip o la r a n a lo g C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 + ·
w h e n d iv is io n - /
d iffe r e n c e in p u t C 3 3 8
C 3 3 9 o p e n e d 1 0 0 % -C 3 3 9 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
2 +
1 C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7
-1 0 V ... + 1 0 V
C 6 1 0 ± 2 0 0 %
P r im a r y fr e q u e n c y /in c r e m e n ta l e n c o d e r in p u t C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 A d d itio n b lo c k 1 + + C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
D ig _ In _ 1 ( X 5 )
C 6 1 1 + - C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5 C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
E n c .
c o n s t. C 6 1 2
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
P r im a r y fr e q u e n c y /in c r e m e n ta l e n c o d e r in p u t
D ig _ In _ 2 ( X 9 ) C 6 0 1
C 6 0 0
± 2 0 0 %
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 6 C 0 2 7 C 0 2 8 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 A r ith m e tic b lo c k 3 + ·
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
E n c . w h e n d iv is io n - /
C 6 0 1
c o n s t. o p e n e d 1 0 0 % -C 6 0 2 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 6 0 2
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
R e s o lv e r in p u t ( X 7 )
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 C 6 4 0
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 6 4 1 1
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 P T 1 - e le m e n t C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
S q u a re -w a v e
g e n e ra to r C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 6 2 1 C 6 2 1
C 6 7 0 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5 C 6 2 2 ± 2 0 0 %
1
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 D e a d b a n d e le m e n t C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
0
C 6 7 1
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
0 t
C 6 6 0
C 6 7 2 C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 A c t. v a lu e g e n e r a to r C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
0 t
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5 C 6 1 4 ± 2 0 0 %
C 3 8 2 n a c t C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 A d d itio n b lo c k 2 + + C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 6 1 5 + - C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 0 5 0 n s e t C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
D e v ia tio n C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 6 1 6
fro m n - c o n tr o lle r C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 6 3 2 C 6 3 1 C 6 3 0
R F G o u tp u t
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 L im ita tio n 1 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
n - c o n tr o lle r C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
o u tp u t C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 6 5 3 C 6 5 0 C 6 5 1
C 6 5 2 ± 2 0 0 %
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 D T 1 e le m e n t C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 6 3 6 C 6 3 5
C 6 3 7
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 L im ita tio n 2 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
S to ra g e R e s e t
C 5 8 1 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
C 5 8 3 C 5 8 4
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C o m p a ra to r 1
F D O
C 5 8 0
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
S to ra g e R e s e t
C 5 9 1 C 5 9 3 C 5 9 4
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
C o m p a ra to r 2
F D O
C 5 9 0
M o to r p o te n tio m e te r C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
fu n c tio n
C 2 6 2 C 2 6 3 C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
T ir T if
S a m p le u n d H o ld
fu n c tio n C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
1
S & H
0
C 2 6 0 C 2 6 0 C 1 4 5 /C 0 0 5
F D I C 2 6 1 C 2 6 7 C 2 6 4 C 2 6 5
C 2 6 4 C 2 6 5
4900Str115a
16-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Signal-flow charts
T a rg e ts (C 1 4 6 )
C W 2 1 2 2 C C W C 0 4 2 C o n fig u r a tio n C 0 0 5 = - 1 0 - to - 1 3 -
Q S P O ffs e t
C 1 1 0 /C 1 0 9
C 0 1 2 T ir
C 0 1 3 T if C 1 8 2
n
n m a x M o n ito r 1
s e t1 C 0 1 1 Q S P C 1 3 4 +
S ig n a l s o u r c e s 6 2
C 0 4 6 C 1 9 0 C 1 1 0 /C 1 1 1
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 0 5
C 1 1 0 /C 1 0 8 ± 1 0 V /± 2 0 m A
0 + ·
± 1 - /
1 C 4 6 O ffs e t
1 0 0 % - C 4 9
C 1 1 0 /C 1 0 9
C 0 4 1
C W /C C W F D E
J O G 1 F D E C 2 8 6 C 2 8 7
J O G 2 R F G s to p in % o f n m a x M o n ito r 2
J O G x E n a b le +
F D E S ig n a l s o u r c e s 6 3
C 1 1 0 /C 1 1 1
R F G z e ro C 1 1 0 /C 1 0 8 ± 1 0 V /± 2 0 m A
n
s e t2 Q S P
C 0 4 9 P r im a r y fr e q u e n c y
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 ± 1 0 0 %
o u tp u t
0
1
S ig n a l s o u r c e s
n s e t a t n - c o n tr o lle r C 0 0 5 /C 1 1 0 /C 1 1 1
S P I C 1 1 0 /C 1 0 8 X 8
in % o f n m a x
C 2 2 0 , C 2 2 1
F D E C 2 4 2
C 0 5 0
C 0 5 1
Z s e t o ff n a ct F D O n a c t > n x
C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 7
C 0 0 5 C o n fig u r a tio n n - c o n tr o lle r Q S P M s e t in %
C 0 0 5 T a c h o m e te r 1 1 n a c t C 1 9 9 C 0 7 1 T n n o f M m a x C 2 4 3
C 0 7 2 K d n C 0 5 6 C 0 4 6 C 4 6 o r C 4 9
C 0 0 5 In c re m e n ta l e n c o d e r C 0 5 1 > 1 F D O
1 3 C 0 4 9 > n x
+ + +
C 0 0 5 R e s o lv e r C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 7
1 2
- + +
C 0 2 5 /C 0 2 7 C 2 4 4
1 0 C 0 5 4
VA B - C 1 9 8 IA F D O I A > Ix
A r m a tu r e v o lta g e C 2 3 2 E n a b le
C 2 3 5 C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 7
I a c t I · R - C o m p e n s a tio n A c t. v a lu e filte r
I 0
F a c t 1 C 2 4 5
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 1 0 0 % (O ff) IF F D O I F > Ix
IF- c o n tr o lle r
C 1 1 6 /C 1 1 7
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7
S w itc h fo r A d a p tio n o f
C 3 1 0
e x t. e x c ita t io n c o n tr o lle r p a r a m e te r s
C 3 1 1
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 c h a r a c te r is tic C 0 7 0 C u r r e n t lim ita tio n
V p C 3 2 4 C 3 1 2
V p (C 0 7 0 ) C 3 1 3 d e p e n d in g o n s p e e d
V p 2 (C 3 2 0 ) C 3 1 4
1
0
n se t V p V p (C 0 7 0 ) C 1 4 5 /C 1 4 6
C 3 1 9
C 0 5 0 V p 2 (C 3 2 0 )
S w itc h - o v e r fo r Is e t
e x te r n a l V p p r e s e le c t io n 1 0 0 %
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 n 0 n 1
V p 3 (C 3 2 1 )
+ 1 0 0 % C 0 4 7 C 0 6 3
C 3 2 2 C 3 2 3 +
- Im a x
T o r q u e lim itio n C 0 2 2 , C 0 2 3
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 8 C 0 1 7
C 2 8 2
A d d itio n a l to r q u e s e tp o in t 1 n a c t A 1 n a c t < n x
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 C 1 4 9
A d d itio n a l to r q u e s e tp o in t 2 n - c o n tr o lle r
I · t A 2 o u tp u t
T R IP C 2 8 5
= M m a x
C 0 6 7
C 2 4 1
Ia c t L im it o f r a te o f r is e R F G
A 3
C 0 5 4 = R F G in p u t
I- c o n tr o lle r T r ig g e r p u ls e g e n e r a tio n o u tp u t
I 6
a c t + a lp h a C 0 1 9
L 1 + ...L 3 - C 0 5 1
- n a c t A 4 n a c t = 0
C u r r e n t d e te c tio n
C 0 8 4 C W /C C W C 0 7 9 C 0 9 0
C 0 9 0
V A ra te d 1 C 2 4 0
C 2 3 3 C 2 3 4 C 0 5 0
A 5 n a c t = n s e t
C 0 5 1
n a c t
C 0 5 2 +
V A a c t - C 1 8 7
C 2 3 0 C 2 3 1 IF s e t T r ig g e r p u ls e
I F m in
V a b - c o n to lle r IF - c o n t r o l l e r g e n e r a tio n
C 0 8 3
IF ra te d -
C 3 9 2 C 0 7 7 V P I_ F R
I C 1 8 8 C 0 7 8 T N I_ F R
C 1 4 6 /C 1 4 7 0 ...1 0 0 %
F s e t
I
F a c t
B u s s y s te m fo r (a n a lo g ) s ig n a ls
4900Str115b
FIG 10-4 Signal-flow chart Configuration C005 = -1X- (speed control)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
16-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Signal-flow charts
16-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
EDS4900U--M
00408860
Manual
Part M
Glossary
Table of keywords
DC speed controller
4800/4900
Show/Hide Bookmarks
revised
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Glossary
17 Glossary
Term Meaning
AIF Automation interface (X1)
CE Communauté Européenne (English: European Community)
Code For entry and display (access) of parameter values.
Variable addressing according to the format ”code/subcode” (Cxxxx/xx).
All variables can be addressed via the code digits.
Ctrl. enable Controller enable
Ctrl. inhibit Controller inhibit ( = Controller enable )
FDI freely programmable digital input
FDO freely programmable digital output
Fieldbus For data exchange between superimposed control and positioning control,
e. g. InterBus or PROFIBUS.
Following error Difference between current position set-value and position actual value.
Following error monitoring Monitors the actual following error for exceeding the following error tolerance and, if necessary, sets a
trip.
Following error tolerance If the following error reaches a certain following error tolerance, a trip is set.
InterBus Industrial communication standard to DIN E19258
JOG Fixed speed or input for fixed speed
LECOM Lenze Communication
LEMOC2 PC-program (DOS) for Lenze controllers
LF Master frequency
LU Undervoltage
Master Masters are host systems, e.g. PLC or PC.
NCO Numeric clock oscillator
OU Overvoltage
PC Personal Computer
PLC Programmable logic controller
PM Permanent magnet
Process data For instance, setpoints and actual values of controllers which must be exchanged within a minimum of
time.
Process data are usually small amounts of data which are to be transmitted cyclically.
For PROFIBUS, these data are transmitted in the logic data channel.
PROFIBUS Communication standard DIN 19245, consisting of part 1, part 2 and part 3
QSP Quick stop
RFG Ramp function generator
SIO Serial Input / Output
Slave Bus participant which may only send after the request of the master.Controllers are slaves.
SSI Synchronous serial interface
SVI Set-value integrator (ramp function generator)
48XX/49XXSHB0399
17-1
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Glossary
17-2 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
18 Table of keywords
0 ... 9 Adjustment
Field controller, 7-17, 7-18
2Q operation, Change of the direction of Gain, 7-19
rotation, 4-23 I*R compensation, 7-56
4Q/2Q operation, 7-60 Offset, 7-19
Redundant actual value feedback, 7-56
Speed controller, 7-18
A
Ambient temperature, Operation, 3-1
A/D conversion, 7-29
Analog inputs and outputs, 4-14
Absolute value generator, 7-78
Application as directed, 1-2
Acceleration, 7-19, 7-85
Application conditions, 3-3
Acceleration and deceleration times, 7-6
Arithmetic blocks, 7-70
Accessories
Armature choke, 14-3
Fuses, 13-2
Mains chokes, 13-7 Armature current
Networking, 13-15 Actual-value display, 4-16
RFI filter, 13-12 Monitoring, 7-28
System cable, 13-10 Armature fuse, 13-4
Act. value, Adjustment of tacho voltage, Armature time constant, 7-14
4-15
Assembly space, 3-1
Actual speed, Filter, 7-94
Automation module, Winding drive,
Actual value 15-20
Adjustment of the tacho voltage, 7-11 Auxiliary starting circuit, Field controller,
Armature current, 4-16 4-6
Display, 12-5
Displays, 7-117
Feedback, 7-10
B
Actual value feedback, redundant actual Baud rate, 4-26, 12-2
value feedback, 7-55 Brake control, 5-6, 7-62
Adaptation
Current controller, 7-14
Process controller, 7-68
C
Speed controller, 7-93 Cable protection fuses, 13-3
Addition, 7-81 Cable-protection fuses, 15-24
Torque, Additional values, 7-89 Cascading factor, 7-48
Additional set-value, 7-12 CE conformity, 1-4
Additional setpoint, 5-6 CE-typical drive system, 4-29
Additional value, 7-89 Components, 4-30
Filters, 4-31
Addtional set-value, 7-2
48XX/49XXSHB0399
18-3
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
Grounding, 4-32 Process controller, 7-68

Installation, 4-29 Quick stop, 5-6
IT mains, 4-4 Declaration of conformity, Low-Voltage,
Screening, 4-31 1-5
Signal cables, 4-31
Decleration of conformity, Electromagne-
Cleaning, 9-1 tic compatibility, 1-7
Code Digital frequency
Change, 7-113 Bar, 7-42
Code table, 7-119 Cascade, 7-46
Input selection, 7-113 Coupling, 7-39
Code level, 7-110 Normalization of the inputs, 7-30
Output, 7-35, 7-50
Code set Output frequency, 5-10
Changeable, 7-117, 7-119
Selection, 4-24
Display, 7-117
Digital inputs and outputs, 4-17
Commissioning, 5-1
Digital output functions, 7-27
Comparator, 7-86
Digitial frequency, Output, 4-25
Compensation equipment, 4-4
Dimensions, Controller, 3-8
Condensation, 3-3
Direction of rotation, 5-6
Configuration
Armature voltage feedback, 7-10 Display functions, 7-117
Change, 5-8, 7-98 DRIVECOM agreement, 12-3
Digital frequency, 7-39 DT1 element, 7-85
Incremental encoder feedback, 7-13
Resolver, 7-13
Tacho feedback, 7-11 E
Connection Earthing, 4-4
Incremental encoder, 4-22 Group drives, 4-4
Resolver, 4-21 Mass loops, 4-4
Control cables, Screening, 4-3 EC Directive
Control module Electromagnetic compatibility, 1-6
Considered standards, 1-7
Configuration switch, 7-4
Low-Voltage, 1-4
Layout of the connections, 4-13
Machinery, 1-9
Switch for configuration, 4-13, 4-15
Electrical isolation, 4-2, 4-26
Controller enable, 5-5
Mass loops, 4-4
Encoder emulation, 4-25
D
Excitation characteristic
D/A conversion, 7-35 External, 7-95
Dancer position control, 7-59 Internal, 7-16
DC tacho, 7-11
Dead-band element, 7-84
F
Deceleration ramp Factory setting, 7-111
Motor potentiometer, 7-74
18-4 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
FAI, 7-29 Gases, 3-3

Fault Gearbox, Limitation of rate of rise, 7-139
Cause, 8-4 Gearbox factor, 7-39
History buffer, 8-3 Digital frequency cascade, 7-48
Remedy, 8-4 Fixed set-values, 7-77
Reset, 12-1 Speed-synchronous running, 7-51
Fault indication Ground, Earth loops, 8-4
Display priority, 7-98
Reset, 8-6
Grounding, 4-32
RFI filter, 4-29
Fault message, 8-4
FDI, 7-22 H
FDO, 7-24
History buffer, 8-3
Features, Controller, 3-1
Hoist, 4-20
Field controller
Field current monitoring, 7-28 Hoists, Overspeeds, 2-3
Mains chokes, 13-8 Holding brake, 7-62
Separate supply, 4-9
Field current reduction, 7-61 I
Field heating, 7-61 I component
Field weakening operation, 7-15 Process controller, 7-67, 7-69
Fieldbus connection Quick stop, 7-63
InterBus, 4-27 Speed controller, 7-18
Interface enable, 12-3 Identification, 7-118
PROFIBUS, 4-28 IMP, 7-109, 8-2
Fixed set-value, 7-77 Incremental encoder
Following error, 7-54 Connection, 4-22
Fuse, 13-2 Monitoring, 4-23
Holder, 13-5 Parameter setting, 7-13
Internal, 13-5 Supply, 4-23
Fuse holder, Dimensions, 13-5 Input of the direction of rotation, 7-37,

7-45, 7-48
Inputs
G Analog, 4-15
Gain Digital, 4-19
Adaption, 7-140 FAI, 7-29
Analog inputs, 7-20, 7-122 FDI, 7-22
Angle controller, 7-137 Free assignable analog, 7-29
Armature circuit, 7-14 Freely assignable digital, 7-22
Field controller, 7-127 Freely assignable, analog, 5-9
Field current controller, 7-16 Freely assignable, digital, 5-8
Monitor outputs, 7-19 Instability
Process controller, 7-136 Armature circuit, 7-14
48XX/49XXSHB0399
18-5
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
Field controller circuit, 7-15, 7-16, 7-17 LECOM2, Interface, 12-1

Speed, 7-94 Level converter, 4-26, 13-15
Installation Liability, 1-3
CE-typical drive system, 4-29
Connection, 4-5 Limitation
Electrical, 4-2 Armature voltage, 7-16
Installation height, 3-3 Limitation elements, 7-79
Mechanical, 3-1 N dependent armature current limitation,
7-90
Integral action time Speed set-value, 7-9, 7-11
Field controller, 7-16, 7-127
Limitation elements, 7-79
InterBus, Interface module, 4-27
M
InterBus
Enable, 12-3 Main set-value, 7-2
Interface, 12-1 Addition, 7-14
JOG set-values, 7-2
IT mains, 4-4
Adjustment, 7-11
Motor potentiometer, 7-73
J Ramp function generator, 7-6
JOG Mains
Enable, 7-3, 7-4 Conditions, 4-4, 7-105
Set-values, 7-2 Monitoring, 7-105
Synchronisation, 7-105
Types, 4-4
K
Mains chokes, 13-7
Keypad
Mains fuses, 13-3
Input selection, 7-113
Operation, 7-111 Mains switch-off, 7-27
Mains voltage, 3-4, 8-4
L 400 V, 3-4
500 V, 3-6
Labelling, 1-1, 1-2 Monitoring, 7-105
Language, 3-1, 7-117 Maintenance, 9-1
LECOM Manufacturer’s Declaration, Machinery,
Code, Fault reset, 12-1 1-9
Interface, Code bank, 12-2 Master, 7-40, 7-50
LECOM code Master current, 4-15
FDI, 7-23
FDO, 7-25
Master voltage, 4-15
High precision set-value display, 12-5 Message
LECOM-A/B, 4-26 Display priority, 7-98
Fault, 8-4
Interface, 12-1
LED state display, 7-109
Netowrking, 4-26
LECOM1, 4-26, 12-1 Monitor
Baud rate, 12-2 Changeover current/voltage, 4-16
Controller address, 12-1 Outputs, 4-16
18-6 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
Parameter setting, 7-33 With host connection , 4-26

Monitoring functions, 7-96 Operator’s safety, 4-2
Change, 7-96 Optical fibres, 13-15
Display priority, 7-98
I(2)xt monitoring, 7-101
Outputs
Ixt monitoring, 7-100 Analog, 4-16
Delay time, 7-24
Message, 7-97
Digital, 4-19
Possible assignments, 7-97
Trip, 7-96 FDO, 7-24
Warning, 7-96 Freely assignable analog, 7-33
Freely assignable digital, 7-24
Monitoring functions Freely assignable, analog, 5-10
Following error, 7-54 Freely assignable, digital, 5-9
Phase controller limit, 7-53 Fuse monitoring, 4-20
Motor Relay, 4-20
Armature time constant, 7-14 Overload
Armature time constants, 5-4 Controller, 7-100
Blocking protection, 7-103 Monitoring, 7-101
Checking, 8-7 Motor, 7-101
Connection, 4-5
Motor data input, 5-4
Overtemperature, 7-126
Overload monitoring, 7-101
Voltage limitation, 7-16 P
Motor potentiometer, 7-73 Parameter, 7-110
Control, 7-74 Change, 7-111
Deactivation function, 7-74 Channel, 12-3
Memory function, 7-75 Fault, 7-97
Input selection, 7-113
N Parameter level, 7-110
Networking, Accessories, 13-15 Parameter set
Noise immunity, 3-3 Change, 7-57
Dancer position control, 7-59
Load, 7-58, 7-114
O Store, 7-114
Offset Parameter setting, 7-108
Adjustment of analog inputs, 7-19 Password protection, 7-115
Adjustment of monitor outputs, 7-33
Peripherals
Speed synchronism, 7-51
Interface module 2110IB, 4-27
Operating unit, 7-109, 7-118 Interface module 2130IB, 4-28
Operating modes, 7-116 Level converter 2101IB, 4-26
Operation Phase
Control mode 4Q/2Q, 7-60 Controller, 7-53
Operating state, 12-1 Controller limit, 7-53
Speed controlled operation, 7-1 Synchronisation, 7-52
State, 7-126 Trimming, 7-54
Torque controlled, 7-37
48XX/49XXSHB0399
18-7
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
Power connection, Standard controller, Resolver, 4-21, 7-13

4-6 Encoder emulation, 4-25
Power derating, 3-1 Rotor position, 7-54, 7-124
Process controller, 7-67 RS232/485, 4-26, 12-1
Inputs, 7-68
Outputs, 7-69
S
Process data channel, 12-3
S&H (Sample and Hold), 7-75
PROFIBUS, 12-3
Enable, 12-3 S-shaped ramp function generator, 7-94
PT1 element, 7-80 Safety information
General, 2-3
Pulse inhibit
Icons, 2-4
Change of the monitoring, 7-96
Message, 8-2 Scope of delivery, 1-1
Screening
Q Control and signal cable, 4-3, 4-31
Power connections, 4-30
QSP, 5-6
Set-value
Qualified personnel, 2-2 Additional set-value, 7-2
Quick stop, 4-19, 5-6 Bar, 7-42
Brake control, 7-62 Cascade, 7-46
Code set, 7-123 Digital frequency coupling, 7-39
Possible configuration, 5-7 FIXED set-values, 7-77
With activated phase controller, 7-53 Gain adjustment, 7-19
JOG, 7-2
Limitation, 7-9, 7-11
R Main set-value, 7-2
Ramp function generator, 7-2, 7-68 Master current, 7-4
Additional set-value, 7-2 Motor potentiometer, 7-73
Main set-value, 7-2, 7-6 Process controller, 7-67, 7-68
Motor potentiometer, 7-74 Selection, 7-1
Process controller, 7-67 Setting range, 7-14
S-shaped, 7-94 Torque control, 7-37
Torque set-value, 7-89
Rated data, 3-4
Armature voltage, 3-4, 7-60 Setting range
Ratio, 7-123 Current, 3-1
Speed, 14-4
RDY, 7-109, 8-2
Signal-flow chart
Ready for operation, Message, 8-2 Armature current limitation, 7-90
Redundant actual value feedback, 7-55 Speed set-value selection, 7-1, 7-9
Relative humidity, 3-3 Torque control, 7-38
Vdown control, 7-18
Relay output, 4-20 Vdown limitation, 7-17
Reset, Fault indication, 8-6 Signal-flow charts, 16-1
Residual hazards, 2-3
18-8 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
Signals EN 50081-2, 3-3

Analog connection, 4-14 EN 50082-2, 1-7
Connection of digital, 4-17 EN 55011, 1-7, 3-3
Single drives, 4-4 EN 60097, 1-5
EN 60146, 2-1
Slave, 7-42 EN 60439-1, 2-1
Digital frequency bar, 7-42 EN 60529, 1-5
Digital frequency cascade, 7-46 EN 61000-4-2, 1-8, 3-3
Software version, 7-128 EN 61000-4-4, 1-8, 3-3
Speed EN 61000-4-5, 1-8, 3-3
Accuracy, 3-1 EN 61800-3, 1-7
Automatic adjustment, 7-11 ENV 50140, 1-8
Controller adaptation, 7-93 IEC 1000-4-3, 1-8, 3-3
Limitation, 7-89 IEC 22G, 3-3
Maximum speed, 7-14 IEC 249, 1-5
Monitoring, 7-27 IEC 326, 1-5
Ratio synchronism, 7-51 prEN 50178, 2-1
Set-value limitation, 7-9 VDE0220, 4-5
Setting range, 3-1 Standards, 2-1
Synchronism, 7-51 Standstill excitation, 7-61
Synchronous running, 7-51
Trimming, 7-53 Supply
Separate, control electronics, 4-11
Speed control Separate, field-current bridge, 4-9
With additional set-value, 7-1
With armature voltage feedback, 7-10 Switch-on display, 7-118
With incremental encoder, 7-13 System cable, 13-10
With resover feedback, 7-13 Digital frequency coupling, 13-11
With tacho feedback, 7-11 Incremental encoder, 13-11
Speed controller, 7-18 Resolver, 13-10
Adaptation, 7-93 System fault, 7-97, 8-4
Speed fields, With armature voltage feed-
back, 7-10 T
Square-wave generator, 7-83 Table of attributes, 7-145
Standard Tacho
Considered, 1-5, 1-7
Adjustment, 7-11
IEC 364, 2-1, 2-2
Rated voltages, 4-21
Degree of pollution, 3-3
DIN 40050, 3-3 Technical data, 3-1
DIN 42017/VDE 0530 part 8, 4-5 Dimensions, 3-8
DIN 43673, 4-5 Electrical data, 3-4
DIN VDE 0100, 1-5, 2-1 General data/application conditions, 3-3
DIN VDE 0110, 1-5, 2-1, 3-3 Temperature
DIN VDE 0110 VBG 4, 2-1 Heat sink, 8-4
DIN VDE 0160, 1-5, 2-1 Motor, 7-101
DIN VDE 0530/8, 4-5 Storage and transport, 3-3
DIN VDE 0558, 2-1
DIN VDE 0660 part 500, 2-1
48XX/49XXSHB0399
18-9
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
Terminals Vab limitation, 7-16

Changing the signal assignment, 5-8 Variant design
Control connections, 4-13 V011 InterBus, 4-27
Type of operation, 7-116 V013 PROFIBUS, 4-28
Torque Variants, V014 500V mains voltage, 3-6
Controlled operation, 7-37
Reduction, 7-4
W
Trip
Controller inhibit, 5-5 Warning
Display priority, 7-98 Display priority, 7-98
LED state display, 7-109 Redundant actual value feedback, 7-56
Operating state, 12-2 Warranty, 1-3
Phase controller limit, 7-53
Waste disposal, 1-3
Reset, 8-6, 12-1
Troubleshooting, 8-1
Cause, 8-4
Z
Zero track, 7-124
V Actual phase output, 12-5
Digital frequency output, 7-36
Vab control, 7-18
18-10 48XX/49XXSHB0399
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
48XX/49XXSHB0399
18-11
Show/Hide Bookmarks
Index
18-12 48XX/49XXSHB0399

EVD - 4800-4900 Manual - v1-0 - EN PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EVD - 4800-4900 Manual - v1-0 - EN PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EVD - 4800-4900 Manual - v1-0 - EN PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Show/Hide Bookmarks Table of contents

Preface and general

Application of brake units

Accessories and motors

DC speed controller 4800/4900

Manual 4800 / 4900

E Troubleshooting and fault elimination

Explanation: - in the Manual.

2 Safety information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

4.3 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

7.5.5 Absolute value generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71

15 Application examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

1) This chapter is part of the Lenze documentation structure.

Preface and general information

Preface and general information

1 Preface and general information

1.1 About these Operating Instructions ...

1.1.1 Terminology used

1.2 Scope of delivery

Preface and general information

1.3 48XX/49XX controller

1.3.2 Application as directed

Preface and general information

1.3.3 Legal regulations

- Warranty claims must be made immediately after detecting defects or faults.

Preface and general information

1.4 EC Directives/Declaration of Conformity

1.4.1 What is the purpose of EC directives?

1.4.2 What does the CE mark imply?

1.4.3 EC Low-Voltage Directive

Preface and general information

EC Declaration of Conformity ’99

for the purpose of the EC Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)

48XX/49XX controllers were developed, designed, and manufactured in

Lenze GmbH & Co KG, Postfach 10 13 52, D-31763 Hameln

(i. V. Schäfer) (i. A. Tolksdorf)

Preface and general information

1.4.4 EC Directive Electromagnetic Compatibility

Preface and general information

EC Declaration of Conformity ’97 for the purpose of the EC Directive

on Electromagnetic compatibility (89/336/EEC)

48XX/49XXcontrollers cannot be driven in stand-alone operation for the purposes

Lenze GmbH & Co KG, Postfach 10 13 52, D-31763 Hameln

Generic standards considered:

Generic standards considered for the test of noise emission:

Preface and general information

Generic standards considered for the test of noise emission:

(i. V. Schäfer) (i. A. Tolksdorf)

Preface and general information

1.4.5 EC Machinery Directive

For the purpose of the Machinery Directive, ”machinery” means an assembly of

for the purpose of the EC Machinery Directive (89/392/EEC)

48XX/49XX controllers were developed, designed, and manufactured under the

Lenze GmbH & Co KG, Postfach 10 13 52, D-31763 Hameln

Commissioning of the controllers is prohibited until it is proven that the machine

Preface and general information

Safety and application notes for controllers

2.1 Persons responsible for the safety

2.2 General safety information